^^^^
^^
-A^ -^
^--^
m
V*t
^M^
y*!**'-
f??sr-*.j
b
PORTA
LINGUARUM ORIENTALIUM
INCHOAVIT
J. H. PETERMANN
CONTINUAVIT
HERM. L. STEACK.
ELEMENTA LINGUAEUM
Hebraioae, Phoeniciae, Biblico-Aramaicae,
Samaritanae, Targumicae, Syriacae, Arabicae,
Aethiopicae, Assyriacae, Aegyptiacae, Copticae,
Armeniacae, Persicae, Turcicae, aliarum
studiis academicis accommodaverunt
J. H. Fetermann, H. L. Strack, E. Nestle, A. Socin, F. Fraetorius,
A. Merx, Aug. Mueller, Friedr. Delitzsch, C. Salemann,
Ad. Erman, V. Shukovski, Th. Noeldeke,
O. Steindorff, B. Bruennow, Dav. H. Mueller, G.Jacob, aiu.
PAES IV.
ABIC GEAMMAR
BY
A. SOCIN.
SECOND EDITION.
BERLIN,
REUTHER & REICHARD
LONDON NEW YORK
WILLIAMS & NORGATE B. WESTERMANN & Co.
U, HENBIETTA STBEET 812, BROADWAY.
1895.
ARABIC GRAMMAR
PARADIGMS, LITERATURE, EXERCISES
AND
GLOSSARY
Dr. a. SOCIN
PROFESSOR OBDINABIUS IX THE UNIVERSITY OF I-EIPZIG.
SECOND ENGLISH EDITION
TRANSLATED FEOM THE THIED GERMAN EDITION
BY THE
Rev. ARCH. R. S. KENNEDY D. D.
PROFESSOR OF HEBREW ETC. IN THE XTNIVEBSITY OF EDINBDROH.
OF THB
TKIVERSITY
LONDON, BERLIN,
WILLIAMS & NORGATE REUTHER & REICHARD
1895.
roioi
All rights reserved,
including that of translation into other languages.
?J
m
PREFACE f^A.
TO THE
SECOND ENGLISH EDITION.
The aim of the following pages is to furnish intend-
ing students of classical Arabic with the most import-
ant rules both of the Accidence and of the Syntax
in the briefest possible form. The present edition, the
second in English, is a translation of the third German
edition of 1894, to which, save for a few corrections
and additions, it in all respects corresponds. Its
German counterpart has been considerably altered
compared with the second edition because of the
publishers' intention to issue a separate chrestomathy
of Arabic prose. Professor R. Bruennow, a scholar
of approved ability, was entrusted with the prepara-
tion of this work which appeared in the year 1894.
The connected narratives which formerly composed
the chrestomathy of the grammar were, according to
arrangement, incorporated in Bruennow's work, and
consequently had to be dropped from the new edition
VI Preface.
of the grammar. On the other hand the latter was
now extended, more particularly in the part dealing
with the syntax, with the result that it will now be
found, with few exceptions, to be sufficient for the
understanding of the new chrestomathy. At the same
time,, the fact must again be emphasised that the
present work does not pretend to take the place of
any of the larger treatises ; the English student who
wishes to advance beyond the elements of Arabic must
have recourse to the latest edition (the third) of
Wright's excellent grammar. For this reason the
author has deemed it his duty to adhere to his former
view and to decline, in a book intended for beginners,
to enter into the technical terminology of the Arab
grammarians — which may safely be left to the larger
grammars; still the Arabic specialist will easily dis-
cover that their views have been taken into account
even in the present elementary work. The best intro-
duction to this department of study will be found to
be the reading of the Agrumiye, which Bruennow has
printed in his Chrestomathy.
In order to lighten the first lessons in grammar,
the exercises consisting of short sentences and anec-
dotes have been increased by the addition of a few
short stories, by means of which a sort of stepping
stone is provided to the prose chrestomathy.
Preface. YII
The passages for translation into Arabic have been
retained unchanged along with the appropriate
glossary. Experience has shown that this part of the
chrestomathy has unquestionably been of service; and
although I am strongly of opinion that this class of
exercises is of real value in such systematic instruction
as is necessary at first, I am in no wise blind to the
difficulties which the correction of such exercises entails
even on the teacher of Arabic. In order to meet such
difficulties, I have selected single sentences and anec-
dotes from Arabic authors, and have so arranged both
notes and glossary that the student, who in any case
will have to make diligent use of grammar and dic-
tionary, is so to say compelled to reproduce exactly
the Arabic original. From what has just been said,
it is clear that this part of the book, at least, presup-
poses a teacher, for I am convinced that the grammar
of Arabic as a whole, and the syntax in particular,
can only be mastered with extreme difficulty by self-
instruction. I would add, however, that translation
from English should be taken at first in the smallest
possible doses, and even in this way only after the
student has read a part of the Arabic texts.
The synopsis of Arabic literature has also been
extended. Strictly speaking, this section is out of
place in an elementary work; still it may afford a
Vni Preface.
stimulus to a beginner here and there, and supply an
occasional hint to those pursuing the study of Arabic
by themselves, or at a distance from the larger seats
of learning.
The present English edition is an entirely new
translation. This difficult and tedious work has been
undertaken by Professor Archd. R. S. Kennedy of
Edinburgh University. To him and to his late assistant,
Mr. W. B. Stevenson B. D., Vans Dunlop Scholar in
Semitic Languages of the same University, who has
rendered us great assistance in the reading of the
proofs, I cannot omit to express here my warmest
thanks for their co-operation.
A. SociN.
NOTE BY THE TRANSLATOR.
I have only to add to the foregoing, that my
responsibility as translator does not extend to the
English-Arabic exercises and the relative glossary.
A few verbal changes excepted — chiefly where the
^'violence done to the Queen's English" (p. 57*) was
greater than seemed absolutely necessary — these
have been reprinted from the first edition. I have
also inserted an additional reference here and there,
and in the bibliographical section I am responsible
for one or two additional entries.
I wish also to express my personal indebtedness
to Mr.Stevenson, without whose generous co-operation,
owing to my absence in the East, the book would
not have been ready in time for this winter's work.
20*li September 1895.
A. K. S. K.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
GRAMMAR.
I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONOLOGY (§§ 1-1 1).
Page
§ 1. Consonants 1
§ 2. Long Vowels 6
§ 3. Short Vowels, Nunation, Gezma 8
§ 4. Hamza 9
§ 5. TesdTd 11
§ 6. Wasla 12
§ 7. Medda 15
§ 8. The Syllable 16
§ 9. The Tone 17
§ 10. Pause 18
§ 11. The Arabic Cyphers and Contractions 18
II. ACCIDENCE (§§ 12-96).
Chap. I. The Pronoun (§§ 12—15).
§ 12. Personal Pronouns 19
§ 13. Demonstrative Pronouns 21
§ 14. Eelative Pronouns 23
§ 15. Interrogative Pronouns 24
Cha'p. IL The Verb (§§ 16—54).
§ 16. Groundform 24
§ 17. Conspectus of the derived Stems 24
§ 18. L Stem 25
§ 19. IL Stem 26
§ 20. III. Stem 26
§ 21. IV. Stem 27
Contents. XI
Page
§ 22. V. Stem 27
§ 23. VI. Stem 28
§ 24. VII. Stem 28
§ 25. VIII. Stem 28
§ 26. IX. and XI. Stents 29
§ 27. X. Stem 29
§ 28. The Stems of the quadriliteral Verb 30
§ 29. The Passive 30
§ 30. The Tenses 30
§ 31. The Moods 31
§ 32. Imperative 32
§ 33. Inflexion for Person and Number 33
§§ 34—36. Verbs mediae geminatae 34
§§ 37—38. Verba hamzata 36
§ 39. Weak Verbs 38
§ 40. Verba primae 3 et (3 38
§§ 41 — 44. Verba mediae ^ et ,3 39
§§ 45—48. Verba ultimae 3 et (3 41
§ 49. Doubly weak Verbs 44
§ 50. The Verb JI4J 45
§ 51. Verbs of Praise and Blame 46
§ 52. Forms of Admiration 46
§ 53. The Verb with Pronominal Suffixes 46
§ 54. Sign of the Accusative 47
Chap. III. The Noun (§§ 55—90).
a. Formation of Nouns.
§ 55. Primitive and derived Nouns 48
§ 56. Summary of the simple Nouns 49
§ 57. Nouns with Preformatives 49
§ 58. Nouns with Afibrmatives 50
§ 59. Quadriliteral Nouns 50
§ 60. Participles . 50
§ 61. Infinitives 51
§ 62. Verbal Adjectives 53
XII Contents.
Page
§ 63. Intensive Forms 54
§ 64. Nomina loci, instrument, specie! 55
§ 65. Nomina relativa 56
§ 66. Nomina deminutiva 57
§67. Nouns from Stems mediae geminatae 67
§ 68. Nouns from Stems with. Hamza 58
§ 69. Nouns from Stems primae 3 58
§ 70. Nouns from Stems med. ^ and ^ 59
§ 71. Nouns from Stems ultimae ^ and ^ 60
b. Gender of Nouns.
§ 72. Masculine and Feminine Gender 62
§§ 73—74. Formation of the Feminine 63
c. Inflexion of Nouns.
§ 75. Number and Case 65
§ 76. Formation of the Dual and Plural 66
§ 77. Case-endings of Singular. Triptote and Diptote Nouns 67
§ 78. Diptotes 68
§ 79. Inflection of the Determined Noun 68
§ 80. Shortening of Dual and Plural in the Construct State 69
§ 81. Inflection of Nouns in in and an from ult. 3 and ,3 70
§82. The Noun with the Pronominal Suffixes .... 71
§ 83. Vowel Changes in the Pluralis Sanus 72
§ 84. Proper Names compounded with ^^\ 73
§ 85. Vocative 73
§ 86. Collective Nouns 74
§ 87. Broken Plurals 75
§ 88. List of the principal varieties of the Broken Plural . 76
§ 89. Broken Plurals from Quadriliteral Nouns .... 78
§ 90. Nouns of irregular Formation 80
Chap. IV. The Numerals (§§ 91—93).
§91. The Cardinal Numbers 83
§ 92. The Connection of the numeral with the thing numbered 85
§ 93. Ordinal Numbers and Fractions 86
Contents. XIII
Page
Chap. v. Particles (§§ 94—96).
§ 94. Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions 88
§ 96. Inseparable Particles 88
§ 96. Prepositions and Particles with Suffixes .... 89
III. SYNTAX (§§ 97 — 160).
Chap, I. Tenses and Moods (§§ 97—104).
§ 97. Perfect and Imperfect 90
§ 98. Use of the Perfect 91
§ 99. Use of the Imperfect 92
§ 100. Subjunctive 94
§ 101. Modus apocopatus 95
§ 102. Modus energicus 95
§ 103. Passive . , 96
§ 104. Participles 96
Chap. II. Government of the Verb (§§ 105—117).
§ 105. The Verb and its Compliment 97
§ 106. Accusative 97
§ 107. Accusative after verbs of coming &c 97
§ 108. Verbs with two Accusatives 97
§ 109. The Absolute Object 98
§110. The Accusative as Predicate 99
§111. Accusative with ^J 100
§ 112. Accusative with ^ of Concomitance . . . . . 101
§ 113. Accusative of nearer Definition 101
§ 114* Accusative in Exclamations 102
§§ 114—116. The Verb with Prepositions 103
§ 117. J in Dates 104
Chap. III. Government of the Noun (§§ 118—134).
§ 118. The Noun with the Article (Determination) . . 105
§ 119. Apposition 'l06
§§ 120—122. Qualifying Adjuncts 107
§§ 123—130. The Genitive Kelation 109
XIV Contents.
Page
§131. The Construction of the Infinitive 112
§ 132. The Participle and its Object 113
§ 133. The Nomen Regens undetermined 114
§ 134. Improper Annexation 114
Chap. IV. The Simple Sentence (§§ 135—151).
§ 135. Distinction bet. Nominal and Verbal Sentences . 115
§ 136. The Verb in the Verbal Sentence 115
§§ 137—138. Indefinite Subject 117
§ 139. The Predicate in the Nominal Sentence .... 118
§§ 140 — 146. Connection bet. Subject and Predicate . . 119
§ 147. The Particles Hnna and ^anna 122
§ 148. Subordinate Sentences 123
§ 149. More than one Predicate 125
§ 150. Negative Sentences 125
§151. The Particle of Exception . 126
Chap. v. Compound Sentences (§§ 152—161).
§ 162. Co-ordinate Sentences 127
§§ 153—156. The Relative Clause 128
§157. The Circumstantial Clause 131
§ 158. The Temporal Clause 132
§159. The Conditional Clause with the Perfect ... 133
§ 160. The Conditional Clause with the Apoc. Impf. . . 134
§ 161. The Particle (^ in the Apodosis 134
APPENDIX.
Computation of Time (Names of the Days of the Week, the
Months &c.) 136
LITERATURE.
A. Bibliography 139
B. Introduction and general 144
C. Clirestomathies . 144
D. Grammars 145
Contents. XV
Page
E. Lexicography 147
F. Koran, Islam, Life of Muhammed, Bible &c. ... 150
G. Jurisprudence 153
H. Philosophy 154
I. Natural Sciences and Medicine 156
K. History, Biographies 157
L. Cosmography, Geography, Ethnography, Travels . . 163
M. Poetry 166
N. Belles Lettres, Ethics, Eomances 169
PARADIGMS.
I. Suffixes and Prefixes for the Conjugation of the Verb 3*
IL Strong triliteral Verb Act. 1 4*
m. Strong triliteral Verb Pass. 1 6*
IV. QuadriUteral Verb, derived Stems 7*
V. Strong triliteral Verb, derived Stems 8*
VI. Verbum mediae geminatae Act. 1 10*
VII. Verbum mediae geminatae Pass. 1 11*
VIII. Verbum mediae geminatae, derived Stems . . . 12*
IX. Verba hamzata 13*
X. Verbum primae radicalis ^ et ^ 14*
XI. Verbum mediae radicalis ^ Act, 1 15*
XII. Verbum mediae radicalis <3 Act. I 16*
XIII. Verbum mediae radicalis ^ vel ^ Pass 17*
XIV. Verbum med. radicalis ^ et (3, derived Stems . . 18*
XV. Verbum tertiae radicalis ^ (Jj-ai) Act. I. . . . 19*
XVL Verbum tertiae radicalis ^ ( J-ai) -^ct. I. . . . 20*
XVII. Verbum tertiae radicalism vel ^ (jls«i) -^^t L . 21*
XVIII. Verbum tertiae radicalis ^ vel ^ Pass. I, . . . 24*
XIX. Verbum tertiae radicalis ^ vel ,3, derived Stems , 22*
XX. Nomen generis masculini 25*
XXI. Nomen generis feminini 26*
XXII. Nouns in "in" and "an" 27*
XXIII. The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes 28*
XVI Contents.
Page
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
I. Exercises on the Grammar
A. For practice in Beading 30*
B. Exercises on the Accidence 32*
C. Exercises on the Syntax . 35*
II. Connected Extracts 48*
III. For Translation into Arabic 57*
GLOSSARIES.
A. English- Arabic 79*
B. Arabic-English 104*
PAET I.
GRAMMAR
AND
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.
tjnive:^sity j
GRAMMAR.
I. THE ARABIC CHARACTERS. PHOXOLOGY
(§§ 1-11).
The Consonants. The Arabs at i&rst used the Syriac 1.
characters and the Syriac alphabet, in which the order ^'
of the characters is the same as in Hebrew. A relic
of this earlier order is still preserved, in the employ-
ment — afterwards seldom resorted to — of the letters
of the alphabet as cyphers (cf. pages 4 — 5). At an
early period, however, the Arabs distinguished by
means of diacritical points a number of sounds which
were not so distinguished in the older alphabet.
By a process of curtailment, moreover, a number of
characters became so like each other that they had
to be distinguished by similar diacritical signs. The
next step was to group together in the alphabet the
characters which in this way had come to resemble
each other. Hence the Arabic alphabet now consists
of twenty-eight consonantal signs, the usual order and
TABLE OF CHARACTERS.
Names
1
Forai I Value
i
■eg
1-3 ft
-2.2
2§1
2 ^ 1
1
Pronunciation
•■53
u
U
.a
&
1
Jjf Alif *
1
L
—
—
cf. §§ 2 an
1
14
1
^
2'
EbrBa
V— ^
A
■? ,b
b
2
n
3
tljTa
0^
X
■s t
t
400
n
4
gUTha
vd>
viy.
X
5!
j
English hard th. as
in thing
t
500
5
^a:^. Jim
C
e
^
1
\ orig. g hard ; later
i gin Italian ^iorwo;
J English j
g
3
a
6
gLi Hha
c
e
:SX
£>
) strong h with fric-
> tion of larynx as if
J wheezing
h
8
600
n
7
8
glXKha
j|5 Dal
t
e
^
^
ch in Scotch loch
d
d
d
4
700
"I
9
Jl5 Dhal
b
4\
—
—
soft th, as in this
r
200
n
10
!^t) Zai
)
7
>
—
r
11
—
—
Z as in zeal; soft S
I as in rose
z
7
T
i
12
^j-^ Sin
! U*'
o^
JM,
JM
hard S
s
60
D
13
I^A^ Sin
^
^
'^
s
300
t?
* The termination g i. e. ww (see § 3 b) is neglected in the translitera-
tion, as in the modern Arabic pronunciation.
TABLE OF CHARACTERS.
Names
Form
Value
i
o
i
2S
gs
O aj
° fl 1 Pronunciation
f
i
Numerical
Value.
Hebrew.
14 ' SLo Sad
i
u"
u^
.«a
.<o
emphatic S
S
90
15 SLi Dad
LI*
L>d
.^
\ emphatic d(tongue
i pressed against the
d
800
^
lel^Lb Ta
is
ia
k
is
J gum)
emphatic t
t
9
73
17 ; EUb Za
Jb
ia
h.
ib
emphatic % '■/"'
\ producedhya tight-
z
900
u
18 J^ ^Ain
t
C:
X
•
1 ening of the vio-
[lently compressed
J glottis
c
70
y
19 ^^ Ghain
t
t
*•
£.
guttural r
k
1000
20 . ^li Fa
O
1
>-d
A
i
f
f
80 e
21 Jli Kaf
o
L^
A
5
1
! deep emphatic k
k
100
P
22 JlTKaf
IJ
dl
s:
i
h
k
20
=
23 ^!^i Lam
iJ
J^
JL
i
1
1
1
30 b
24 'Lx) Mim
1
r
r
•«•
A
m
m
40
13
9 '
25 ^^ Nun
1
c>
A
J
n
n
50
3
26 ili Ha
5
i^
•^
;e
h 1 h
5 1 n
27 jl^ Waw *
^
^
^
—
w
w
6
1
28
^a Ya
<5
C5
A
J
1
y
10
«i
THE VOWELS, HOW INDICATED.
forms of which are exhibited on pp. 4 — 5. These
signs are written and read from right to left. Some
are joined, to the letters preceding or following, others
are not, as indicated in the table referred to.
b. When s (No. 26), at the end of a word, indicates
the feminine termination (§ 73)^ two dots are placed
over it to show that it must be pronounced as t (Nr.
3) ; thus : jj.
€. Very frequently, especially at the beginning of
words, certain letters, instead of being written along-
side of each other, are placed one above the other
this is particularly the case with the letters _^ — •
(Nos. 5—7), e. g. ^ for ^Jij (Nos. 2 and 6), ^ (Nos.
5 and 6) for ^\:^, :^ (Nos. 18 and 5) for ^sjlt. &c.
Instead of U (Nos. 23 and 1) the Arabs write ^ or *j
(the Lam in the latter form beginning at the left
of Alif).
2. The vowels, how indicated. In the earliest times
^' the Arabs indicated only the long vowels ^, i, ?7, and
the diphthongs au, ai (whose second element they
regarded as a consonant); this was done by employing
the sign | (No. 1) for a, . (No. 27) for u and (with a)
au, (No. 28) for t and (with a) ai. In cases where .
and ^ indicate the sounds au and ai, which we pronounce
as diphthongs, Sukun (see § 3 c) is ordinarily placed
I. THE VOWEL SIQKt
over these letters, to denote that they have no vowel
of their own. Examples: JU kala^ 'lju« 5Jr«, T^^**
sukun^ «jo dafun, ^yj naumun.
In the oldest writing, the long a was not uniformly h.
represented by I, but was occasionally left unrepre-
sented. This omission has continued to be observed
in a series of very common words; in such cases,
however, an upright stroke is usually placed over the
consonant that is to be pronounced with the long a,
e. g. IcX;d (for I^Uc) hddd^ iJt Hldhun (God), \j.^^
raJimdnu. Frequently, however, in our printed editions,
we find this long d represented by a simple _^, thus:
Ij^ hddd.\
In a few words a . after an a does not indicate c.
the pronounciation au but a long «, originally no doubt
an obscure a\ in this case, too, the upright stroke is
the usual sign, e. g. 5*a^ (alongside of »La^) haydtun
life (but I with Suffixes: aujLx^k haydtuhu his life).
At the end of many words ^ is likewise employed d.
to represent a long «; in such cases (like the . in c)
it does not receive the Sukiin (§ 3 c\ e. g. ^* (or
^^) ramd (he has thrown); in the middle of a word,
on the other hand, \ takes the place of this ^^ ; thus
with a suffix sLc. tamdhu he has thrown it.
b 3. THE SHORT VOWELS.
Note a. In a few rare cases, in the middle of a word, we
I
find a denoted by J, _L-, as in the foreign word H)y taurdtun Torab.
Note b. Should f^— be preceded by a j", I is written for the
former in order to prevent two ^ coming together; e. g, tJj
dunyd world fiir ^^ (§ 74a).
e. Occasionally an | is added to a final u or «m, but
it is entirely left out of account in the pronunciation ;
e. g. \yjj:S' kaidbu^ Lxi. ramau (§§ 33 and 53).
3. The short vowels were originally, as a rule, left
^* unrepresented^; afterwards the following signs were
employed to represent the short vowels, and (in con-
junction with the signs discussed in § 2) the long
vowels as well:
1) x^Ci Fatha^ (also ^>JCi Fath) JL for a (in
certain cases to be pronounced like e in men, also
like German a in Manner), e. g. Jlx^ katala^ JLS* kdla.
2) slwL^Kesra (also IsLs^Kesr) __.for ?, e. g.,Jfc.»ai
gadiba, «jlo yaWu.
3) \!j6 Damma (also ^ Damm) _i_ for u^ e. g.
v^jjJo yakiubu', \^yAJ yafutu.
h. When these signs for the short vowels are written
1 Many books, particularly those printed in the East, are
printed without these vowel signs.
2 The terminations « ^-, 8— are here represented in the trans-
literation by a, as in modern Arabic.
4. HAMZA.
twice at the end of a word, they are to be pronounced
with a final n (called by the Arabs jjoj.^' Tanwin,
by us frequently Nunation, from the letter nun), e. g.
fju.4,^ samshi^ Jl^v ragulun. The Nunation an receives
as an additional indication the letter I, but the pro-
nunciation remains unaffected, e. g. ^ILo mdlan. This
I is omitted only when the Nunation accompanies the
feminine termination 5 (see above § 1 2>), e. g. i^Jyo
markuhatan ^ or in cases where the word already has
a final |, or in -its place a ^ quiescing in «, e. g. Lj^ /
riban, ^d^ hudan (§ 2</). The same holds good in /
most cases after Hamza (§ 4). The vowel of the Nu-
nation is always short.
When a consonant has no vowel of its own, this c.
is indicated Ixy the sign _!_ SUy:^ Gezma (also called
^^ JCw Sukun [Rest]) e. g. ^:ywiLI« safartu^ ciA-jyiJo ma-
saita (cf. § 2). On the omission of this sign see § 5.
A- consonant which is thus pronounced without a
vowel following is said to be "resting"'.
Hamza. In order to distinguish the cases in which 4.
I was employed to denote a (§ 2), from those in which ^'
it had (as originally in Hebrew) its proper force as
a consonant, the Arabs gave it the additional sign
10 4. HAMZA,
gC^ Hamza ^ (in form a modified c 'Ain). I accord-
ingly denotes the closure of the larynx by which the
breath, engaged in voice production, is turned on or
off, according as the Hamza precedes or follows a
vowel. It is best heard in English before the second
of such pairs of words as "sea eagle", "mine eyes".
Its effect may also be noted by comparing the two
following pronunciations of Kuran, viz: Ku-ran and
Kur-'an (the latter with Hamza). In the translitera-
tion we indicate | by ' except at the beginning of a
word where no indication is required. The sign ^ is
placed under the |, when followed by an /-sound.
Examples yol ^amrun^ Jul HUlun, 4^\ ^umamun\ JLw
sa'ala^ ^u^L ra'-sun\ \Ji]^ ik-ra\ In the last two exam-
ples Hamza closes the syllable.
Before or after an i- or w-sound, the signs . and
^ are generally employed instead of | as the bearers of
the Hamza, in which^case ^ is written without the two
dots: e. g. yj^^j ha'usa, JSyj, yutaru, vjf^. yuaiarxr,
vlLuc^ gfta, V"^-*^ 5f/'2&«, ^5nL1) yubdrfu.
After a long vowel, and in most cases after Sukun,
Hamza as a rule has no bearer, but is written on or
above the line, thus: sLoJ Hrdd'un^ g^ (or |o)
har'un. After a vowelless consonant in the middle of
5. TESDID. 11
a word, Hamza with its vowel is placed over the
connecting stroke (except, of course, when no such
connection is possible, as after . in 'i^yX^jomamlu'atun),
thus: x--Jai hatVatun; in the same way La^ saran;
On the other hand, in cases like sLd^ol 'imdd'an no
Alif is written at the end, cf. § 3 &.
Tesdld, That a consonant is to be sounded twice 5.
6 " ^ a.
is indicated by the sign of doubling "*, named Jojocio
Tesdid or jLi Sedd (from the initial ji< of this word
the sign " has been derived), e. g. ^_^ww 5«&&«^ J^>j*
tarahhulun. This doubling of a consonant is either due
— as in the examples just given — to the essential
nature of the form, nominal or verbal (as for example
the verbal forms corresponding to the Hebrew Ptel
§ 19), or is the result of assimilation.
When one consonant is assimilated to another, the h.
assimilation is further graphically represented by the
removal of the Sukun from the assimilated consonant.
This applies to the I of the article J |, when the latter
precedes one of the following consonants: k:l^, c^, t>,
'^' y y LT' LT' u^' u^' ^^ ^' 'J' (J (^^^^^ ^^' dentals,
sibilants and r,/,/i). Examples: ws^Ldl ««a^/n/, ^JUJj
attalgu^ (jju^^xcJI assamsu, (the sun), but w*JiJ| alkamaru
(the moon). From the fact that the two last examples
12 6. WASLA.
are stereotyped those consonants that may be assimi-
lated are technically called solar letters, those that
do not admit of assimilation, lunar letters.
Note a. The Avord &)], Hldhun, God, when joined to the article
drops the first syllable and becomes &U I (§ 2 b) alldhu.
Note b. The words ^ min, ^ an, ^f 'an (and ^| 'w), when
followed by a few words beginning with * m or J Z are usually
combined with them into one word, the final ^^j n being at the
same time assimilated to the following consonant, e. g. \t^ mimmd
from Uj ^ min ma, V ! 'alia from V ^\ ^an la,
6. Wasla '°. A. word beginning with two consonants
receives in Arabic either a full helping-vowel prece-
ded by Hamza in accordance with § 4« (e. g. ^ Jc^i I
Plato), or merely a vowel which is heard only when
the word is standing alone,, but which must be given
up when the word in question comes to stand after
another word in the sentence. Thus in the latter
case we find JJci*t uktul instead of Juo ktul. The I
which is prefixed in this and similar cases is, however,
still written although the.helping vowel accompanying
it is given up, and it then receives over it the sign
iiULo. Tvasla e. g. v^\LJt v:i*J.j hintulrvaziri. The two
a,
'^
>-g.^^^
words thus united together are also to be pronounced
as if they formed a single word. Such an Alif Waslatum
or Wasla-bearing Alif is called a connective Alif in
6. WASLA. 13
contradistinction to a disjunctive Alif, that is, an AUf
hamzatum or Hamza-bearing Alif (cf. § 4).
Note. The sign "* is a modification of jo; wasla or sila deno-
tes "close connection".
When a connective Alif has to be employed at h.
the beginning of a sentence, a full vowel must be •
pronounced, but, as written, only the proper vowel
sign may accompany the Alif, never a Hamza. Thus
we have J^^wJ! arrasillu, -^y^S uhrug but ^ysaA JU
pronounce kalahrug.
In the last example the division of the syllables c.
is now kd'lah-rug. If the vowel preceding a connec-
tive Alif is long, it must now be pronounced as a
short vowel, since it stands in a shut syllable (see
§ 8). Thus dUuJI ^^, properly fi-lfulki^ has now the
following syllables /^/-/w/-^2; so too xJU! ^^s rida-llahi
(§ 2 ^) = ri-dal-ld-hi^ \y^ I l«^ j (§ 2 e) da-ha-huWiwazza.
If the word before a connective Alif ends in a d.
consonant which has no vowel of its own, the conso-
nant receives a helping-vowel. The most natural
vowel in such a case is e, e. g. jjjdt oov^ dardbati-
Vdbda (for oowo); so JLjLLu/| istikhdlun with the ar-
tide J I: ^\ljaXjJ^\ alistikbdlu, in syllables thus: a-Iis-
tik-ld-hi. In certain cases original final vowels that
14 6. WASLA.
have been dropped reappear before the connec-
tive Alif, e. g. r^.^iLxJI *.S5 hu-mul-kd-fi-ru-na . The
first word is otherwise uniformly Isa hum (§ 12«). —
The Nunation (§ 3 &) is also treated as if it ended in
a consonant; the favourite vowel in this case is ?, e. g.
aL^^I J^s pronounced as if written x,^^| jjJL^) ragu-
lunismuhu^ in syllables: ra-gu-lu-nis-mu-hu.
Note, Before a connective alif the preposition ^c "away
from" becomes ^js,, the preposition ^-o, "from" becomes jj*, but
before the article ^.
e. The same rule applies to a word ending in a so-
called diphthong (cf. § 2) ; the consonant (, or ^)
forming the second part of the diphthong must receive
a helping vowel before a connective Alif, which vowel
is u or I according as the consonant in question is .
or ^. Thus we have aJLJI ykloj^ajo muS'ta-fa-wul-ld-M
in place of xJUf ..Ala^, sJui! J^:^^rig-la-tjil-'ba-ka-ra-
^« for s Juj I J^ V (So, too, with the termination L Jl_
§2 a).
NoTE. The particles ^I "or" and ^' "would that!" take i as
helping vowel.
/. The connective Alif is altogether omitted in the
following cases:
7. MEDDA. 15
c ^
1) In the article J|, when it receives as prefixes
the particles J^ li or J /«; e. g. (i^vJU, lil-hak-ki for
(3^\J!^, tX^JU lal-mag-du for tX^vJ^.
9 CI
2) In ^1 son, in apposition to the proper name
of the son and followed in the genitive by the name
of the father; e. g. JoJlll ^ *JLLo mus-li-mub-nul-
wa-U-di Muslim, the son of al-Walid. At the beginn-
ing of a line, however^ even in this case we must write
o
3) In the word ^^^\ ismun, name, after the prepo-
sition o bi in the oft recurring formula aJU! (Vaao his-
mil'ld-hi^ in the name of God.
Medda. Inasmuch as the Arabic orthography 7.
cannot tolerate two Alifs side by side, in such a case ^'
only a single Alif is written, over which is placed a
G ^ ^
iiXxi Medda or Medd, (a sign derived from Joo). At
the beginning of a word or syllable the Medda carries
with it the force of a Hamza; the vowel sign Fath is then
also dropped, e. g. tp| 'd-ki-lun for JJ^II, ^1^* kur-d-
nun for ^\\>Ji'-, so ^j^f 'd-ma-na for ^jcj I, since the
Hamza of the second Alif disappears as explained
§ 38«.
16 8. THE SYLLABLE.
Note, ^^]y ra'a may be taken as an example of the rule just
given. With suffixes it ought to appear, according to § 2rf, as
ti]]y, which, however, is written 51^ in syllables ra-^d-hu.
b. Since a ^ after a long a tl__ is written on the line
(§ 4 c) without receiving an Alif as bearer, the | pre-
ceding the Hamza in such cases likewise receives
Medda, as a rule, although the latter has no effect on
the pronunciation of the word, e. g. ^\^ gd-a (for
ILi), SJ^sXJlS ta-fd-a-lu] and the same where • or ^
appears as the hearer of Hamza 5, Ul^I a-Mh-ta-u-
s ^^ ^ • - •
hu^ JoU* ka-i'lun.
Note. Arabic orthography has also an objection to two Waws
appearing side by side, if the first has a Damma (even though
the first may be only the bearer of a Hamza, as expained in § 4 c).
Thus jj«*55) ?"W usun is often written j^^y
8. The Syllable. An open syllable ends in a vowel
short or long; a shut syllable ends in a consonant.
Every syllable begins with a single consonant, not
with two or more (cf. § 6). A short syllable consists
of a consonant with a short vowel, as in the second
syllable of c^Lo md-td (with two open syllables); a
long syllable consists either 1) of a consonant with a
long vowel, like the open syllable md in the above
example, or 2) of a consonant, a short vowel and a con-
sonant (shut syllable) e. g. both the syllables of
9. THE TONE. 17
J.aS' Aat-Iun (so too c.?.^ mau-tun § 2«) Iww sar-ran^
or 3) of a shut syllable with a long vowel. This last
variety, however, is only found (exclusive of pausal
effects § 10) when the following consonant has been
G a ^
doubled (§ 5) and is preceded by a long «, as in iojo
dab-ha-iun (rarely after ai as in x.vo.0 du-rvaib-ba-tun
which is derived according to § 66 from ddbbatun).
Such a syllable may be described as doubly long.
Other syllables of this sort are shortened as Jjb yakul
from JjJb yakul\ os.x)T ramat from c^Li^ ramdi.
Note. A word consisting of but one short syllable, if it stands
alone, either receives an addition at the end (see §49 a 6), or is
joined to the following word. The latter method is adopted in a
series of particles (see § 94), which notwithstanding the connec-
tion are still regarded as more or less independent words. The
principal stress, however, rests on the words with which the par-
ticles are connected.
The Accent or Tone. The accent in Arabic is thrown
backwards towards the beginning of the word till it
meets a long syllable, or if there is no such syllable,
till it reaches the first syllable of the word. A simple
long syllable at the end of a word, however, does not
receive the accent. Examples of words with a final
short syllable: CjjLi daraba^ SjJi^S istdnkara\ with
a final long syllable: Ujc^^' tamdmtumd, 4>^ far dun.,
G ^ ^ Q ^ y
xXJUjo mdmlakalun., ^y^r^ ddrabu., 5 jj lidatun.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.* 2
18 10. PAUSE. 11. NUMERICAL SIGNS. ABBREVIATIONS,
Exceptions: A syllable with a connective Alif (§ 6),
as in Joi*! (see § 6«), cannot receive the accent; the
pronunciation is therefore uktiiJ, In the same way
monosyllabic inseparable particles, like : and ^^ (cf.
§ 94), prefixed to words, do not affect the accentuation
of the latter ; e. g. ^cLJi famdsa.
10. In pause final short vowels are dropped. Also
the Nunation un and in\ the Nunation an is changed
to «, the feminine termination k " to 5^ (with the h
sounded): thus ^%J)b ndzilun for ,2)5^)^3 ndziluna\
J^"^ ragul for Jkir ragulun\ Lli*.^ marhaM for Lla.^
marlidban\ \jj^\l Fdtimah for Ribli.
11. Numerical Signs and Abbreviations. The usual Arabic
cyphers are the following:
♦, t, 1^, t", 1^, <>, % V, A, ^
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.
The tens, hundreds &c., are written to the left of
the units &c. as H 19, U^d 1895.
The following are a few of the most frequently
occurring abbreviations :
A^ = *^LlJI auJLi'«toi^i-55«/^mwPeacebeuponhim !
*.*JLo = aJLwI ^tJJLc xJU! JJo salla-lldhu ^alaihi
wasallama God bless him and give him peace (said of
Mohammed).
^mk
'M .i4J6^.
12. THE PROXOUN.
19
n. ETYIMOLOGY (§§ 12—96).
Chapter I. The Pronoun. (§§ 12—15.)
The personal pronouns are either independent or 12
suffixed. The independent or separate personal pro- ^"
nouns have the following forms:
Dual
'11
Sing.
Plur.
I. Pers. Lit
masc. ^-^S
11. Pers. 0^
[ fem. v^ 1
i ^
1 masc. li
II. Pers. ^
fem. ^
Li;ft
Note 1. The second syllable of the pronoun of the first pers.
singular, although written with I, is short. — The forms in pa-
rentheses (2^^ and 2>^^ pers. plural) are used particularly before
Wasla (§ 6(Z); these final vowels are originally long.
Note 2. When joined to 3 and 3 (see § 95) the pronouns of
the 2>^°- pers. sing, may lose their first vowel e. g. yfc3' \^-
The suffixed personal pronouns^ which joined to a h.
noun indicate the genitive, joined to a verb, the ac-
cusative, are the following:
20 12. THE PRONOUN.
Sing, Plur. Dual
I. Pers. I w^^^ ^^^^^ ^-T"
j with verbs ^ —
Q—
masc.
"• ^^^^- { fern. J- ^_ [ ^
r^-
Before a connective Alif (§ 6 <?) the suffix pron. of
the 1. pers. singular may receive as helping-vowel the
a which belonged to it originally; thus we may write
^uX3| ^Lkfi^l or i^jUJCI ^lii£:|. After «, 2 and
ai the nominal suffix of the 1. pers. sing, has the form
^ xja. Occasionally (in the Kur'an particularly) the
suffix of the 1. pers. sing, is indicated by a simple ?,
of which the sign is Kesr , as ZSs niy lord! In
the same way the corresponding verbal suffix may
be only ^ ni.
After an immediately preceding i or ai the suffixes
8, Ui, liO, Jjjo substitute the vowel i for w, thus
assuming the forms s, U^, I^, \s^\ e. g. 2JUc instead
of aJUo. Before the connective Alif Is^ generally
becomes ^. — The suffixes 15 and li resume
13. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PEONOUNS. 21
their original forms j^^and ^ before a connective
Alif.
For further information regarding the affixing of
these pronominal forms see § 82 and the table of
paradigms No. XXIII.
The reflexive pronoun, when carrying a certain e.
amount of emphasis with it, is generally expressed
by the word j,Ju nafsun soul, to which the proper
suffixes are appended. In many cases, however, the
personal pronoun suffices to express the reflexive.
The demonstrative pronouns are the following (with 13.
their inflexion compare § 76 a).
The simple pronoun (rare) a.
Masc. Fem.
Sing. Vo ^^, 5J; ^, ju; li
Dual ( ^°"- c^It ^^H
I Gen. Ace. j^^3 ^^^fJ
Plur. j^l {ula) or £=^f^| {iilcTi)
This simple pronoun combines:
(1) with the demonstrative particle Li, generally
f
written defectively (5> or less correctly i § 2&). The
result is the usual demonstrative pronoun to indicate
that which is near at hand {this, these):
22 13. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PKOXOUNS.
Sing.
r
Dual J
Masc.
Fern.
' r^^^'
lh<^i^^)
^ 1
Norn. ^Ij^
/\j\^
Gen. Acc./j^j^tX.'®
-' ^ '
Plur. &:^L55 ,j^
c. The simple demonstrative combines (2) with a
suffix of the second person. Only in the older Arabic,
particularly that of the Kur'an, however, does the
suffix vary according to the number of persons ad-
dressed (e. g. plur. 1X3 <3, dual UJ06), elsewhere it
appears uniformly as ^J. There is also a form with
J before J. The result is two forms of the demon-
strative pronoun to indicate that which is more remote
(that, those):
^,--3Iasc. Fem.
Sing. ^\S,^J^(AJ\S, AjS) / dU (^3) dUb 7
^2.-— , Nom. dljlS, dilS viili, d.iLS-
I Gen. Ace. eJLo3, viJuj^ ^i*4-^^*j ^^*
^ i
Plur. /<4^J^^U^^^^), rarely Jjl^^l
(i. Among the demonstratives we must also place the
article J| (see § 5 &). When the noun, in the circumstances
14, THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 23
detailed in § 6 / 1, begins with a J, this letter has a
Tesdid placed over it and the J of the article is drop-
ped. Thus we get xLvJU for xJLJU^; so too xJJ for
di^ (§ 5 note).
The relative pronouns are the following: 14.
j^tXJt who, which, that, — originally a compound a.
demonstrative with the article as one of its elements
(hence the connective Alif) — declined as follows:
Masc.
Sing. (^y'
Duali^-- ^^
1 Gen. Ace. ^jJJI
piur. (/'^.4J>' /js?^^:i;^i
/^<jjo (indeclinable) one who, such (a one) as, he b.
who, those who.
^Lc (indeclinable) that which, something which.
Among the relative pronouns may also be included c.
j^l, fem. ibi he who, she who. This word is declinable
in the sing., but the masc. often takes the place of
the fem. It also combines with the prons. in b above
to form ,\4J)\ every one who, whosoever; and UjI
whatsoever.
24 15. THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 16. 17. THE VERB.
15. The intert'ogative pronouns are :
// ^ who?
; Uo what? Frequently strengthened by the addition
of the demonstrative |3: 13 Lo what then?
^1, fern, abl what sort of? which?
Note. \a after prepositions is shortened to ^ e. g. J why?
With this interrogative U is also connected the interrogative
particle iX how much?
Chapter II. The Verb. (§§ 16-54.)
16. The great majority of Arabic verbs have three
radical letters ; only a small minority have four radi-
cals. The ground-form of verbs, according to which
they are arranged in grammar and dictionary, is the
third person singular of the perfect. The verb JJti
(to do) is used as a model paradigm.
Note. Since all Arabic dictionaries give the verbal and no-
minal derivatives under their respective root-forms, it is necessary,
in order to find the three radicals with ease, to note carefully what
consonants are employed in the formation of verbs and nouns as
prefixes and affixes to, and as infixes in, the stem.
17. From this ground-form or root, which is named
by grammarians the first stem, other stems are deri-
■ ved by a series of uniform changes, represented by
18. THE FIRST STEM. 25
modifications of the verb Jii, but usually referred
to by their respective numbers in the series. Thus
we speak of "the eighth stem", (indicated in the dic-
tionary simply by YIII) not as in Hebrew and Syriac
of the Piel, the Afel &c. The following stems, the
order of which must be carefully noted, are those
most frequently met with:
I Ji'i
IV Jutit
VII Juoll.
X J,cy..,l
II Jii
V S^
VIII JjiM
XI JUij;
II jili
Vljilii'
(ix jobr
Note a. Of these No. IX and especially No. XI are of less
" o ' t "as'*.
frequent occurrence; still more rare are XII J«)*^I, XIII Jj^^I,
XIV jUx^I , XV ^Uxil. Which of these derived stems are formed
from any given verb, and to what extent the meaning of the ground-
form is modified by them, will be found in the dictionary under
each verh.
Note b. In many cases the verb is used to express the idea
that some one wishes to do something or has something done;
thus il:;5 "he killed him'' may also signify "he wished to kill him",
j^o J ^ ^ .
and i^SLkz ^yc "he cut off his head (prop, neck)" may mean "he
had (ciiravit) his head cut off."
The ground-form I, in the majority of verbs, takes 18.
the form J.jii, e. g. Jijci? to kill; there is also — mostly
with intransitive verbs — a form Joii (cf. nns), e. g.
^jwi to be sad, Ju^ to do (transitive), and also a
26 19, 20. THE II. AND III. STEMS.
form J.*i (cf. )bj5) , confined to intransitive verbs, as
0»AA^^ to be beautiful. Sometimes both the transitive
and intransitive forms, j^ii and J^ or J.ii, are
found side by side in the same verb. One and the
same verb, again, may have both the forms J^*i and
19. The II. stem J^ii (corresponding to the Hebrew
Pi"el) usually denotes a greater intensity of the action
expressed by the simple verb. This intensification
may affect the subject, object or qualifying adjunct,
as Jjjj to kill many people, to massacre (intensi-
fication of the object). In the majority of verbs,
however, the IL sjtem is causative as iJli to know,
IJLi cause to know, to teach. It is also declarative —
as in lo ji" to lie, ^.^j^to take one for, declare one
to be, a liar — and denominative, as in Ji:*!^ to collect
an army ((jiiw^).
20. The III. stem J.^li expresses an attempt or effort
to perform the action of the simple verb on some per-
son, to influence some person or thing. Thus Juci* to
kill, but JoU to try to kill, to fight with ; ^^^jjS'io
write, C^\^ to correspond with (with accusative of
21, 22. THE IV. AND V. STEMS. 27
the person corresponded with). This stem also means
to exercise s ome abstract quality on a person or thing,
e. g. rJ!^l to be soft, gentle, ^y to exercise gentleness
on some one, to treat one kindly.
The IV. stem jiit (the Hebrew HipVil) has a 21.
causative significat ion, as ^JLo to be in good condi-
tion, ^JLol to bring into good condition. Very
frequently we find, with this stem, denominative verbs
which appear to us as intransitive, but to the Arab
as possessing an implicit transitive force, and which
express the idea of action in a certain definite direction,
as ^jwww.^! to do good. Frequently, too, verbs of this
stem convey; the idea of going to a place, of entering
upon a certain period or condition; e.g. CjC^I to go
towards the West, ^j<j^\ to enter upon the period of
the morning, to be something in the morning, ol^l
to reach the top^, to be high; ILsl (from *U* rise up,
stand) to halt, to stay.
The V. stem Jiij* (Hebrew Hithpa^'el), a sort of 22.
roiddlay-oice is formed from the 11. stem and has both a
reflexive an d a reciprocal meanin g, e. g. Ilio to make
one's self great, liii' to let one's self be taught, to
learn. Sometimes a verb in the V. stem conveys the
28 23, 24, 25. THE VI., VII. and VIIL stems.
idea of giving one's self out as something, e. g. [^jj
to give one's self out for, to conduct one's self as, a
prophet.
23. The VI. stem Jkilli*, d erived from the ITT , stem, is
the reflexive form oi the latter, and has a reflexive or
reciprocal signification, as IIuLS* to show one's self bold ;
JjLftj* to fight one another (usually in the plural).
Another signification is seen, for example, in JLijf, VI
form of ^\i to be high, which means to exalt one's
self and then simply: to be exalted.
24. The VII. stem Jiiil (the Hebrew NipVal with
the connective Alif ace. to § 6«), derived in most cases
from the I. stem, is a middle or reflexive form of the
latter. Its signification may also be described as
quasi-passive, e. g. ^^ to break w^lJol, to break or
be broken in pieces.
25. The VIIL stem JijLXiJ, (with connective Alif § 6«)
is likewise a middle and reflexive form, for the most
part of the I. stem, as (jiljCr-t , to oppose one's self,
object to; sometimes also with reciprocal signification
as j^-^fljc^J, to dispute, contend with each other.
Note. In the case of verbs whose first radical is jc, j«, b
or Ja, the kLt of the VIII. stem is changed to the emphatic b, and
26, 27. THE IX. AND X. STET^IS. 29
is even assimilated to the first radical, when that letter is a dental
as ^-Ab^gl, instead of j^ol from j^; jil or jk] for JujSl from
JLIi; Jl» is sometimes assimilated also to a preceding <i», e. g. C*^]
or c*^l from »S<^ properly C*a5jI; after J, o and 3 C* is changed
into the soft o, e. g. JIJ3I for JU3I from jI^; .i^^ol for ^y»jl.
a ^ o a ^ o
The IX. stem jLjii| (as also the XI. stem JLiil,26.
hoth with connective Alif) is used of verbs which
denote the possession of inherent qualities such as
colours or bodily defects, e. g. from the stem yJuc',
ILoI to be or become yellow; from the stem .^\ Tr^l
to be one-eyed; from the stem 5-*^: ^U-a.! to be red.
The X. stem JoLftx**/], (with connective Alif) is 27.
primarily a reflexive of the IV. Juiil (otherwise a
reflexive, formed on the analogy of the YIII. stem, from
a stem JiiLtu with a prefixed 5), as from the stem (ji*^.
IV. jii.:^^! to grieve: X. jji^ycwj to grieve (ones
self). Very frequently the X. stem denotes also to
wish or to beg something for one's self, e. g. from ,Ji^\
to pardon, X.: wftiXw^l, to ask for pardon; or to think
that something is so, as vl^i-^ to be necessary, IV:
v^^^w^.j to make necessary, X: .^^^yjJi to consider
something as necessary for one's self.
30 28. THE QUADEILIT. STEMS. 29. THE PASSIVE. 30. THE TENSES.
28. The quadriliteral steins are denoted, for the verbal
and nominal forms, by the paradigm jJUti (that is
by the addition of a fourth radical to JJii), and con-
sist for the most part of two stems, of which the first
may be said to correspond to the second stem of the
triliteral verb (for Joii is in reality Jjuti), and the
second JkJjLb to the fifth, e. g. vJ^Xlp to overturn,
cast down, v^jC^Xj fall down.
Note. The stems III JJLUJi and IV Jlx^l (the last corre-
al «-•*»
sponding to the IX. stem of the triliterals) are rare e. g. ^jjUbl, to
be quiet, from a stem ^jjWs.
29. In addition to the active^ the Arabic verb has a
passive voice. This passive is formed in the perfect
in such a way that in place of the ^-vowels of the
active we have the order u-i-a {% with the second, a
with the third radical); thus the act. of stem I. is
Jjti, the pass: Juii. The additional formative syllables
of the derived stems also receive the vowel w, e. g.
pass. V. J^iftj', VIII JkAXJJ (with connective Alif). ,,,-
30. The Arabic verb has two principal tenses, 2^ perfect
which, generally speaking, denotes a completed action,
and an imperfect which in general denotes an uncom-
pleted action.
a.
OK THB
HIVEHSITT
31. THE MOODS. -w -r o..t^j-„..\,
The imperfect is formed by adding the prefix S ya b.
for the active of the L, V., VL, VIL, YIIL, IX. and
X. stems, and the prefix j yu for the active of the
II., III. und lY. stems, and for the passive of all the
stems without exception.
In the case of verbs of which Jjti is the type, the c,
s_econd radical, in the imp f. act, of st em I ., may receive
one or other of the vowels w, i, a. Which of the three
must be used for a particular verb will be found
indicated in the dictionary under that verb (e. g. Juci*
impf. u) and should be taken careful note of. Those
verbs, on the other hand, of which Jjii (with 2-vowel)
is the type, together with all passives point their second
radical with a only, thus impf. act. I. JJiij; pass. Jjloj.
Those verbs, finally, of which Jo»i (with w-vowel) is the
type, take u with the second radical for the imperfect.
As regards the active imperfect of the derived stems,
the second radical takes i throughout, with the excep-
tion of stems V. and VI. where it takes a; thus impf.
II. Jiftj but V. JJtA^.
In the imperfect various Moods are distinguished, 31,
namely the ordinary mood which we call the indicative,
the dependent mood or subjunctive, and a modus apo-
copatus (sometimes called the jussive). These are
32 32. THE IMPERATIVE.
distinguished as follows: in the indicative the last
radical, when final, always takes u, as impf. I Jolo,
III. JlcLL; in the subjunctive always a^ as J^xij,
while in the apocopatus the third radical is vowelless.
In addition to the above there is a double modus
energicus, which is formed by ajDpending the syllables
anna or an (in some forms only 7i) to the impf. as
^jXxsi2 or ^AjLftj.
Note. As the modus energicus is of comparatively rare
occurrence, it is given in the tables of paradigms only in the case
of the ordinary strong verb. From the examples there given it
may easily be formed for the other verbs,
32. The imperative agrees with the apocopated imper-
fect as regards vocalisation and termination, except
that the prefixes ya or yu are wanting. In the imper.
of the I. stem a helping vowel (therefore with connec-
tive Alif § 6 «) is prefixed in all cases where the first
consonant is without a vowel of its own. This vowel
disappears, however, in pronunciation as soon as the
word ceases to stand alone, e. g. JJiil but wi>.| JLr.
The same applies to stems VII. — X. The imperative
has the same energetic bye-forms as the imperfect.
Note. In the imper. of stem I the prosthetic vowel is u when
the second radical has m, as Ji^I, but i when it is pointed with
a or i, as Jx^I, ^^I.
33. NUMBER, PREFIXES AND AFFIXES. 33
Note b. In the imper. of the IV. stem the prosthetic f, which
is characteristic of the stem, is retained, although it disappears
after the prefixed ^ of the impf. Hence impf. JXi^ (for J*ib),
but imper. J«il.
In the perfect, imperfect and imperative, there 33.
are, in addition to the singular and plural, dual forms
for the second and third persons. Verhs are inflected
by the addition of modified and abbreviated forms
of the personal pronouns, and of the dual and plural
terminations of nouns, to the ground-forms J^jti and
JoLftj (for the terminations am and una of the impf.
indie, vid. § 76 a). The terminations just named, along
with the ending ma of the 2. pers. fem. sing.,
drop the syllables ni and na in the subjunctive, the
apocopated imperfect and the imperative. The |, which
appears in the paradigm after the final . _1_ in the
perf. and in these shortened forms of the impf. and
imper., has no phonetic value (cf. § 2^).
As to the prefixes of the impf., it is to be noted
that in place of the prefix j of the 3. pers. masc, we
have s as the prefix of the 2. pers. sing, and plur.,
and of the 3 pers. fem. of the sing., | to indicate the
1. pers. sing., and j the 1. pers. plur.
The affixes employed in the inflexion of the verb are given
in paradigm I.
Socin, Arabic Grammar*. 3
34 34. VERBS MEDIAE GEMINATAE.
Note a. In the V. and YI. forms of verbs whose first letter
is a dental or a sibilant, the formative prefix occasionally drops
its vowel and is assimilated to the first radical of the verb, in
which case the perf. and imper. have a helping vowel (§ 6) prefixed
e. g. y>^\ wrap one's self up, impf. y^^.
Note b. In the impf. of these two stems, the prefix 5 may
be treated in such a way that instead of the two syllables ^
■*''»- ■"'» c
only i remains, e. g. from J55 2. pers. msc. impf. Y. J^aJ for JXSSj.
Note c. In the impf. YII. and YIII. stems the tone remains
on the same syllable on which it falls in the perf., contrary to
the rule laid down in § 9 ; thus J^Saj jsixj* yankdtilu, ydktdtilu.
For the conjugation of the strong verb with three radicals
see paradigms II, III and Y, for that of the quadriliteral verbs
see paradigm lY. In the paradigms the participles and infinitives
are also given, although the discussion of these forms has been ^y
deferred to §§ 60 and 61. -
34. Among the ordinary strong verbs must also be
reckoned the so-called verbs mediae gemindtae^ i. e.
verbs whose second and third radicals are identical.
A contraction of these last two radicals takes
place in all those cases in which
a. 1) the first, second and third radicals have each
a short vowel; in this case the vowel of the second
radical is always dropped, e. g. ^ (to flee) contracted
from TCi (which statement is not to be understood
as implying that a form Tli once really existed in
Arabic) 3. p. perf. pass. I. Ij from I^j; 3. p. impf.
YII. wjLo from > vAAj ;
35, 36. VERBS MEDIAE GEMIXATAE. 35
2) When the first two radicals have each a short, h.
and the third a long, vowel, e. g. 3. p. dual masc.
perf. Ci from CCi;
3) Generally also when the first radical has a long c.
«, e. g. 3. s. m. perf. of the III. stem .Li contracted from
rrU (which is also found), passive \\yS'
When the first radical is vowelless and the second 35.
has a short vowel, then contraction takes place and
the vowel of the second radical passes over to the
first. Thus 3. pers. impf. act. ^aj for .^ ; pass. lij
from .Ji2,
When the third radical is vowelless, there is no 36.
contraction in the hody of the word: e. g. 2. pers. sing.
masc. perf. act. »isli; 3. pers. plur. fern. impf. act.
^ O " ^
.»^jij. But when the third radical stands at the end
of a verbal form with no vowel following, as in various
forms of the apocopated impf. and the 2. pers. sing.
masc. of the imper., we find the full forms ;yij, >vif
only in the dialects. As a rule contraction takes place
and an additional vowel is assumed at the end in
order to preserve the doubling of the radical; thus
we have ^ij, ^i, from Os imper. Oy
36 37. HAMZATE VERBS.
Note. In the case of verbs of the forms J*3 and ^j^ the
vowel of the second radical appears only in the uncontracted form
6. g. J^ to loathe, 1. pers. perf. cJULo; hence the vowel a of the
impf. J^^.
For the conjugation of verbs mediae geminatae see paradigms
Nos. VI— VIII; model verb p to flee.
37. Those verbs that have a Hamza ^ as first, second
or third radical are for the most part regular, as ^*l to
make an impression, impf. wjb; \js to read, impf. |Jb.
In certain cases we find, according to § 4&, * or ^
(without points) as bearers of the Hamza, or j^ may
stand without a bearer, thus 3. s. m. perf. act. ^^
to be sad, ^^ to be brave; 3. s. m. impf. passive of
3*!: y^J>,'-) 3- sing. masc. perf. act. ^^ to err, fem.
v.:>lia.i; 3. s. m. impf. act. of JLJ] to ask: J^-Jwo. Oc-
casionally an I takes the place of two Alifs, according
to § 7; e. g. 3. s. m. perf. III. of 3?: 3 for 311; VI.
of l!^ (bind up a wound &c.) 1:&^S".
38. While in all these cases the !> may easily be distin-
guished as the third radical of the verb, there are a
few forms in which the verba hamzata are more diffi-
cult to distinguish, inasmuch as the ^ sometimes
entirely disappears; from this point of view these
verbs ought rather to be reckoned among the weak
38. HAMZATE VERBS. 37
verbs (§ 39 ff.). The most important of such cases
are the following:
1) After !, I, I (also after a connective Alif I, |, I a.
at the beginning of a sentence) ^ gives up its power
as a consonant (cf. § 7) ; hence, in place of \i\ V, 'f
simply '^, 'w, % e. g. 3. s. m. perf. IV. of Ji\\ Ji>\ for
^-^^ -".^ . ^ ^
"i'll; 3. s. m. perf. pass. IV. of J^\ is J^^ in place of
^. I. So also imper. I. waj! for J^\,
2) In the imper. of the I. form the verbs j^Ll ^•
take, J^rt eat, yd order, drop the ^ altogether: j^i^.,
J5, yyo ; in the same way, from JL« to ask, the impera-
tive is either JLwj or Juw &c.
Note. Should 3 or i come to stand as inseparable particles
(§ 87) before one of the imperatives under a, the prosthetic Alif
is dropped and the radical Hamza reappears, receiving, as its
bearer, an Alif on account of the preceding Fath, as in ^li. The
same holds good in the case of two separate words: thus ^y^<\\
3. s. m. perf. pass. VIII of ^^^I connected with a preceding word
becomes ^^\ ^JJI elladi-tumina.
3) In the VI. form the ^ of verbs primae ^ is e.
sometimes changed to ., as wot^* in place of Cob'
(for^lb).
4) In the VIII. form the ^ of the verb jXl is d
38 39. THE WEAK VERBS. 40. VERBS PRIMAE 5 AND ^.
assimilated to the following 5, the result being 3, as
4X^*1 instead of an original (X^%\, impf. tX^o, but
from lil, to order, y^-^l-
For the conjugation of the verba hamzata see paradigm IX.
The Weak Verbs.
39. The weak verbal stems are those having a . or
a j< as first, second or third radical; under inflection
these semivowels in some cases resolve themselves into
full vowels, in others they are treated as consonants.
40. The Verbs primae . and ^ differ from the strong
verbs in the following points:
a. 1) In the impf. and imper. of the I stem a number
of verbs primae . surrender their first radical and
take the vowel i with their second (cf. ^hl), as jJ«
to bring forth,, impf. cXJlS, imper. jj.
h. 2) Under the influence of a guttural a few verbs
take a in place of i with their second radical, drop-
ping the ., however, like the others, as i^r to lay,
impf. ffco.j ; so *i'. to fall, v,^* to give and others
(see the dictionaries).
c. 3) In verbs primae (^, jj_ is changed to z7, e. g.
the impf. IV of iaiG to be awake, properly Jaijo, be-
comes iaio.
41, 42. VERBS MEDIAE ^ AND ^. 39
4) In the VIII. stem the first radical of verbs d.
primae . and ^ is assimilated to the following ^j,
e. g. from J^^ to promise, JoS] for JoLJ^j. (cf. § 38</).
Note. A few verbs of the form ^yti also give up the first
radical in the imperf. as ^^3 to inherit, impf. »i»^ (cf. § 18).
For the conjugation of the verbs primae 5 and ^ see para-
digm X where will be found the principal forms of the verbs
J-03 to arrive, ^J^ to leave, ^5 to be dirty, Ja-^ to be anxious,
j^3 to be sleepy, ^«*i to be easy.
Verls mediae ^ and ^. In the II., III., V., VI. 41.
and IX. stems, . and are treated as consonants,
and the inflexion is the same as that of the strong
verb; thus 3. s. m. perf. II of JLk (to say) med. ,:
J jj, 3. s. m. perf. Ill of *Uw (to travel) med. ^: oUw.
In the other stems these verbs are inflected according
to the following rules:
Long a takes the place of the middle radical: 42.
in the perf. active of the I., IV., VII., VIII. and a.
X. stems, as JU, Jlij, JUlj, JUclj, jUiw^j;
in the impf. passive of the same stems, as JLL, JL1>, h,
in the impf. active of VII. and VIII., as JLiij, JLiL ; ^.
in the impf. active of the I. stem of verbs of the d.
form Jotj e. g. oLi to fear, impf. oL^.
40 43, 44. VERBS MEDIAE ^ AND ^,
43. Long I takes the place of the middle radical:
a. in the perf. passive of the I., IV., VII., VIII. and
X. stems as J^, J.a5I, Jj^ajIj J^^'I? J..^aLwwI;
ft. in the impf. active of IV. und X., as Juaj, Juaa>w^o ;
' c. in the impf. active of verbs med. ^, as ^.a^.
The corresponding form of verbs med. ., on the other
hand, takes long w, as J«.iij.
Note. The nature of the phonetic changes just detailed will
be more readily understood from the standpoint of the strong •
verb if it be noted that 3 , i, , 3 , i ; 5 , i pass
into a; 5 , 5 , J , ^ into ^; j into w. It is not
meant by this that the corresponding strong forms were ever
really found, in these verbs, at any period of the language.
44. The whole of the long vowels mentioned in
§§ 42 — 43 are shortened (§ 8) in a shut syllable, e. g.:
and
^ (J ^
2. s. m. perf. act. IV. of JU and .Lvi u^Ai'l
3. sing. masc. apoc. impf. pass. I J^L, ^lo (with
the tone on the last syllable as if contravening § 9).
2. pers. masc. sing, imper. I. of oLi (§ 42<?):
(but plur. I^lia.);
2. pers. masc. sing. perf. pass. viJ^;
3. pers. sing. masc. apoc. impf. act. IV. Jloj ;
T " V
2. pers. sing. masc. imper. 1: w^y, Jo.
45, 46. VERBS ULTIMAE 5 AND ^. 41
In the perf. active of I, verbs med. . take w where
-we should expect a, (cf. npj?) as iJU*, while verbs
med. (^ take 2, as ^:l>>-«-; 2 is also found in verbs of
the form J^jti, as o^ia. from ^Lk (for a theoretical
XoTE a. Instead of the apocop. impf. ^^^^ &c. from JjV,to be,
we sometimes find the still shorter form lib.
Note b. From a few verbs med. 5 and ^ strong forms
are found in stems I., lY., YIIL, X.; e. g. IV. ^^\ compel; X.
k^yoJiml to find correct, a denominative form from ^\ya correct.
For[^the conjugation of these verbs see paradigms XI — XIV.
Vef^bs ultimae . ajid ^. Verbs ultimae . pass into 45.
ultimae ^ in all the derived stems, and in the perf.
and impf. passive of the 1 stem; thus from .ya we
have 3 s. m. perf. II ;^Lc. The same applies to the
active of stem I of the form JjJ; thus'LoT becomes
^^r (to have pleasure in).
If the second radical has «, this vowel is changed 46.
in every case into a long final a. In order to distinguish ^'
the stems ult. ^ from those ult. . this final a is in the
former case indicated by (^, in the latter by ! (this
applies only to the 3. s. m. perf. act. I). Thus Jsl to
throw, lyfc carry on a war ; but II. ^C, ^\i£. &c. Similarly
42 46. VERBS ULTIMAE ^ AND ^j.
in the imperfects (cf. § 45), e. g. indie, and subj. pass. II
^Is (in place of a theoretical -^^vJ and l^ls) ; impf.
act. I of ^s, (c-^Y:>; impf. act. V. ^^^vaj.
Note. With the same reservation as under § 43c note, we
would call attention to the fact that the combinations j , ^5 ,
^ , ^ all pass into long a.
b. In all the cases mentioned in the preceding sub-
section, a diphthong (§ 2 a) appears before the in-
flectional additions that begin with a consonant. Thus:
2. sing. masc. perf. act. I ciA.vyoC; from lyi.: ^jC^j H
c. In the case also of the inflectional additions u,
una, ma (and its shortened form z), the a of the second
radical, (after the elision of the third radical) unites
with their initial vowel to form a diphthong. Thus:
3. pers. masc. plur. perf. act. I. \yos, Uyi? do. impf.
pass. II. ^JoyS), subj. Lxl); do. act. I. ^j^^, V.
^JowicJ; 2. pers. fem. sing, of the last ^juopcj, subj.
d. Before the dual terminations a and dtii the last
radical of this class of verbs is treated as a strong
letter, e. g. 3. pers. perf. act. I. LCvor, irC^; impf. pass.
II. ^LIxjIj &c. By the addition of the termination at,
47. VERBS ULTIMAF, 5 AND ^5. 43
the 3. pers. fern. sing, of the perfect must originally
have ended in dt'^ this ending, however, has now become
at in accordance with § 8, as vjLuo^; i^yc.. According
to the analogy of the above is also formed the 3. pers.
fem. of the dual; thus we find LiX, \jf/t. (where we
should expect IjUoT, LSlyc.).
• In the impf. active of stem I, verbs ult. . of the 47.
form JoiS take an w, those ult. ^ an ?, the third
radical quiescing in these vowels. The ending u of the
imperf. is lost, e. g. ^\Ju, ^y^,- The imperfects active
of the derived forms (with the exception of V and VI)
are formed on the model of the last mentioned forms,
ic^rrl^ ;^y*j and so on.
Note. With the same reservation as under § 43 c note, it
may "be pointed out that ^ passes into u^ ^ into i.
Affixes beginning with a consonant are appended h.
in every case to the i or the u just mentioned, as 3. pers.
fem. plur. impf. I. 'wjuowj, ^j5r*5' similarly in the
peif., e. g. 2. sing. masc. perf. pass, ouyo^; do. from
Jas I. ooyos ; from J^ I ^iij.wL.
If the second radical has i or u^ the third radical c.
is dropped and the terminations ?7, una^ ina added to
the second, e. g. 3. plur. masc. perf. pass. |^. (not
44 48. VERBS ULTIMAE ^ AND ^. 49. DOUBLY WEAK VERBS.
!^s), l^yi^; 3. plur. masc. impf. act. ^jyoo, ^j^y«->
(not ^^juoli", jj;^y*5)5 2. pers. fern. sing. impf.
d. Before the dual endings a and mi, as also before
the terminations a of the 3. sing. masc. perf., at of
the 3. sing. fem. perf., aid of the 3. fem. dual perf.,
and ^ of the subjunctive, the third radical is treated
as a strong letter, if the second has i or u, Exx: 3. pers.
masc. perf. act. ^o*,.^^*;; do. pass, jcs^ ^'y^'i 3. pers.
fem. perf. ouyof, \:^\Su\ 3. pers. masc. dual LLon;
fem. UloT; 3. pers. subj. act. I ^^J, ^7*^' ^* P^^^'
dual impf. ^Luo>j, ^'^y*5.-
48. In the apocopated impf. and in the imper. every,
final a, I and u is shortened, as 3. pers. sing. masc.
apoc. impf. u^o, *o, yiJ; 2. imper. ,^J, j» J, ui.|.
Eor the conjugation of these verbs see paradigms XV — XIX
where various forms are given of the verbs J)fi to carry on war,
^^ to throw, ^) to be content, ,^^ to carry out, accompUsh.
49. Of verbs doubly weak the following are the
principal varieties:
a. Verbs primae . and ultimse ^, as S^ to take care
of; impf. according to §§ 40 and 47 ^J, apoc. |^.
50. THE VERB j**ij. 45
The imper. is properly ^, for which, however, when
the word stands alone, i. e. in pause, we write x5.
The verb ^L to see, which in the impf. elides b.
the Hamza, throwing back its vowel a to the first
radical. Thus ^^o yard for ^|o yarYr, 3. pers. pi.
^.1); imper. "I (ace. to a 8^), fern. ^7. The IV. form
* in the sense of 'to show' is similarly inflected: ^s\
for i^\s\i impf. ;^^ for ,^awj; perf. pass. ^.! for
^^&'^ and so on.
The verb ^^ to live, properly "If^ ; impf. LI^ (cf. c.
§ 2 ^ note) like a verb ult. ^ or _r^ like a verb mediae
geminatae; perf. IV Lia^l, perf. X ^L^u«l^or LxsLwj
also contracted j-kxLl (be ashamed).
The verb JLli 'there is not' (compounded of the 50.
negative S and an obsolete Arabic noun corresponding
to the Hebrew ^i) is inflected as follows :
Sing. Dual Plural
3. masc. J^ LlJj ^y*^
3. fem. owiwuJ La.»^ ,%-wwJ
J, masc. Omwi^ ' .^ 9 o < lyX^www
2. fem. ci^ ^^p:^
1. com. v^iJJ LLli
46 51. VERBS OF PRAISE AND BLAME. 52. ADMIRATIVES. 53. THE SUFFIXES.
51. The verbs of praise and blame, 1*3 to be good
and UW.AJ to be bad, which are rarely conjugated, are
written as above.
52. The Arab grammarians adduce as special forms
the so-called admirative forms, that is, forms expressive
of admiration. These are strictly the 3. s. m. perf.
and 2. pers. imper. of the IV. stem, but have assumed
a special signification; SO I Jon Jl^^I Lo properly 'what
has madeZaid excellent', and Juw J.-*dil prop, ^make
Zaid excellent' both mean: how excellent is Zaid! —
The verbs media3 , and ^ may in these forms take
the inflection of the strong stems (§ 44 note &) as
Ij^ (2)5^"^! ^ ^ow easy this is I
53. The addition of the pronominal suffixes (§ Wb)
alters the form of the verb only to a slight extent.
a. The 2. pers. fem. sing. perf. with a suffix receives
a long final vowel as ^lOjIo.
h. The I, standing after ._!_ u (§ 2^), is dropped as
s Jui* from I Jui' with the suff. of the 3. pers. sing. masc.
c. The ending j^ of the 2. pers. pi. perf. becomes y^s
(cf. § 12«, note 1), as ^j^xJUci* from (V^JUci* with the
suff. of the 1. pers. sing.
d. Before the suffixes to the 1. pers. sing, and plur.,
54. THE PRONOUN AS OBJECT. 47
^ and Ij, the final na of the 2. fern. sing, and 3.
and 2. masc. plur. impf. is sometimes dropped (so that
these forms become identical with those of the sub-
junctive and apocopated moods).Ex.: ^Lo w*^* alongside
of the more common ^JULowoJ thou (fem.) strikest
me; LS^w»dj alongside of the more common US^jwoi
they strike us.
When the object of an active verb consists of a 54.
personal pronoun, and this object is, for the sake of "•
emphasis, made to precede the verb, then instead of
the ordinary suffixes appended to the verb the sign
of the accusative bl (n«, ns) is employed with the
suffixes of the noun (with the suff. of 1. pers. sing.
^Cp; e. g. JuJiS dGl to thee we pray.
The Arabic verb may have two suffixes appended I.
at the same time, in which case the pronoun of the
1. person precedes those of the 2. and 3. persons,
and the pronoun of the 2. person that of the third,
as XAjUaxI he gave it me; frequently, however, in
place of the second suffix— more particularly when both
pronouns are of the third person — we find the above
mentioned periphrasis with Gl as LiGl ^<\ ^e married
him to her.
48 55. THE NOUN.
Chapter III. The Noun. (§§ 55-90).
a. The Formation of Nouns.
55. Nouns in the wider sense comprise 1) substantives,
2) adjectives, 3) numerals (§§ 91 — 93), and 4) pronouns
(§§ 12 — 14). The noun, in the narrower sense, is
limited to substantives and adjectives.
Primitive substantives is the name given to such
substantives as cannot be derived from a verb. Accord-
ing to the usual arrangement of Arabic dictionaries,
it is true, the primitive noun ij^ls, head {un affix) for
example, is found under the verb ,j^K, but this verb
is in all its significations denominative. On the other
hand, it may fairly be maintained that a noun like
(jj^K goes back to a hypothetical triliteral root ^ + | +^.
— In contrast to these primitive nouns, we find a
large number of nouns which are derived either from
verbs or from other nouns, that is, which are either
deverbals or denominatives. All the forms of the noun
are indicated by paradigms from the root J^jii (cf.
§ 15 ff.); thus we say of ^K as of the deverbal in-
finitive ^}J3 killing, that it has the form Joii.
Note. The numerous foreign words which have found
their way into Arabic, adapted from Persian and Aramaic, and
indirectly from Greek and Latin, have also, to some extent, been
reduced to Arabic nominal forms.
56, 57. THE FORMATION OF THE NOUIs. 49
A number of nouns do not show the full complement 56.
of (three) consonants (see §§ 16 and 90), as ^S blood;
with the feminine termination (§ 73) : aLol a slave-girl;
to this group belong also nouns with a prefixed vowel
(connective Alif) as jv-wl name, which accordingly must
be sought for in the dictionary under ^j^.
Extremely common are the nominal forms with b.
one short vowel, like J^jti, Juii, Joti, e. g. J^. foot,
according to the form Joti. There are also nominal
forms with two short vowels: Jjti, Joii, Jmi, J^,
Jjti, Jjti, e. g. J4m a ni^i^i NF. JJii; Ji" old age
NF. ^.
Next in order we may put nominal forms with a c.
long vowel either with the first radical JldQ or with
the second JUi, JLii, Jlii, J^, Jyti, Juoii, or
with both Jjxli.
Nominal forms with doubling of the second radical d.
G w 6 G -
are such as (ja.^^ chick-pea NF. J^ii; JLjii (§ 63«);
G ^
Note. By their mode of formation these nouns have been
raised to the rank of quadriliterals like those in §§ 57 — 58.
The preformatives employed in the formation of 57.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.* 4
50 58. FORMATION OF NOUNS. 59. QUADRILIT. NOUNS. 60. PARTICIPLES.
nouns are the following (whose vowels vary according
to circumstances): a) j» cf. §§ 60 and 64. d) j cf. § 61.
c) J as sJuj fugitive NF. J«.*aj from lii to flee, d) \
(cf. §§ 62c; 63&), e. g. li^J^I story NF. U^j from
the stem c^tXa*..
58. The afformatives or formative additions used in
the formation of nouns are: a) ^— and i|_ (see
§ 74). l) ^\ — (for substantives) or ^^1 (often to
s —
form adjectives) e. g. ^jL^a^ palpitation of the heart
NF. ^^^ from (Jii ; ^l>-^ drunk NF. ^j^^ from
wCw. c) ^;i>« (not originally Arabic) as ^:yjCLo
kingdom NF. ^:i>JLii, which takes the masc. gend.
in Arabic.
59. The quadriliteral nouns are denoted by the para-
digm JJjti (§ 28) as i^JLc scorpion NF. JJLii; jj-^JoLo
box NF. jp,*i; ^SIm military camp NF. JJ^Lo;
f^LI^^ili^ a species of beetle NF. i^*i.
60. From among the rich growth of nominal forms in
Arabic a few deverbals and denominatives may be
singled out for special attention. Such, of the former
class, are the participles and infinitives, whose forms
will be found among the paradigms of the verb.
61. THE INFINITIVE. 51
The participles — the active is generally named a.
nomen agentis, the passive nomen patientis — take
the form J^fcLi for the active of the I stem, and for
the passive the form Jyti^c. In all the derived stems
the participle is formed by prefixing the syllable
A\ in the active the second radical takes 2, in the
passive a (see below). As a rule, however, the active
and passive participles of the derived stems take the
vowels of the active and passive imperfs. with the
exception of stems V and VI.
In addition to the participles there is a class of h.
so-called verbal adjectives, which are in part treated
as participles ; they might be called quasi-participles,
as ^.<1^ beautiful, from jo-^^^^.
The Arabic participles do not in themselves convey c.
G
any suggestion of time; hence JoLiJ, for example, may
mean 'one who has killed' as well as *one who is killing',
G > o^
\}y.jix) 'one who ought to be killed' i. e. interficiendus
as well as interfectus.
The Infinitive (nomen verbi) assumes various forms 61.
in the I stem, and is therefore specially noted in the ^*
dictionaries under each verb. One of the most common
forms is JJii , as JjiiJ killing. The infinitives of Jaii
52 61. THE IXFINITIVE.
verbs (§ 28), as a rule, take the form J^*i, e. g. from
^ " ^ " ^ . ^>> ^^—
v^;u4£, .^^A.*^ the being angry. Jyii and Jlii are
also common forms from intransitive verbs, as m-wjJL^
a sitting, from y^JLi; -^Lw health, from ILL. In-
finitives are also found with the prefix w«, as J.S(,>
or JCk Joo (for the same verb has frequently more than
one form of the infinitive, sometimes with different
meanings) from JlL3 to enter.
h. The infinitive of the II. stem has the form J.a*a3*
or iULxAj (cf. § 57&); the inf. of the III. stem the form
Jlii or £l^LLo (which last is identical with the fem.
of the passive participle). The infinitives of IV., VIL,
VIII., IX. and X. are formed by the insertion of a
long a before the last radical ; before this a every ^
short a of the perf. becomes 2, as in the IV. stem JLjiil.
The infinitives of V. and VI. take u after the second
radical, as V. JJLftJ.
c. The Arabic infinitives do not contain the idea of
time and may be used both in an active and in a
passive sense. Thus JJ3* denotes the circumstance
that some one has killed or has been killed, the idea
of killing or of being killed.
62. VEKBAL adjecti\t:s.
53
Synopsis of participles and infinitives
Partcp. Act. Partcp. Pass. Infin.
JyXJUO Cf. § 61«
I.
JL^li
II.
Jift/j
III.
IV.
Jixiyo
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
1 -^'
IX.
JotA^
a ^ o^ y o^
Go G
JjLr^ JLiil
JjLftJOo JjtAJ*
G^ ^^, G , ^^
JccLftJuo J^Lftj*
G^ -- " 5 ® ^ "
JlJt
G^^j G^y-, G^y G^^^^
Quadr. I. JJUax JJUiivo J^^oti iUJjii
Go--* G ^ y .-^ , ^ fo ■—
II. JlXjloJuo JJjti.AX> JJjKAJ)
As regards Verbal Adjectives (cf. § 60 c), the follow- 62.
ing forms may be specially noted:
The form Jxjii, which occurs in both an active a.
"" G ^ G -
and a passive sense; as Juuo killed, cS t (? v ■ a witness,
54
THE INTENSIVE FORMS.
ivx^^ one who disputes with another (in the sense
of (voLfS? part. act. of III).
h. Jyts, e. g. o*j^(of ten an intensive form) given
to lying.
c. JJii I, a form denoting colours and physical defects,
as yJuo\ yellow; «^v^l lame; .^| (with . as a strong
letter) one-eyed. For the formation of the feminine,
see § 74&.
63. Arabic has the means of expressing a heightened
or intensive form of the root idea. Of such intensive
forms the following are examples:
a. Jljti intensive form of JlcU and other verbal
adjectives, as ^\(Xf (habitually) given to lying. As
a denominative this form is in frequent use to denote
trades or professions (nomina opificum) as ; ClL baker
Go'
from y^ bread.
b. Very frequently there is derived from adjectives
the form JJii f in the sense of an elative (generally
so named because including both comparative and
superlative), as ^^^^^.^ beautiful, elative : ^^^ww^^i.! more b.,
most b.; vjoLo small, young, elative: ^jLoI smaller,
younger; smallest, youngest. The elatives, when stand-
ing in the predicate, do not admit of inflection for
64. NOMINA LOCI, INSTRUMENTI, SPECIEI. 55 •
gender and number, as ^\jj\ Ju^l *j» they are the
most excellent of men. When used in a comparative
sense, they are mostly undetermined (§ 76bc), and are
followed by the preposition \je in the sense of our
"than" (properly 'at a distance from', 'measured from').
Used as superlatives, on the other hand, they are
generally determined. For the feminine formation
see § 74 &.
Note. No special elative is formed from the words ^^ good
and ^ bad, which are used as elatives in the form just given.
As a matter of fact, the positive of other adjectives as well must
sometimes be rendered by our superlative; thus j**UI| y^^ signifies
the (absolutely) greatest of men.
To the class of deverbal nouns belong further: 64.
Nouns of place and time formed with the prefix a.
A ma, as ^...JciCo the place where one writes, the school;
also with the fem. termination as Swlfljo a buryingplace.
Note. Nouns of place and time from the derived stems take
the form of the pass, participle, as j-^iuo (from the IV. stem of j-^
to go out, of which lY. gsi-T cans.) the place to which or the time
at which something is brought out; LojS^ (from V. stem) the
place where the ritual washing is performed.
Nomina instrumenti, formed with the prefix a mi, h.
iJ^ milk-pail,
from ^^ to open.
as v«J^ milk-pail, from vJJLa. to milk; -.Ui^ key,
56 65. NOMiXA T^fffj-^R» wB , nm g NT 4 ^PF.rTf j T .
9-
c. Nomina specie! of the form xJLii , as aLo^ the
manner of writing, one's "calligraphy".
65. To the class of denominatives belong especially
the nouns of relation and the diminutives.
a. By means of the termination ^^ (corresponding
to the Hebrew "^ _, fem. rr and n"' ) there is derived
from nouns a group of other nouns which, following
the example of the Arabic grammarians, we call nomina
(adjectiva) relativa, i. e. nouns of relation. Thus ^. |
belonging to the earth (^J^^ I), earthly; ^^l-co belonging
to j»Lo (i. e. Syria), a Syrian. The feminine termination
is dropped when this ending is added, as 'IJCo (from
jUCo) an inhabitant of Mecca; occasionally we meet
with certain changes in the vowels of a word, e. g.
-i jjo an inhabitant of Medina, from RjoJciJI Medina ;
^lif a Koreishite_, one of the tribe jLjJi.
b. By the addition of the feminine ending to nouns
of relation there are formed feminines, as iUxiLw a
Syrian woman, but more frequently abstract nouns ; as
G-; ^ S -' Q "
1U^!^II divinity from ,-?^t divine, (from s^l God);
xUUcLi. heathenism from ^jeLi. heathenish, (from
J^L^ ignorant).
66. NOM. BBhiiJiIVx^DT DEMINUTIVA. 67. NOUNS FROM STEMS MED.GEM. 57
Note. It is usual to indicate the nomina relativa also by
^^^ ^v>£ & It ^ tya ^
paradigms from Jxi ; thus we say that ^'^)I is a form ,^Ji*^, "iAibXs^
a form lAsM.
Diminutives from triliteral nouns take the form 66.
J.A*i, as Jou^ a little slave, servulus, from Ju^ slave.
From quadriliteral nouns the form is JJU*i, as L-joULa
a little scorpion, from <wjJi£ (so ^^^^o diminutive
from v^l^.a.Lo companion). From quadriliteral nouns
with a long vowel between the third and fourth radi-
cals the corresponding form is JuJU*i, as ^a^jJo^
9 ' O 5
diminutive from ^Vj jJlo a box. Diminutives are not
unfrequently derived also from proper names, as
xJU! tX-u^ 'uhaidulldhi alongside of \JLf| <Xl& 'abdulldhi
(Abdallah).
The formation of nouns from stems mediae gemi- 67.
natae and from those with a hamza or the semi-vowels,
presents many irregularities, for a general idea of
which we must refer to the inflection of the corre-
sponding verbal stems. In addition to what is there
given the following particulars deserve attention.
For the formation of deverbal nouns from stems
mediae geminatae (see § 34 ff.) the following points
may be noted:
The second and third radicals are of course con- a.
58
I. NOUNS FROM STEMS WITH HAMZA AND PRIM.
tracted when the second is without a vowel of its
own, as yi irom .^s.
b. If the first radical has a, and the second i or a,
contraction takes place in the participles and infini-
tives, e. g. part. act. VII of ^.1: Jjuo contracted from
)yAJuQ'^ pass, also yJiXjo from »^a^. Ihere is no con-
traction, however, with nouns of the form Juti, as ^>j3
inf. to he hairy.
c. According to the rule given in § 35 &, from .jjo
we get wA>o ; irom ^Juo : ^^.
cZ. The act. participle of I is tli from !.Li cf. § 8.
e. Contraction does not take place when a long
G ^
vowel stands between the last two radicals e, g. J^j,
68. The orthographical rules which apply to the in-
flection of the verba hamzata (§§ 37 ff.) hold good
for the formation of nouns, e. g. J^^ something asked
G ^, "-^^
for; Jt.^ a question, from JLa« to ask; the part. act. I
of 3* I, to make an impression, is wjj for ^il ; 'iJu^ NF.
nomen instrumenti aUiix from 31 &c.
69. The primae . stems, which according to § 40 lose
^' their first radical in the impf., lose it also, as a rule,
70. NOUNS FROM STEMS MED. 5 AND ^. ^^^«^~:2sy» ^-''""''^
in the nomen verbi ; as compensation the latter receives
the feminine termination (§ 73), as from tXi: to pro-
mise nomen verbi 'sJlc; from ct>5 to allow: iLt4>.
w? after the vowel i (. ) coalesces with the latter b.
to form F, as inf. IV of ^Sj fall: cLibl^ for cb'.^; t>^LLc
time of one's birth NF. Juii.5, for o^^ from jjl.
J passes into w (§ 40 c), e. g. part. lY of Jaij c.
G , G t, ,
to be awake: ihJiyA for iaiLyo.
In the infs. of the IV. and X. stems from stems 70.
med. , and ^ the middle radical disappears; the ^*
feminine termination is added as compensation, e. g.
Xjli^ for Jlpf .
In the act. part, of stem I the w of verbs med. . b.
G ^-^
becomes y and j (y/) is changed into 'i (S); as Juli'
G ^ Q '•'^ G —
for J.U, •jUw for oLL (for Medda see § 7).
A characteristic formation from these stems is JJi ; c.
G ^ ^ "
thus from the stem oLw med. . we get oJJ^ master,
G M^ "
lord; from the stem i^Lb med. ^, v«>^ good.
Nouns formed on the model of JJii contain diph- d.
®o^ Go^
thongs (§ 1a\ as J^*, v-v*w.
The place of the second radical (see § 42) is taken e.
by a long a in the act. participles of stems VII. and
60 71. NOUNS FROM STEMS ULTIilAE j AND j^.
VIII. and in the pass. part, of stems IV., VII., VIII.
and X.; e. g. part. pass. IV. ^IS^o, part. act. or pass.
VII. j»LiLo (from a hypothetical active *yi-uo pass.
G^ ^o , ^ ^ ^9 ^
-• JLu). Also in numerous nominal forms, as Jt> (from
a hypothetical *:t>) house, from J4> med. .; NF. Jcxa>o
from Jli is JL£o, from a hypothetical JliU.
/. The place of the second radical (see § 43) is taken by
G G^
a long nn nouns of the type of Jmi and xJlxi from med.
, and ^ e. g. ^^.^ from r.^ med. ^ to be gentle ; iU>uo
G ^o
(§ 64c) for 'i3^ mode of death from med. .; in the
form Joii from med. ^, e. g. (jdjo for (jd^o white
(plur.) ; JkxLo in the forms from med. ^, e. g. ^-x.^,
G o "^
walk for sj^^mj^ ; in the part. act. of the IV. and X. stems
GjG''o.''
from verbs mediae . and ^, e. g. ^a^^, ^^u^aXwwuo; in
the part. pass. I from med. ^^ e. g. l^u^ from cLl,
to sell (mediae ^^) for c«ju^.
^. The place of the second radical is taken by long
^0 ^ G '
u in nouns of the type of J^*i from med. ., as .^j
light from 'j 13; u may also arise by contraction from
wu in the pass. part, of the I stem of verbs med.
G ?^ G J o ^
., as J«.iLo for J.yLo.
71. In the case of nouns derived from verbs ultimae
a.
71. XOUXS FROM STEMS ULTIMAE 5 AND ^5. 61
. and ^ those forms in which the second radical is
vowelless are treated like forms from strong stems,
iiO ^ l3 O ^
as ^^, ^^ inf.
If the second radical has «, there results (cf. § 46^) h.
at the end of words a long a (from hypothetical arvu,
ayu) which is written L or ^_1_ (ace. as last rad.
is ^ or ^), e. g. LkkJI the stick, for^^^uJI; ^rwl
the pasture, from ^. to feed, for a hypothetical
^j!jf ; ^t NF. jkiit for ^t, elative of J^ gener-
ous, liberal (§ 63 T)). The same applies to all the pass,
participles of the derived stems. With the nunation,
these forms appear as L.ox, ^5-^5 ^Lo(ptc.pass.IV)
in which the original long final vowel, now standing in
a syllable closed by the n of the nunation, must be pro-
nounced short (§ 8): ^asan^ mar^an^ murman. Long a
appears before the feminine termination (cf. § 70 e) as,
HltXl morning for s.J^; sU^ death for auil.
If the second radical has short ?, from iyu arises c.
a long t (cf. § A:l a\ e. g. ^^Ol part. act. I in place
of a hypothetical ^^Uf ; and so in the act. participles
of the derived forms. If the nunation is added, the
result is Jy ramin &c., in which the ^ is dropped
even in the written form of the word, uyu is changed
62 72. NOUNS FROM STEMS ULTIMAE ^ AND ,^.
to iyu^ and consequently with the nunation it likewise
becomes m; e. g. inf. V. ^fCxJt for ^Ixll; jlIS* for
^^•. In the act. part, of stem I from verbs ult. .
irvun is changed to iyun^ and consequently with the
nunation further to m, e. g. ^5\LiJt for ^)ljtJI, ,^\UJI;
with the nunation vL^. Before a and <^ (cf. § 47^), on
the other hand, the third radical retains its conso-
nantal value; thus the inf. of stem II, according to
the form most in use with verbs med. . and ^ viz.
IsXxJu (§ 61), is: iU^o, Rjyxj*.
d. After ^, ?/?/ and wu become 'w; ^/w^^, and wun be-
come 'w7?, in each case with the hamza, e. g. ilwwgJI
for •Iv^l with the nunation gj^w^ inf. I of ,ww to be
IwvwJI with the nunation gj^w^ inf. I of .^w
noble; iUos^l for ,<L«^^I|, with the nunation eLoJ inf.
rj , ^ o
IV for ^Uo^l.
e. If the second radical has a long ^^, the forms from
verbs ultimae . are formed regularly; thus the pass.
part. I of \Ck is TyU (for ^*y*>o) magzuwun. From
verbs ultimae ^^, on the other hand, uyun is changed
to lyun^ e. g. ,1jo Jo (from ^^jo Jo) marmtyun^ so from
^.ojo go away inf. ^^^ for l^yojo NF. J^.
/. If the second radical has a long t, the forms from
72., 73. THE GENDER OF NOUXS. 63
verbs ultimae ^ are formed regularly, e. g. NF. Ju*i
from J^ : Ji saint (for je-Ji) rvaUyun, From verbs
ultimae ., on the other hand, twun is changed into
Ft/w«, as Jki 'altyun high from ^^cLd.
6. TAe Gender of Nouns.
Arabic has two genders, a masculine and a femin- 72.
ine. A number of words are sometimes masculine
sometimes feminine, ^n other words) are of the common
gender. Words which denote female beings, collectives,
countries, cities, winds, parts of the body occurring
in pairs, and others, are in themselves feminine with-
out requiring the feminine termination. The gender
of such words is in each case noted in the dictionaries.
As an outward and visible sign of the feminine 73.
G ^ 9 ^ a.
we find most frequently the ending » aiun (or H
atu § 79), e. g. xJb*U (NF. xJUli), fem. of JaU killing;
iUClx) (NF. 2ULxi) queen, from dULxi; aL^K fern, of masc.
^jo)s (§ 71c) content, sLci (NF. xJLii) maid, from ^
(§§ 71 & and 2rf) youth. Many substantives are found
only with the feminine ending, as xl^ an orchard.
Note. As a rarity, the feminine ending is found, particu-
larly in the Kuran, written with *!», e. g. 4lil JU»3w the grace of
God (for &4^).
64 73. THE GENDER OF NOUNS.
h. A number of masc. nouns are found with the
feminine ending, as itaJL^ Caliph, H.^io Talha (proper
name of a man, see p. 8, note 2). On the other hand,
there are nouns which, as being essentially feminine,
do not require the feminine termination^ as J>Li barren
(referring to a woman).
c. The feminine ending 5_1. is occasionally appen-
ded to common or class nouns in order to indicate a
single individual (nomen unitatis), as ^.ajdo a gold
piece, from ^^^^3 gold; xiL^ a dove, from ti »^
G
doves (collective). The termination 5_1_ is also used
for the formation of the so-called nomina vicis, i. e.
nouns that express the doing of an action once^ as
5 JoiiJ a single sitting down, from JolH to sit down.
d. The feminine termination, again, serves to form
G^ ^
substantives from adjectives, as iUi'llw conduit-pipe,
water-channel, from the part. I of ,-aAw to water. Con-
nected probably with this is the feminine ending which
G^ cs ^
forms intensives, as ioo^^ a very learned person, from
the adjective ^.^Lc § 63 «.
e. Collective nouns are also formed by means of the
G ^^
feminine termination, e. g. from ,joL5) a courier, coll.
)Lc^k\ ^yo (§ 65 «) Slifi (mystic), coll. illjr^-
74. TERMINATION OF THE FEMIN. 75. NUMBER AND CASE. 65
Other feminine terminations are: 74.
The termination j^— ; it goes to form feminines a.
of the type J^*i, e. g. ^jC fern, of ^1^X1, drunk,
(§ 58&); feminines of the nominal form (NF.) Joti
from elatives (§ 63 &), e. g. ^^v*^ fem. of oLo I smaller,
J.I from Jll the first, and substantives like L04>
world (§ 2 note), which is properly a feminine to the
elative j^4>l, that which is nearer at hand; also fern-
inines of the NF. Jk*i, e. g. fro"*!! Jl2».| one, fem. ;^J^I ;
subst. (^3i remembrance.
The ending i! ; it goes to form, more especially, h.
adjectives of the NF. i^\Jii from JJtit (§ 62c), e. g.
i!^A-o fem. yellow; ^1 >*-£ fem. one-eyed, but also
substantives, as i\^£P desert.
c. Inflection of the Isfoun.
Arabic has three numbers', singular, dual and 75.
plural. Of the last, there are two different kinds;
I the one, the ordinary plural, properly so called, also
known as the pluralis sanus or the outer plural, which
originally denoted rather a number of separate persons
and things ; the other, the collective plural, also called
the inner or broken plural (see §§ 86 ff.), which denotes
Socin, Arabic Grammar.* 6
66 76. DUAL AND PLURAL.
rather a continuous mass, in which the individual
member is not distinguished. At present we shall deal
only with the first-named. Arabic distinguishes three
cases: Nominative, Genitive, and Accusative.
76. The terminations of the dual and the pluralis
^- sanus are as follows:
Dual nominative lO^— (^^- § ^^)
„ genitive and accusative ^^,— (cf. D^-^)
Plural mascul. nominative ^. (cf. § 33)
„ „ gen.-accus. ^ — (cf. n"*— )
„ femin. nominative ^— (cf. ni)
„ „ gen.-accus. ^—
Before these terminations the Sectional endings
of the sing, are dropped; the H of the feminine ending
is changed to ^^ before the dual termination, (as it is
before the pronominal suffixes appended to the sin-
gular), e. g. x^nLs*, dual j-LcSsLi.
b. By the addition of the terminations exhibited
above is formed the plural of many adjectives, in
particular, and also of a number of substantives. In
the formation of the plural we find substantives with
the feminine ending taking the sign of the masculine
plural (as RjLw year, plur. r\yXj^)', much more fre-
77. THE CASE INFLECTION OF THE SINGULAR. 67
quently, however, substantives without the sign of
the feminine in the singular are found forming their
plural by means of the feminine termination, e. g.
JLi condition, plur. vcy^Li, eI^jI heaven, plur. v:i>|.UIw
(with the original waw restored § 71^), also written
As regards the case inflection of the singular, it 77,
is necessary to distinguish between the so-called no-
mina triptota or triptotes, i. e. nouns which are in-
flected for all three cases, and the so-called nomina
diptota or diptotes, i. e. nouns which cannot be thus
fully inflected. The latter never receive the nunation,
and unless they are determined by the article or by
a following genitive, they are inflected for only two
cases.
The following are the case-endings of the triptote a.
noun: Nom. sing. _Jl un^ Gen. sing. m. Ace. sing.
I an. With the feminine termination _!> only is
written instead of I as ^Li.s, but iU^Jk^o; so ^ci
and Lii (cf. § 3&).
The case-endings of the diptote noun are: Nom. h.
sing. w, Gen. and Accus. Sing. _!_ a.
In the dictionary the triptotes are distinguished
from the diptotes by being always written with the
68 78. NOM. •«■■••••■• DIPTOTA. 79. DETERM. AND UXDETERM. XOUNS.
, ^
mination, as J.^^^ a man, while the latter are always
without it, as c>j.awI black.
78. Whole classes of nouns are always diptote. Such are
a. 1) all proper names that are either feminine or have
» -
f ^o^
the feminine termination, as aLuo, v.«^-bv as names of
o ^
women; jLJLwwuo as name of a man. To these must be
added the majority of such proper names as are of
foreign origin, e. g. *-^L^I Abraham, vuLwwo Joseph,
^•jo Moses (but monosyllables like _lji Noah are
mostly triptote).
b. 2) Many so-called broken plurals ; cf. § 88 Nos. 18,
19, 20; § 89 Nos. 23 24, 25, 27, 29;
c. 3) adjectives of the form Jiif (§ 62c; § 63&);
d. 4) adjectives of the form ,o^*^ (§ 58&), which form
their fem. like Jjti, e. g. JjLLli angry, fem. ^^aaoI.
c. 5) Feminines formed by the terminations ^— or
i|_l. (§ 74). Cf. also the broken plurals referred to under
&, §§ 88,19 and 89^29.
79. The inflection of the singular of all nouns and
of the plural of feminines varies according as a noun
is determined or undetermined,
a. All proper names are in themselves determined
as tXik? muhammadun Muhammed; cVt^^t dhmadu
80. SHOTtTENIXG OF THE DUAL AND PLITRAL TERMINS. 69
Ahmed; such proper names are treated either as trip-
totes or as diptotes according as their form and the
custom of the language may determine; many of them
always take the article, as ^d>>li|. X
Common or class nouns are determined:
1) by the article; as j^^^i a horse, (jj-^JJI the horse, b.
2) by the addition of a following genitive, which c.
may be either a noun or a pronominal suffix, whereby
the nomen regens is put in the construct state; as yj^^Ii
Jci^lll the horse of the man, iLwli his horse.
The case-endings of a noun determined- (1) by the
prefixing of the article, or (2) by a genitive following
— and the same applies to proper names with the
article — are distinguished as follows from those of
the undetermined noun:
Singular nom. , Gen. , Ace. _!_.
Plural fem. nom. , Gen.-Acc.
i. e. the nunation is always dropped. These endings
are assumed not merely by all triptotes, but also by
the diptotes, when determined by the article or a
genitive following : e. g. Nom. o^l, Gen.-Acc. S^l] ;
but Nom. o^"^ !, Gen. t>^:^ |, Ace. o^!^ |.
Before a following genitive (which ace. to § 79 c 80.
may he( either a noun or a pronominal suffix) the
70 81. INFLEXION OF NOUNS FROM STEMS ULT. 5 AND ^,
terminations ^ of the dual and j^ of the plural are
dropped, thus:
Dual Norn, of tXxft: ^ItXxr, but vJ\^JI IjJ^ the two
slaves of the Vizier.
Dual Gen. -Ace. ^^j J^^c, but y^ ^^^^ ci^jwo I have
beaten the two slaves of Omar (before a connective
Alif thus: vJ)^! (^J^^j cf. § 6^).
Plural Nom. of il^L^* butcher, executioner r\yA^,
but viLCJl ^Lai the executioners of the king.
Plural Gen.-Acc. ^joLaS, but ^iLQl ^jLoi owjK I
have seen the executioners of the king.
For the inflection of the noun see paradigms XX and XXI,
where -will be found the forms of the masculine triptote ^\^a9 an
■*", «.
executioner,the masculine diptote ^) another, the feminine triptote
&s\tM hour, and the feminine diptote iua Mayya (name of a woman).
81. In the case of nouns derived from stems ultimae
^' . and ^ when the second radical has a short vowel
the nunation, ace. to § llbc, is taken by this vowel
of the second radical.
b. Nouns ending in an or a are unchangeable for
all three cases; those in in or 2, on the other hand,
take the an of the nunation, as well as the simple a
(§ 47^) as LlclJ, ^\pi
82. THE ADDITION OF THE PRONOMINAL SUFflXES. 71
Before the dual terminations (cf. § 4:6 d) the last c.
radical is treated as a strong letter, as ^jlliii, ^\S^Jcj
In the plural the last radical is dropped before d.
the terminations una and m«, which, when joined to
an a of the second radical, produce diphthongs (§ 46c);
thus from ^^vXj: ijr^r^' jj-jy^r*' ^^ ^^® second radical
has i, the terminations are added immediately to the
former (§ 47 c), as ^^Ij, ^j-ys|;-
For the inflection of these nouns see paradigm No. XXII,
where will be found the forms of the triptote jiU judge, the
triptote ^jU a ^io A (ult. ^^) chosen one (often as a proper name), the
triptote Uflff (ult. 5) a stick, the diptote ,j)^<^ remembrance, and
the diptote Wj world (vgl. § 74 a).
For the forms of the pronominal suffixes see 82.
§ 12b— d.
Before the pronom. suffix of the 1. pers. sing, the a.
short case- endings of the construct state are dropped,
as ^L^*. The said suffix after a final a, i or ai be-
comes ^ (?/«), as with the nom. dual ^^LSL^', with
^: ^^Lxi (§ 2d; 81 a); with the gen.-acc. plur. ^LoS*;
with ^U (§ 81a): ^^IS; with gen.-acc. dual ^^Loi'.
72 83. YOWEL CHANGES IX PLUR. SANUS.
s ,'
Note. In the case of words which end in ^j , the suffix
may either be attached in the usual way, e. g. from ^^Xj "sonny",
j^, or appended to the shortened form ^ , e. g. ^^ from ^,
and yj.
b. The final ii of the construct state of the plural
masc. is changed to J before the appended ^ (cf.
§ lie), thus »jLo.i* becomes ^L^i*, and then with
the suffix of the 1. pers. sing. l^LoS (no longer to be
distinguished from the genit. and accus. plural). The
same applies to the ending au from stems ult. ^< (see
parad. XXII), e. g. ^k^ax) becomes ^k^x), with the
suffix 'lik-o.xi (also identical with the genitive-accu-
sative form).
For the union of the noun with the suffixes see paradigm
XXIII. For the change before sufif. of final 8 into .!> see § 76 a.
83. In the pluralis sanus of substantives of a masc.
or fem. nominal form with one short vowel (that is,
of any of the following types J^*i, Joii, Ji*i and &Xxi,
iiJLjii, xJL*i) the second radical frequently receives a
complementary vowel which is either identical with
that of the first radical or is short a. Thus ^^ I earth,
plur. J)%.^)lj more rarely ^!^5-o^l, and i^^jL^ri, more
rarely (^^jLJ^ t; X^Jlk darkness, plur. <^LiJLk alongside
84. ^^J, 85. VOCATIVE. 73
of c^LJLb and v^yLJlis. This is a favourite method in
the case of the plural of the form &JL*i, as kLxla
(§ 73c) a single thrust or blow; plur. v:yLIiJb several
thrusts or blows.
G o
Before ^| a son, a proper name loses its nuna- 84.
tion in the case mentioned § 6/2, and ^jj is itself
written without the prosthetic I;, e. g. JoJJI j^ *.JLwuo
muslimu'hnu-lwalidi Muslim, the son of al-Walid.
wCio ^jjI Jo\ zaiduni'bnu bischrin (§ 6e) means, on
the other hand, Zaid is the son of Bishr (nominal
sentence).
After G the particle of address, the simple noun 85.
follows in the nominative without the nunation, as
S2^ Muhammed, lCL^? Lj Oh M. ! J^f Lj Oh man 1
(by which a definite person is hailed). But should
anything of the nature of a complement (a genitive,
for instance) be added to the noun in the vocative,
the name of the person addressed must be put in the
accusative, as xJUl Ju^: xJLl! SJ^ IJ o Abdallah!(Oh
servant of God!); ioJxS^ J^ Lj Oh Banu Kinda! i. e.
members of the tribe of Kinda (here Jb cf. § 80 and
90 & is the constr. state of ^j*^)- If an Object follows,
the noun stands in the accus. with the nunation, as
74 86. COLLECTIVE NOUNS.
:^ll«.il Ll^'i) Ij Oil thou that ridest the red mare! —
The particle L^ I (before which we may also have G)
is always followed by a nominative with the article,
as (jj^^LLfl LLs! LS Oh ye people!
Note. After I3 , which serves as the expression of pain and
<* ^
sorrow, a long a is appended to the noun; in pause 8L- — , as
«U| 13 Oh mother!
86. There are, in Arabic, a mass of words which,
though singular in form, have a collective signification.
The following varieties may be singled out under
this head:
a. Simple collectives (masc. gend.) such as .» Jj, which
denotes not merely 'a people' collectively, but also
i><^ ^
'people' as individuals; jCwLc an army and also the
individual soldiers thereof. From such words broken
plurals may be formed.
b. Names of the inhabitants of a country, as J.-^!
the Jews, often coinciding with the name of the country
jo"-'
itself, as JoLgJi the Hindus; a single Jew or Hindu is
g "^^ S o
called ;5^^., ^s^^ § ^^^'
c. Class names (masc. gend.) from which are formed^
nomina unitatis (§ 73 c) as j»U^ doves.
d. So-called quasi-plurals (masc. gend.), from which
no nomen unitatis is formed, as v^J^^ a company of
87. THE BROKEN PLURALS. 75
horsemen (a single one C^U)'i (•tX^ ^^^ domestics
(one of which is (•oLL) ; ^iA^^ a number of asses (one
ass^U^); JoLA^ slaves (trom Ju^).
The so-called broken plurals (plurales fracti in the 87.
language of the native grammarians — by German ^*
scholars by preference called 'inner plurals' because
due to changes in the body of the word) are also
strictly speaking nothing more than collectives. Hence
they are treated in Arabic as singular nouns of the
feminine gender and construed accordingly. Thus
xi'wftXxj l-jIjJ I different gates, where i^loj is the broken
plural of i^U (on the model of JLiil), and the par-
ticiple act. V. of ^jli is put in the fern. sing. — These
broken plurals, further, take the same inflection as
the singulars, discussed in § 77 ff.
As a rule the broken plurals are given in the b.
dictionaries alongside of the singular of their respective
nouns; when this is not so, it is to be presumed that
the word either has no plural or takes a pluralis sanus.
Sometimes we find from one and the same word more
than one plural ; in such a case, 'not unfrequently, a
word varies its plural as its meaning varies. Certain
of the broken plurals are, as a rule, confined to certain
specified singulars.
76 88. THE BROKEX PLURALS.
88. From nouns regarded as containing three con-
sonants the following broken plurals may be formed :
y Go' ' ^o^ '—- o "
1. Jjii from JJtil (§ 62 c) and its fern. :i>^L*i
(§ 74&), as f^ from lilf red; lyl (cf. § 70^)
from Oy^A black; (jdxj (for (j^djo cf. § 70/) from
(jojol white.
( 2. Jkjii from various singulars, as ^jS^ from
LjLx5^ book, i
G^ G^j, Q^ G^o
3. Joii from sing. Rjl*i, as .ki* from RxkS piece.
^ ^- 4. Jii mostly from sing, ^ii, as v^J^^ ^o^
iUJl^ box; ^a\ from xx)| people; occasionally from
xJLii, as ^wi* (for ^J> ace. to § 71 &) from i^ja place.
" 5. kJLks, as 'i^\ from • | brother.
r.>^^ G ^ G^^^ G
V 6. iUjti esp. from sing. J^£.Li, as RX»5^ from JooLS^
perfect; but also from JJi § 70c, as 5oL*« (for
HJo^Aw) from jJLl lord.
* G-^ ^ G «^ g
7. iULii (rare) as sSliJ from 4>^* monkey.
*-- 8. ilJUi from J^U ult. ^^ as sLdi' (for iLudS
§ 71 &) from ^U judge.
9. JLii very common, from various singulars, as
J.tJ^ from ^Jo arrow.
THE BROKEN PLURALS. 77
10. Jyii Tery common, also from various singulars,
as ^yLs*. from JcL^ band of soldiers; ^j (for (^ Jo
see § 71 e) and then (with change of u to i) jG from
iJLj weeping.
11. aLlLii (rare) as sTL^ from y^ stone.
12. ajyii (rare) as kia-i^ from Ir uncle.
13. Jjti from J^U, as Jl^ from Jl^G an un-
branded she-camel.
Gj5> G^ G*' G"
- 14. JUi from JutU, as t^U^ from ,_^-|^ scribe.
/ 15. J^jtil from various singulars, as J^kJ from
G * ^
J4^. foot.
p 16. JLUil from various singulars, as iUiJ from
; v.Xub.C a cake, xl^l (§ 67c) from vl^Axi beloved; lijpl
from lUol^ president; jL^I from 5^1 God.
St ® -"*
r 17. JLiil very common, from various singulars,
as AJax)\ from ^k/i rain; iLuil (always without the
nunation) from %^ thing.
18. i^^l esp. from Ju*i, as ^L^'l from w^vi*
relative; ill^l from ^^li rich.
19. ji,*i (rare), as ^^f^ from ^.y^ wounded.
78 89. THE BROKEN PLURALS.
^ 20. i^xi, as ilwjuir from v^Lco poet.
21. j^^Vjti, as ^Loi from xi youth; j^l^^
(for ;jl>%.£^ cf. § 69 &) from .Li neighbour.
22. ^^*i, as ^IJJo from 0013 district ; ,jL«ji
from jjLsLi rider; ^It^^-ww negroes from 4>ll| black.
Note. Forms 5 and 15 — 17 are used, as a rule, only of a
number of objects not exceeding ten (hence called pluralia
paucitatis).
89. From nouns with more than three radical con-
sonants (cf. § 56^ ff.) are formed plurals in which the
first consonant takes «, the second a and the third i.
Such plurals are diptotes with the exception of all
those derived from stems ult. ^ (or with an additional
i^— in the sing. § 74 «) which take the nunation m in
the nominative and genitive, but not in the accusative
which ends in ^ The forms of the singular of
Nos. 24 (cf. also ..^^^ § 66) and 25 are regarded
as quadriliterals. No. 29 ends in long a and is diptote.
The following are the principal varieties:
23. JJLii as Lj<^U^ from ^dJ^ (NF. Jdii)
locust. This form is also found from nouns that are
only in a special sense quadriliterals, inasmuch as
they are really triliterals with the addition of a
K THE BROKEN PLURALS.
79
formative consonant; examples of this group are:
a) J^UI, as JuoUl from RJUil (NF. iULiil) fingertip;
also from elatiyes used as substantives, such as
oli^l the great ones from JS\ elat. of yXjS^; b) Ji^LftJ*
^ , ^-^. G^ or. g"^' «- ' ' "i -^
as ^o^S from 20^* (NF. xlLlslS) experience; c) J^^Ux)
as Joljjo from iUoy>o (NF. iUJiAjo) dung-heap; ^jioLsuj
'' G"^ G-'o^,.''
(with J, not with §) from iLwCuutx> (NF. iUL*i>o) livelihood ;
^Lju) (acc. ^^Lxi) of ^^Jouo (NF. JotAi) idea.
> ^■' G -^ " G ^
24. jL&!«i especially from iUL^U and J^U (used
as a substantive), as /Sxlj-o from iuijtLo thunder-clap;
,j*;.|^ from ^.U rider; ^\^ (for [jo^SyL § 67 &)
from ^JfiL^ person of distinction; Jli (acc. ^Jl^)
from ibsLi a female slave.
25. JuLii from such nominal forms with a long
vowel after the second radical as have a feminine
form or signification, as a) yjui- from 8\LI^ funeral
obsequies; b) «w^L:^ from kLc^ miracle; c) jjaajI*.^
from (jijvi bride.
26. Jlii as .Uci from ,^lxi (N. F. JJti) decision.
27. JuJLii from quadriliteral nouns with a long
vowel before the last consonant, as JuoLit from ^oiiXs,
80 90. IRREGULAK XOUXS.
S ? o '
(N. F. JyX.xi) bunch of fruit; this form is also found
with nouns derived from triliteral stems, of which the
following are specimens: a) JiA.fcLil as oot>Lis^l from
iu^ 0^5.1 (NF. xJyxi]) story; b) JuutUji as ^.Lks
So-.,.. S^o^ ^
from oijw,o.j> (infinitive Jujiaj used as a noun) turn ;
c) JuT^LLo as vJ(>Lrjo from ..JJi/j (participle JyxJuo
used as a noun) fate; but also Ju^Li (cf. No. 24) as
jj**jyu/|^ from jgw^U^ (NF. J^li) spy.
G- ^'■
28. ilULii, from quadriliteral nouns denoting
living beings, as hJjIJ^ from nII^ (NF. JLxi) a
G" ^^ G*o^ Gf ,"''
mighty man; xiJ'Uu! from ^aa^I bishop; s tX^^* from
Go .G-"— S^"-
JolJLj* pupil; 54>t>L*S from ;^4>ttXxj a native of Bagdad.
29. jLii, as ^^^ from ilC^ desert; GjcXi
(for ^JtXi § 2^ note I) from ^ItX^ (NF. xi^Ai from
ult. ;^) present.
90. The following nouns (arranged in alphabetical
order) are more or less irregular in their mode of
inflection:
9 * G ^ ^
a. ^ father, • | brother and j^^ father-in-law take
the following forms in the construct state and before
suffixes beginning with a consonant:
90. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 81
Nominative ^j,
M
7 "
Genitive ^t,
^^
Accusative LSI,
.6^. ._^ .
The Dual of (^1 is ,jIIjI (i- e. the two parents), the
plur. %\^S (§ 88 No. 17). The vocative singular with
suff. of the 1. pers. sing, of l->I is ^t L", ool G,
oo I L ; from -I : ^.t ; with suffix of the 2. pers. masc.
sing, dy I, J^|.
Go >^
^^[ son; plur. sanus has nom. r^yi^ (construct 2>.
yu), gen.-acc. Jw-Oj (st. constr. ^wo); broken plur.
eli;T(§ 88,17).
•( brother, see a\ broken plur. 5yL|, iji^l ^•
(§ 88,5. 21).
o^t sister; plur. i:ij|»^(. <?•
g^f or .^x)|^ (also %^) man; gen. ;^5jo|; ace. j^j. e.
sjwjoj woman; plur. from another root sLlj, /.
HpJ or ^!^l^ (§ 88,9. 5. 21).
J. I mother; plur. oL^t or ^cyLol. ^.
(jLwJI^ man, human being; plur. yllil, collective h.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.' 6
82 90. IRREGULAR NOUNS.
i- siu-? daughter, frequently also JUfl (with con-
nective Alif); plur. il>LlS.
*• ;^^ dinar, gold-piece; broken plur. irregular,
I- 'o (only in the st. constr.) possessor of . . . .;
gen. (^6, ace. |6; fern. v:ut j; dual nom. Uj; plur. nom.
• • <> (gen.-acc. ^•<^) fern. ci>L(>; for the plural J.|
{ulu)^ gen.-acc. j.| is used.
w. RjLu; year; plur. nom. ^yUv (or ^yX^)\ gen.-acc.
**• .w4^ ^amrun^ 'Amr, proper name of a man. A .
is added to the written form of this word in the nom.
and gen. {^y^) to distinguish it from y^ ^umaru (a
diptote). Ace. Iw^.^: ; followed by ^ it is written ^y^
and pronounced ^amra-bna.
0. ,vi or 5ji mouth; st. constr. usually nom. ^,
gen. ^^, ace. U; broken plur. (§ 88,17) »!^|.
2?. JuJ night; broken plur. (from the root J^) JUJ
(§89,23).
g. gli water; broken plur. 5LI5 or sj^l (§ 88,9.17).
91. THE CAEDINAL NUMBERS. 83
Jo hand; broken plur. (§ 88,15) Jo I from (^Jul r.
(cf. §71c).
Go -- G ss^ G ^o^
j»^ day; broken plur. *L>| from ^IjjI (§ 88,17). s.
Chapter IV. The Numerals. (§§ 91—93.)
The cardinal numbers have the following forms: 91.
Masc.
Fem.
1
1 ^'5
inflected
2
e.1^1
U^l
(inflected as a dua
3
4
5
l,li- (iJli)
G 0^
s
9^ ^^ ' 9^1 --
inflected
n
6
n
7
9o^
9^0^
n
8
^L;i(seep.27*)LoL;i
??
9
■T-fWV-^
G ^
G^ «
&JUaO
55
1
wwLc J^l
i? •*• <».
^JJ.t
indeclinable
6*
/ OF THK
f rrTVTTT-r-r-,-.-.
84 91, THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.
Masc. Fern.
12
wXi^^ Loj Hwww^ LaJoJ gen.-acc. ".& iV^jj
^^c
"^ ^5^-1
''-- *• —
13 Iccuc. xjiLS* jjlcii il?^' indeclinable
14 wCLd :oiju! s^-aLc *jk I „
^ o
li/ yWJL& XSLmO SwmX. «.mO ))
20 ^•wwi^.fc inflected, like all the tens, as a
pluralis sanus.
^^-' J^O-^ JO'' ^w
30 ij^*^*, 40 jj^*Jj Ij 50 ^ ^ ,M>»^, 60 ^^Ay,
-?0^ ^'^-f --50
70 ^j^u-w, 80 ^j^Ui*, 90 jj^»wuo
9-- G--
100 xjLo (also written iu>, and always so
pronounced, mVatun^ the | having no effect on the
pronunciation).
92. THE CARDmAL NUMBERS. 85
200 ^LBU, 300 &SLo l,li*, 400 xSu i;jt 500
xjLo jm» '^ } 600 kjLo o^, 700 kSLo «x*w, 800 ^^i^
xjLxi, 900 ioLo **«o.
1000 vJjI, 2000 ^lijt, 3000 o^fT 'xiSG (vjSm
is here a broken plural of the form JLii! § 88 No. 17)
&c. 11000 lilt lii 4\it 100000 oJf ^Lo, 1000000
Oiji Oil I.
The following are the leading points to be noted 92.
in joining the cardinals to the names of the objects
numbered :
The numerals for one (jL^I;) and two are adjec- a.
tives; the numbers from 3 — 10, on the other hand,
are substantives, and take the word indicating the
objects numbered in the genitive plural. They may
also, however, be placed in apposition after the noun.
Whatever their position relative to the substantive
may be — even, in fact, when the latter is altogether
omitted, or when they stand as the predicate of a
sentence — the construction is such that nouns of the
masc. gender take the fem. forms of these numerals,
* Often written i^Uiul &c.
86 93. THE ORDINAL NUMBERS.
and vice versa nouns of the fern, gender take the masc.
forms. Thus: ^\ju^ Rj^* (Rj^* jj^b) three sons,
i:yUj «J^I (*jnI v:yLo) four daughters. Also before
broken plurals of which the singular is masculine,
we find the fern, forms of these numerals (3 — 10), as
JL^^ io^* 3 men.
b. The numbers from 11 to 99 are followed by the
word indicating the objects numbered in the accusative
singular, as ^:^s ^Ji%.% 30 men.
c. The numbers from 100 upwards take the thing
numbered in the genitive singular as Jk^-^ JbL* *jxI
400 men.
d. In the compound numbers the nature of the
construction depends on the last numeral. The
particle 1 is used to join the numbers together; the
units and the tens may stand either before the
hundreds, or after the thousands and hundreds. Thus
the year 1895 is either i^ |^ RjU ^Ui; ^^ilo^ U^l^
93^ The ordinals have, for the most part, the form
a- of the act. part, of the I stem, as may be seen from
the following:
93. THE ORDINAL NUMBERS. 87
Masc. Fern. Masc. Fern.
1. ^ J.I, first ^J 6. jjwjLw ILw^^Lm/
2. ^U ^'-->* '• z*-?*-^ xxiLtw
3. eJli xaJLj 8. ,.w/oLS* iUxiLS*
9 .-
^- ^ 9 ^
4. «jL kjuls 9. j»A«b'
9^ 9^^ 9^S^^
5. jj*juoL&. X-wwoLi 10. 5-^Lc HwwLi
11. wCi^ ^^La. SwwLt xit^La. indeclinable
12. wCLd (ci^* Hj-*iw^ ^^H^J n
13. wC«^ viJLi* SwywLD &aJLj and so on.
The ordinals of the numbers from 20 upwards
are expressed by the corresponding cardinals, as
jj^*^* oJU thirty-third; when larger totals have
to be expressed, the cardinals are used even for the
lower numbers. In dates, as a rule, the cardinal
numbers are used exclusively, as HwCLd ^^* xjU« ^
Sj<A.^lt ^j.^ ^K ioLo ;dj^*. in the 1313th year of
the Hegira (which began on the 24th of June 1895).
Go,
Fractions are usually expressed by the form Joii, h.
9 * '
as viJli* a third.
88 94, 95. PARTICLES.
/ Chapter V. The Particles. (§§ 94—96).
94. The adverbs, prepositions and conjunctions cannot
here be given in detail. The prepositions, like many
adverbs, are still for the most part recognizable as
nouns of three radicals originally, which have preserved
the accusative ending without the nunation. Preposi-
tions therefore always govern the genitive case in
Arabic and may also stand in the genitive in depen-
dence on other prepositions. Thus ^J^ above, with
a subst. Ju^l l3V ^P ^^ ^^® ^i^^-
Note. A few adverbs end in u (which in this case kas
absolutely nothing to do with the nominative termination) as
ojw afterwards; so j-xj ^ in the same sense; but as prepositions
jjw or iXxj ^ after.
95. The following particles (in alphabetical order)
because written with a single letter are inseparably
joined to the following word, cf. § 8 note.
•^ -^^"^ . .
a. I (n) interrogative particle, as J^xi'l did he kill?
Before the connective Alif: viJLi^l for j + viU^j is thy
name . . . ?
b' v-j (a) preposition 'in'; with suffixes thus: 1. ^
in me, 2. masc. dlj, 3. masc. 20 (§ 12d) &c.
^- \^ particle of asseveration, as aJjb* by God.
96. PKEPOSITIONS AND CONJUXCTIOXS WITH SUFFIXES. 89
jjj^ shortened from o^iw, a particle which gives d.
to the impf. the sense of the future, as Juciiju-w he
will kill.
o, then, denotes a less close connection than r. e.
d (3) like, as. f.
J a corroborative particle before verbs, especially g.
in oaths, as ^jJUiuJ he will certainly kill; it also
stands before nouns, especially after the particle J. I
(§ 125 « note).
J (b) preposition and conjunction ; before suffixes A.
(except in 1. pers. sing. J) it becomes J, as vjj
to thee.
5 (1, 1) connective particle; as a particle of t-
asseveration it takes the gen., as aJUl. by God.
As regards the addition of pronominal suffixes 96.
to the prepositions and conjunctions, the following
points may be noted in addition to what has been
said under § 82.
Before the suffixes of the 1. pers. sing., the final a.
vowel or vocalic auslaut is dropped as is the case
with the noun; thus Jotj 'after' with the suff. of the
1. pers. sing. ,^Juij, but JjJu &c.
90 97. DISTINCTION BETWEEN PERF. AND IMPF.
6. In the prepositions Jc£ upon, and J[ towards,
the final ^ is sounded before suffixes (contrary to
§2^), e.g.
with suff. of the 2. pers. masc. viLJx» ^^i
„ „ „ 3. „ „ ^rt™"> ^l:
« « ,, 1. „ » ^, %l (see § 82 «)
c. The prepositions ^j^ and (twc double the n be-
fore the suffix of the 1. pers. sing., as -Lo.
^. •! behold, truly, and ^| that, become
with the suff. of the 2. pers. sing. masc. yib 1^ and dbi
" » » " 1- " » tS^l ^^ C5^i'
„ „ „ „ 1. „ plur. UJ^ or G^,
all or \jI
III. NOTES ON SYNTAX. (§§ 97—160).
Chap. I. Moods and Tenses. (§§ 97—104).
97. The perfect expresses a completed action, the
completion of which falls in the past, present or future,
or is thought of as falling in one or other of these
98. THE PEEFECT. 91
periods. The imperfect expresses an uncompleted
action, which may likewise fall in each of the same
three spheres of time.
The perfect is, in the first place, the tense of 98.
narration (perfectum historicum), when an action com- ^'
pleted in the past is spoken of, and may, as a rule,
be rendered by our past tense, as Jo\ :^1^ Zaid came.
By the perfect the idea is expressed that an action h.
or a state has continued from the beginning, and still
continues, as iUJlxJI \JiXjis>.\ the learned (always)
disagree (gnomic aorist); jLii* jJUj God, he is exalted
(from the beginning).
When the perfect expresses an action completed c.
in the present, it is to be rendered by our present,
^ ^ ^ Jo- o^
as I j^ dLxJOiftt I present you with this (the affair is
at this moment concluded).
In a sentence containing an oath or a wish, the d.
perfect expresses an action which, in the mind of the
speaker, is completed in the future, as ^JU| iOiJ God
curse him; also with y 'not', as aJlJt x^^. ^ may God
have no pity on him; oJliti ^ ^\\ ^7 ^^d I do
it not !
When the particle Jo stands before the perfect, e.
the latter may in most cases be rendered by our per-
92
THE IMPERFECT.
feet (either the present or the past perfect), as Jo
bji'j we have (just) mentioned, or we had mentioned.
The perf. with Jo may also he used in the sense given
under suh-section c,
/. When the verb ^ (to he) stands before the per-
fect (with or without jU*), we must render as a rule
by our past perfect (pluperfect), as ^y^ d^% O
JUio!^l| Jucjb jj^^i >A JJJ ^L5 when Moses was
born, Pharaoh had (just) commanded to kill the little
children.
Note. Instead of the above verbal sentence (§ 134), ^jlT
may be followed by a compound nominal sentence (§ 138 d!) as ^ir
^. Our conditional is expressed in Arabic by the
perfect, that is, it is represented as something already
accomplished, as v:i>4>4>« I should wish, ^:i>04>« o^Is (Jo)
I should have wished."
h. For the perf. after |j| and in conditional sen-
tences see §§ 157, 158.
99. The imperfect indicative is to be rendered accord-
ing to circumstances by our present or our future,
sometimes also by our past progressive (imperfect).
a. If the future is to be expressed with greater pre-
cision than by the Arabic imperfect alone, the latter
99, THE rSIPEKFECT. 93
--0
has prefixed to it the adverb Oj^ (^nd), which may be
shortened to ^ and is then inseparably j oined to the verb
(see § 95</), as ^ySj^ oj!l ye will know (it); jl^jy-l
(49 &) we shall show yotT. >^A-<V^
By the imperfect is expressed an action which h.
accompanies another action completed in the past,
or which is still in the future from the stand point
of the latter, as ^j jCo *-^L I L L^ they came to their
father weeping (cf. § 157 &); ljvXco ,jJout ^*| he
came to the spring to drink.
The imperfect can also express the continuance c.
of an action in the past; /^JLjUlXj may also mean
'they were fighting for a considerable time', or 'they
fought repeatedly, with each other'. More frequently,
however, this continuous imperfect is expressed by
a combination of ^li^with the impf. (cf. § 98/*. and
note); sometimes we can render such a combination
by our 'was wont to' or 'used to', as *^j J^^^ d^\^, ^JS
litis 5 xi*^* he used to receive every day three
drachmae.
If Jo stands before the imperfect, a certain in- d.
definiteness is the result, as joj-^Q <^ *^^ ^^ most
94 100. THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
likely be that . . .', an idea which is not unfrequeiitly
found in the imperf. without Jo.
Note a. The impf. also stands in direct subordination to
other verbs, as ^ySj] c*iy U I ceased not to drink (cf. § 110);
jyuUJI JUJ Jxk. he began to speak with the people; Jxil ^J^I U
Jjjri cannot do such a thing.
Note b. Before several verbs (perfects or imperfects) joined
together with 3, it is sufficient to write ^jjlT once, and so with
OS !■>»' , "
o»5, i^yM and J**.
Note c. ^^^(see note to § 98/") is frequently followed by a
compound nominal sentence, as ^VUl '^yf^ ^U^ ^jjVT Osman was
wont to visit the graves (the cemetery).
100. The Subjunctive is found in certain kinds of depen-
dent clauses introduced by a conjunction, the action
of which is to be represented as one to be expected
as the result of the action of the principal clause,
and hence as one that is only likely to occur in the
future. Hence this mood is frequently (not always)
used after the conjunctions ^\ that, ^t (from !^ ^jl)
that not, £i until, o (and I) that, and always after
J» v5^ U^ in order that, ^^ (made up Q>i "^ ^S)
in order that . . not, !| in the sense of ^except that',
'until', as ^S)<>Ji^ ^U^ he came in order to visit me;
ZJ^, l\\ sCil he commanded him to write (that he
101. THE MOD. APOCOPAT. OR JUSSIVE, 102. THE MOD. ENERGIC. 95
should write). In like manner the subj. is used after
^ (ijl ^) i^ will ^ot be (the case) that, as ^JL«^| ^
I shall not send him.
The modus apocopatus (or jussive) is found: 101.
1) in positive commands, generally with the particle a.
J prefixed, as .^^jcXxl let him write.
Note. When such a form is further preceded by ^ and i3
(which is sometimes the case, without any special stress resting
on these particles) J generally loses its vowel, as 4U) ,J^5
^yMyJ] y^Y^ and in God let the believers (then, therefore) trust.
2) in negative commands with y, as Jloj ^ say not, h.
thou shalt not say. The imperative can never take
a negative.
3) always after Ij, not as a prohibition but as ne- c.
gativing a completed action, as l-jwoJ *J he did not
strike, (as the negation of Gl^); in like manner after
L^J in the sense of 'not yet'.
4) in the protasis and apodosis of conditional sen- d.
tences, see § 158.
The modus energicus is usually found in assevera- 102.
tions, and particularly in connection with an oath
and the corroborative particle J, as aojwo^ isXi\^ by
God, I will certainly strike him; this mood is also
used with the prohibitive y.
96 103. THE PASSIVE. 104. THE PARTICIPLE.
103. The Passive is employed in those cases in which
the agent, for some reason or other, must not be
mentioned. Hence a sentence like J.jv Jjci* means
'Zaid has been killed (by some person unknown or
who may not be named)'. Our 'Zaid has been killed
by 'Amr', the Arabs express by the active construction.
The passive is frequently found in an impersonal sense
(see § 121 a),
104. With regard to the employment of the participles
the following points are to be noted:
a. The participle (especially as predicate of a nominal
sentence § 122 «) frequently expresses our "to be about
to", as dljJI *t>U u! I am about to come, on the
♦♦ ^ f --
point of coming, to you.
h. The passive participle is also used impersonally
in Arabic; starting from the sentence iu-Lt jc4^ ^^
fainted (literally: it was covered over him) we can
also say xJLfc ^Ai^o li he has fainted , fem. "l^,
L^jJLd ^^miJuq. In such constructions the impersonal
part. pass, may be inflected for all three cases and be
determined by the article, as xSXk ^Z^^*^ J^y-? ^;y^
I passed a man who had fainted; ^^^jlJI iSy^S ooK
L^lii I saw the woman that had fainted.
105, VERB. COMPLEMENTS. 106 108. ACCUS. COMPLEMEKT. 97
Chap. II. The Government of the Verb. (§§ 105—117).
In Arabic the verb may take as its complement 105.
either an accusative, or a preposition with its case.
The numerous combinations of the latter sort, in
which the preposition with its case is sometimes the
necessary complement of the action denoted by the
verb, sometimes merely accessory (such, for example,
as specifications of place and time) cannot here be
given in detail. See, however, §§ 114 ff.
The accusative is the case depending immediately 106.
on the verb. We distinguish here the cases in which,
the accusative stands a) as object, p) as predicate,
and y) as limitation or more precise definition, generally
called by grammarians, . the accusative "of nearer
definition".
a) Certain classes of verbs, as for example, verbs 107.
of coming and going, take as direct object the goal
to which the action is directed, e. g. ouyJI JlL.4>
he went into the house.
Note. On the other hand ^2*^1 ^| J^J denotes primarily
the direction of the action towards the goal; C^] ^ Ji.J
he went into the house and stayed there.
The following take two accusatives: 1) The causa- 108.
tive forms of transitive verbs with one accusative in
the I. stem, as IJLt to know; cans. sVj JiJI i^iJLc be
Socin, Arabic Grammar.* 7
98 109. THE ABSOLUTE OBJECT.
taught him reading; 2) verbs that express the ideas
of filling or giving, of making into, of considering or
recognising as, of naming, and many others: e. g.
LiCi yos^l aJUt Jou^ God made the earth (into) a
carpet; IcXik? iU^I * -■ he named his son Muhammed.
When a verb of this class is put in the passive, the second
accusative remains, as IJl*-^ auj| .-♦.**/ his son was
named Muhammed; uios;> ^'.j he was presented with
a dirhem, from the active Ui^4> sb*! he presented him
with a dirhem (for suff. see § 107).
Note a. The two accusatives of sucli verbs as express the
idea of finding one to be, or considering one as something, stand
to each other, strictly speaking, in the relation of subject and
predicate (§ 139); thus a sentence like UaI*. l»^ ^*^^ i^a.y also
be translated 'I found that he waS a gentle old man'. As second
'"^ " * ^ ^
object we may have a verb instead of a noun, as ^.^SfiUoii '^'^^^
%^\ *^^) they found their payment to be something which was
returned to them = they found that their payment was &c.
Note b. Verbs expressing not an intellectual but a physical
perception are also frequently found with two accusatives. The se-
cond, indeed, is generally regarded as an ace. of condition (§
1136), but sentences like UTU 1^ C> -y *n>, it must be admitted,
may also be translated: I heard 'Amr weeping, i. e. I heard how
'Amr wept.
109. ^^^ '^^ purpose of strengthening or of more
precisely defining the idea conveyed by it, every verb
110. THE ACCUSATIVE AS PREDICATE. 99
may take a so-called absolute object. This absolute (or
internal) object consists qi an infinitive, a nomen speciei ^ *^
(§ 64 c) or other noun. U sually this object is itself more
precisely defined either by some qualifying word or
phrase (§ 120) or by a genitive, as Lul*.^ LL^^^* ^^^
he educated him with a good education, i. e. well;
^.^i^.l bl^ i^y^ ^® struck him with a stroke
which pained me (for the relative sentence, see § 155);
sjL;^ 'iZ^ dUL^ he walked in the way of his grand
father. More rarely the absolute object is found with-
out any qualification, as Ljw*3 xjI^ he struck him
with a stroke, as much as to say, he struck him a
blow, and what a blow ! Ssyo Swo he wrapped it in
(so many) parcels ; here the absolute object expresses
rather the result of the action.
Note. Sometimes the place of the infinitive is taken by the
mere qualification, as Uji jb ^U- he journeyed long, for U^jb \y^ ^U«
he journeyed a long journey, or by some other form of nearer
a> o^o« ^ o^ 4^^ ^W'O '^^
definition, as \s^La jwO»S*II c^, HAs. iiJI ^ God allowed him to
capture Jerusalem peacefully = ^JLc ^XJ.
p) The accusative stands as the -predicate with verbs 110.
which express the idea of being or becoming some-
thing, and is especially common with the verb JjliT
(med. .). This verb signifies either 1) to be in the
100 111. THE ACCUSATIVE AS PREDICATE.
sense of to exist, as ^jn. m^S^ there was (there lived)
a vizier, or 2) to be something (in particular); in
the latter sense it takes its predicate (to adopt
the nomenclature of the native grammarians) in
the accusative, as ^LoL^ aLjJyol o^jL^ his wife was
pregnant. The same construction is adopted by all
verbs of similar signification, such as -^*uuot to be
something late, Xa^I to be something early, 5Li to
be or become something a second time, "AS to remain,
to last, J|v to cease to be something, ^Lo to become
something, juJJ not to be something. The place of
the accusative in the predicate may be taken by a
preposition with its case (cf. § 114 ff.), as JoC ^li^
^^^jjuJ^S ^ Zaid was in the house; j*/^aJI d^Xo ooLT
;jf)>!^t (iJjXo JLfcl ,%^ ^^ kings of Persia belonged
to the most powerful sovereigns on earth. The con-
struction of ^SS and the others with a finite verb
(§§ 98/*; 99 c) must also be understood in this way,
that is, the predicate in such cases consists of a verbal
sentence (§ 135), as Syjui Jo (j^-LUt ,^sA^i t^^ people
had already (prop, early) become weary.
111. The accusative, further, stands in the predicate
112. ACC. OF CONCOMITANCE. 113. ACC. OF NTIARER DEFINITION. 101
after the negative !^f, when the latter, as the Arahs
say, expresses a general negation. The accus. after y,
which is always undetermined, drops its nunation, as
iJUl ^1 xJI ^ there is (absolutely) no God but Allah.
The accusative is used after the conjunction ; to 112^
indicate concomitance, especially in verbal sentences
(§ 135), as dGir v:i4*I^ Li what hast thou and
thy father done? JuyJI. y^\ oJ> Ijo I ceased not
to go with (along) the Nile; also without a verb Lo
tju\. du what hast thou (to do) with Zaid?
- Y) The accusative of nearer definition is employed 113.
in the following cases:
1) To give details of place and time, as Lu^o liaj a.
^U-cbl he looked to right and to left of him; L^^ "X^
he journeyed a parasang; ^Lci^ LL^ they came late
in the evening; xjII^ sJoo siijo jCt ^'^^^\ he con-
tinued faithful thereto during his life-time.
2) Very frequently the accusative, as a rule un- h.
determined, appears in verbal (rarely in nominal)
sentences as the accusative of state or condition,
as xJotXiJI jl^ L^I£o \Sm he journeyed, taking the
direction of Medina; Ll^fLS |1I^ oyyai I ^aet 'Amr
weeping.
102 113, 114*. ACC. OF NEARER DEFINITION AND EXCLAMATION.
Note a. "With the accusative of condition the student
must be careful to note to which of the nouns in the sentence it
applies; in the last sentence above, for example, it might refer
to the subject pronoun implicit in CU-vSJ instead of to "^Amr.
Note b. Two nouns in the accusative of condition are
often placed beside each other without a conjunction (asyndeton)
as l^yA«i U^j^ \^ ^^f (God said to Satan): Go out of it (pa-
radise, fem.) as one cast off and despised (for U^j-o see § 76 note).
Note c. In some rare cases an infinitive is used (in place
of a participle) to denote a qualifying circumstance; \y^ js3 he
* J ., ^
was killed bound (i. e. while bound) = \)yi^.
c. 3) The accusative of 5p^d/?c«/eow(=accus. of respect),
also in most cases undetermined, expresses a more
precise reference, as llaJuLo ou..w-i it (paradise) is
beautiful with reference to staying (there), i. e. as a dwell-
ingplace ; this accus. is especially common with elatives
"^^0 9 a ^^
(§ 63 h) of a more general signification, as 'iy^.^ Jcwl
stronger with regard to the colour red == redder.
d. 4) The accusative of nearer definition is also em-
ployed to indicate the motive or purpose of an action,
in which case, also, it is mostly undetermined, as
. ULs^ 'r^r^ *^®y ^^^ from cowardice ; aJ Lo\S\ o^i*
I stood up to do him honour.
114* The accusative may also stand in cases, parti-
cularly in exclamations, where a finite verb can be
supplied, as !^LgiwI ^b»l welcome! Here we must
114, 115. THE VERB WITH PREPOSITIONS. 103
supply ouo^. and the meaning of the phrase comes
to be: thou art come to relatives and a smooth (i. e.
pleasant) place; ^L^ slowly! to be taken as the
absolute object of an imperative understood.
Of the numerous constructions of the verb with 114.
a preposition attention need only be called to the
following.
Many prepositions are still treated as nouns, in
accordance with their original signification (see § 94),
as Jlj^l. )5^jJi io»Aj jjyo he distinguished between
(prop, the distance, difference of) males and females.
Very frequently we find (cf. § 110) the partitive ^
used in this way as object, e. g. |»L*iaJI ^jjo J.5^1 he
ate of the food.
A few verbs are construed, with but slight differ- 115.
ence of meaning, now with a direct object, now with
t«j» as ^L^i he knew it, lu *JLft he knew about it.
Frequently ^^ serves to introduce an object, to which
the action of the verb extends only indirectly, as
ItXjv eou he sent Zaid; i^LiXJG vi^ju he sent the
writing (i. e. some one with the writing); jJjiJI vioL?
he sent the slave, jJjlIL cyJu, same meaning, but
104 116, 117. THE VERB WITH PREPOSITIONS.
with the understanding that the slave travels under
escort. Verhs of going construed with l-> take the
" sense of bringing, as j-iib I JoC ^'1 he brought Zaid
the news. — This ^_j may also accompany an impera-
tive as a periphrasis of the first person of the dual
and plural, as Uj [Jo^[ let (thou) us go, Hi lydxj
let (ye) us go.
116. The meaning of many verbs is often so altered
according to the preposition with which they are
construed that a sense quite the opposite of the
original, according to our idiom, is the result; thus
xj Lis is properly: he called (to God) in his favour,
i. e. he blessed him, xjUU Lc3 he called (to God)
against him, i. e. he cursed him; ^!^L JUiXci] he
occupied himself with the affair; but with \x^ (which
contains the idea of separation) ^^| ^j^ Juu^j he
was occupied so that he put the affair in question
aside, could not attend to it.
117. Of the various uses of the preposition J (see
§§ 130 ff.), we may call attention to its special use in
dates, particularly in specifying the days of the month,
as ^y^ Jwx> xJLaJ Xy in the first (literally: to the first)
night of (the month) Muharram. fjJLi jJLlJ ftjS^l
118. DETERMINATION. i ^^^^'^^JB&ITY
JtlJjui ^\x) or with the omission of JllJ
JtJli ijJ^ at the time of seven nights, which (*cf.
§ 155) had elapsed of Sa'ban, i. e. when seven nights
(or days) of S. had passed; o^aaj (JI jJ) SwCCl^ «js!^
j^Ld^r j^vx> when still fourteen (nights) were left of
Eamadan. /
Chap. III. The Government of the Noun. (§§118—134).
A noun may take with it a) the article, ^3) a permut- 118.
ative (noun in apposition), y) ^ qualifying (attribu-
tive) adjunct, h) a genitive.
a) When a noun is preceded by the article, it is said
to be determined (§ 79 b). This determination may be
stronger or weaker:
A very strong determination is found in certain a.
words which contain the idea of time, as aLc.LlJ! this
hour = now, ^jju! this day = today. In these cases
the article has the force of a demonstrative.
By means of the article a single definite object is b.
indicated, which the speaker has in mind, or which
has been already mentioned: by J^ Jl is meant some
particular known man. Proper names furnished with
the article (see § 19 a) were originally appellatives
with the determination, as ^^..^lif.
106 119. APPOSITION.
c. The determination by the article often serves
merely to denote the species or class to which some-
« ^ 9 ^ ,
thing belongs, as sLi^l J»ax *i he is like an ass.
This use of the article is named the generic.
119. P) From among the cases in which a noun follows
another noun in apposition, the following may be
singled out as worthy of note:
a. 'A substantive may have in apposition words
expressing a) size, b) resemblance, c) the parts and
d) the material of which a thing is made up. Thus
S ^ Go-'
a) els 6 (o*j a dress an ell long (lit. a dress, an ell);
b) Jo\ JUuo J^v a man like (lit. the likeness of)
Zaid; c) (d>LoJ Ju.^ a rope made up of rotten pieces;
d) JotXil jwi^l the iron finger-ring; when undeter-
mined preferably with "^ as ,^^b jjjo jvJLo an idol
of gold. For the last, the genitive construction is
also found viz: ^.^jJI ^JLo.
h. The word J^ totality is construed either with the
noun following in the genitive, or stands in apposition,
with a suffix referring back to the noun, as (j*.LD| J^
or fv-gjo ^MrfCiJI all men. (Note that Jj being a substan-
tive always remains unchanged as regards gender and
number).
120. QUALIFYING ADJUNCTS. 107
Y) a substantive may be qualified 1) by an adjective, 120.
2) by a preposition with its case, or 3) by a relative
clause (§§ 155—6).
1) The qualifying word may be an adjective^ as a.
Jt^Li *Uol an honest Imam; in this case if the
substantive is determined the adjective must also
receive the determination, as JoLiJI *Uo^l|, the honest
Imam.
The adjective follows its substantive; to this rule h.
the demonstrative pronoun forms an apparent excep-
tion, in as much as it generally stands lefore (like the
article § 118), less frequently after ^ the substantive
which it qualifies. Thus we find *ikij| I j^ this slave,
alongside of |j^ ^^^l.
The adjective must agree with its substantive in c.
gender and number, as ^JLx»^ ^^H^ ^ pretty girl.
Among the exceptions is the word ^LyO much, which
generally remains unchanged, like a noun in apposi-
9 - S ^
tion, even after the plural, as wAA5^JL:is, many men.
That the broken plurals take their adjectives in d.
the feminine has been already noted (see § 87«); the
adjective, however, may also take a broken plural, as / \
*lw5 JL^s, noblemen. The plur.sanus, moreover, is not
108 121. PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE AS ADJUNCT.
unfrequently found especially if the adjective qualifies
words denoting living beings, as ^j^L^JI ib ^ ! the
ancestors that were of old (part, of ,c-<^)- I^ ^^® same
circumstances the collectives (§ 86 a) may also take a
plural adjective, as i^^ * jj miserly people, J. JJUo f»^*
violent people. The preceding pronoun often stands
then in the plural, as ^LUl s^^yo these men; but
with fern, plurals that do not denote living beings
generally in the fem. singular, as ^| JUJI s jjo these
deserts; before broken plurals also in the fem. sing., as
viJLJLiiJI » j^ these slaves.
2) From those cases in which a preposition with its
J21. noun is dependent on a verb (§§ 114 ff.) or its equi-
^' valent, must be clearly distinguished those in which
they form the qualifying attribute of another noun,
as (i-jjjlj *jLo J<£. viiJuUL^ I sat down beside a
goldsmith (who was) in the bazaar; diXsu ^jjq 'dx^s'o
thy posterity (that will be) after thee.
Sometimes this attribute does not stand next to
h. the word qualified; so particularly with the relatives
^ and Uo, as ^^1 ^7^ *LciJI J^t> !\ys those of
the Arabs that advanced into Syria; CjLb U L^l
122. ASYNDETON OF ATTRIBUTES. 123. THE GENITIVE. 109
eUwiJI ^ *XJ marry of the women whatever seemeth
good unto you.
Should several attributes qualify a single substan- 122.
tive, the connecting conjunction is usually omitted
(asyndeton), as aj^^jJI JJtJ! 2dUI the high and mighty
God; xjJdl l-jI*-?I Jvo ^^L <^G a wide gate of the
gates of the town; xJJbj «r*^K (J^ iU-^Uo auoU-t
a thick cloud over his head which gave him shade.
h) One noun^ when in dependence on another, is put 123.
in the genitive case — the function of which is to deter-
mine more exactly the application of the preceding
noun. As the result of the close connection subsisting
between the second noun and the first, the latter, now
said to be in the construct state (§ 79c) and therefore
without the article, is regarded as determined. There-
fore y^.LiJI ^s is 'the (particular) spear of the
(particular) horseman', and so with the suffixes, as
jL^. his (particular) spear. When the dependent noun
(nomen rectum) is undetermined, the governing noun
(nomen regens) is only defined in a generic sense
(§118 c), or is specialized in a way resembling the
generic definition, as dULc ouL? a daughter of a king
= a king's daughter.
110 124.CONS.AND GEN.INSEP. 125. DETER. BYSUFF. 126. COMPOS. NOUNS.
Note. More rarely, in the latter case, the generic article
as ja j<t*
may be attached to the nomen rectum, as ^-j**SJ) y^L barley bread
124. The genitive cannot be separated from the go-
verning word (nomen regens); adjectival and other
additions must therefore stand after the genitive, as
«.A*;t Jl viLiiJl o^Aj the spacious house of the king.
When, according to our idiom, a genitive belongs to
two substantives, in Arabic it is made dependent on
the first of the two, and represented with the second
by a personal pronoun, as ^tj■uo• xJUl V^ ^^ the mercy
and blessings of God.
125. Substantives conveying the idea of time sometimes
receive a specially strong determination by the addition
of suffixes (cf. § 118 «), as aJUJ ,Jwo he prayed his
night, i. e. the particular night in which he then was.
lie. The close connection of two nouns thus standing
in the genit. relation makes sometimes possible their
fusion to one idea, although only the first component
admits of inflection. Thus xJUl jJ^t (gen. «JJ| d^\
acc. aJUl tXlc) the servant of Allah, as a proper name,
conveys but a single idea. Further illustrations will be
found in the numerous examples of composite proper
names, of which one of the elements is one or other of the
words ^^1 son, C^\ father, ciJj daughter, 1\ mother.
127. SUBST. USE OF ADJJ. 128. EXPLICATIVE GENITIVE. Ill
As the Arabs have no family names, properly so-called,
the name of a man or woman receives for distinction's
sake an addition by the help of the above words, as
Jo'vJ jj-? tXZi (jifLoLlj .j! (observe the order). Very
frequently a name thus made up has become the
principal name, as that of the first Caliph ^xj .jl,
for example, or that of the savant sjuJ3 ^'^U names
of tribes, too, like s^^JS' ^Lj, are in the same way
simple notions (Einheitsbegriffe).
Not unfrequently an adjective which in our idiom 127.
would be made to qualify its substantive, is in Arabic
raised to the rank of a substantive, on which its proper
substantive is made to depend ; thus xiiJL^ *-j*^ the
noble(ness) of his character = his noble character;
(jwUJt JiS\ most men. The same construction is found
with elatives also, as ^-iuut jjy^l I^Lc they lived
the easiest life (cf. § 109).
A species of explicative genitive is found in cases 128.
where a general conception is more explicitly defined
by a following proper name, as ^^s^S ^jbA the land
of Yemen. — Under this head may be reckoned the
suffixes appended to numerals, as jv4axJLS* the three
of them.
112 129. CLAUSE AS GEN. 130. PERIPH. OF GEN. 131. CONS. OF INFIN.
129. A few words containing the ideas of time and
place may have, instead of a genitive, a whole clause
depending on them, as Jjci* -»•«> on the day on which
he was killed.
130. When a noun on which another noun is in the
proper sense (cf. § 134) dependent must remain absolu-
tely undetermined (see § 123), the usual genitive rela-
tion of nomen regens and nomen rectum is inadmissible,
and the connection of the two must be expressed by
a preposition, as jjG ^\ a brother of yours, where
1^ is attrib. adjunct to • I (see § 121 a),
131. InfiniUves may govern their object according to
the laws either of verbal or of nominal government.
In the first instance their subject is subordinated in the
genitive; Jo; J^xiJ accordingly means: the circumstance
that Zaid has killed. If no subject is named, the object
may likewise stand in the genitive, so that the same
expression Jo\ Jo3* may also mean : the circumstance
that Zaid has been killed, the fact of Zaid's being killed.
When both subject and object are present, the former
is treated as a subjective genitive ; the latter remains
in the accusative or J with the genitive is used as a
periphrasis for the accusative, as . t^j ^^•.^ asXo.lJoo
132. PARTICIPLE WITH OBJECT. 113
the circumstance that he was constantly drinking
wine; . j'-^j ^j^ the circumstance that I am fond
of wine. J also stands after an undetermined infinitive
(e. g. in cases like § 113^ and others) as Ufli'l c
iw«»4id
JoJ I stood up to do honour to Zaid.
In the case of the participle, the object of the 132.
verb appears as the objective genitive, and when the
part, has the sense of the perfect it is determined by
the genitive following, as |jf>^l (^JLL iJUl God is
he who has created the earth = the creator of the
earth. With a present or future sense the governing
participle is not determined, as ^y^\ iuuto ,j*Ju Jo
every soul is one that will taste of death; ^J^'^Kjq 2^1
he is one that will meet with you. If the participle
is in itself determined, the object stands in the
accusative or is expressed periphrastically with J, as
0^ Si ^
[JLaJU v.lJLkJI he who strives after knowledge; the
same applies when the participle is strictly undeter-
mined, as auot *U CJLb one who wishes to take
blood revenge for his father; *^Lw!^ LL^ oJs Lo I
have not ceased to love Islam.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.^ 8
114 133. TJNDETEEM. STAT. CONSTR. 134. IMPROP. ANNEXATION.
133. A special idiomatic use of certain generic words
is their combination with a following genitive. They
are determined or undetermined according to the
9
context, e. g. .6 he who has, possessor of (cf. § 90/),
JLo ,6 the possessor of wealth, a rich man; v^^^^^Lo
companion, owner, JJic v^^Lothe man of sense; J^l
people, UujJt J^l people of the world= worldly people;
(jdxj portion, e. g. &UJjiJ! u»d*j one, some of the
learned; Ix^ prop, change, then 'another than', as
SwJLft s Jou viJUL4i viJUQl ^:iLo the king died and another
than he reigned after him; similarly i^\ one, as
o > ' ^ ^ G "
aJOJ^I one of them; finally ^\ son,in certain common
idioms, as RjLw ^jjo^* ^1 thirty years old.
134. A special kind of genitive relation is presented
by the so-called improper annexation, by which a
participle or a verbal adjective (see § 60 &) is more
strictly limited or defined by a following genitive, as
iw^lJI ^^.AAfca^ J^s a man beautiful of countenance.
This construction is best rendered by a relative clause,
the subject of which will be the word that more clearly
defines the governing idea, in other words the genitive
of the Arabic will be the nominative of the English,
a man whose countenance is beautiful. In such a case
135, 136. THE VERBAL SENTENCE. 115
the governing word is not determined by the following
genitive; should the latter require to be determined,
it may receive the article (contrary to the rule in
§ 123) as ^yt (joliil J^JI the man of the beautiful
countenance, i. e. whose countenance is beautiful.
Chapter IV. The Simple Sentence. (§§ 135—151).
Sentences in Arabic are of two kinds, verbal and 135.
nominal.
The chief characteristic of a verhal sentence is the
fact that it always contains a finite verb ; in fact, a
verb of this kind with its inherent (subject) pronoun
is in itself a complete verbal sentence, as ool^ thou
hast struck. This type of sentence always expresses
the commencement of some activity^ understood in the
widest sense. If a special exponent of the idea con-
veyed by the subject of the verb is added, it follows
the verb in the case appropriate to the subject, viz.
the nominative, as Jo\ Ci^ he has struck, Zaid (has)
= Zaid has struck, whereby Zaid is singled out as
the agent.
In the verbal sentence, the finite verb does not 136.
always agree in gender and number with the following
8*
116 136. CONCORD EN THE VERBAL SENTENCE.
subject. The following are the chief points to be
noted in this connection:
a. The verb stands in the masculine singular before
sound or outer plurals, and generally before the masc.
forms of the dual.
b. The verb stands in the feminine singular 1) before
a sing. fern, if it follows the verb immediately, 2) be-
fore sound plurals feminine, 3) before the fern, forms
of the dual, and 4) before broken plurals (cf. next
sub-section).
c. The verb stands in the masculine or feminine singular
1) before a sing. fem. not immediately following the
verb, 2) before collectives, 3) before broken plurals
denoting male persons ; if these plurals do not imme-
diately follow the verb, the latter in most cases takes
the masc. singular form.
d. Once the subject is introduced, the verbs following
agree with it in gender and number, as JuL^* Jo; %\s^
t JU*5 idJ\ lXa^j there came Zaid, Halid and'Abdallah
and they said. After collectives also the verb, in such
a case, often takes the plural, as ifSyXjsl ^jL^JjiJI ot-«dx)
the young people set out to follow him. So too after
words like lj> and others. Still it is always possible
for the verb to remain in the singular, as (jmJv3%
137. INDEFINITE SUBJECT. 117
auwuLi J^ 0)J6* ^ n*H^* ^^^ ^^® Kuraishites
(the tribe Kuraish) imprisoned whomsoever they
could imprison.
A subject unknown, or purposely left unnamed, 137.
is treated as follows (cf. French on dit, German man
sagt) :
1) The verb is put in the 3. pers. sing, of the a.
passive (see § 103), as 2uJI^ JLLo they journey to him.
It is to be noted that this impersonal passive can
never stand without a complement (here «jJI).
2) Or in the 3. pers. plur. of the active, as j JU* h.
they said.
3) Or in the 2. pers. sing, (or plur.) of the active, c.
e. g. in the Kur'an ooKl or aJ^jKI dost thou think?
do ye think? where it is not any particular persons
that are addressed, but people in general, as much
as to say *could any one suppose that ....?' Jju one
might say (cf. Eng. 'as you might say').
4) There may be added to the verb a subject d.
w ^ ^ ^
(participle) formed from the same root, as JljU JU* or
JoUJI jLi some one said; xix* ^^yl I^K J ^^
a castle, the like of which had never been seen.
Note. The case of an undefined complement of a verbal
action being expressed by a substantive derived from the verb is
118 138. INDEFINITE SUBJ. 139. NOMINAL SENTENCE.
not unfrequently met elsewhere than in the above constmction,
e. g. UaS5 JX? aliquem (interfectum) interfecit, ^jU &«J ^^Jliw 21
they did not fear the reproof of any reprover.
138. Occasionally, out of something that has heen
mentioned, a story or the like, there arises an in-
definite subject corresponding to our "it", which is
usually expressed by the feminine of the verb; for
example, after a fable or the like, !^^x) J^IitXi, and
it (i. e. this story) passed into a proverb.
139. The nominal sentence^ in contrast to the verbal
sentence, expresses a state or condition of the subject.
This last as a rule stands at the head of the sentence
in the case appropriate to the subject, viz. the nomina-
tive ; in most cases it is determined while the predicate
is undetermined. The predicate may consist of one
or other of the following;
a) a simple noun, as jvJLi ix^v Zaid is wise;
V) a preposition and its case, as JjJt ^ J^CJi the
man is in the house;
c) an adverb, as Ll^ aJUl Ju..c 'Abdallah is here.
d) a complete sentence, which may be either a) a
verbal sentence, or p) a nominal sentence; the whole
^ -- S c^
now becomes a compound sentence. Exx.: a) sjb^ Jo\
Zaid (he) is ill; sol y^wo Jo) Zaid, his father is
140, 141. NOMINAL SENTENCE. 119
w 9 9 9^ O^
ill; P) j>w> »*j| Jo 5 Zaid, his father is aged (i. e.
Zaid's father &c.). The sentence constituting the
predicate must contain a pronoun referring back to.
the subject. The subj. thus placed at the head of
the sentence has been wrongly named the nominative
absolute.
Note. The difficulty we feel in distinguishing between ^yc
0>i3 and ^yc jjy Zaid has struck, may be explained in this way.
In the first of these two expressions it is the act of striking that
is uppermost in the speaker's mind, and the enquiry as to the
subject or agent from whom the act proceeds is answered with
Zaid, on which the logical emphasis now rests. In *^yc j.^^, on
the other hand, we start with Zaid as a given subject or agent,
and the question as to what is to be predicated regarding this
subject or as to what this agent has done is answered by ^^,
on which in its turn the logical centre of gravity, so to say,
comes to rest.
Between subject and predicate, when both are 140.
determined, there ought to stand the pronoun of the
3. person, but this rule is not always observed, as
i^i'* ^9 jJ* -
,^! ye 2JLII God is the living One. — Sometimes,
also, this pron. merely serves to emphasize the
subject.
In negative and interrogative sentences the predi- 141.
cate stands before the subject, as Jo\ Jwl where is
Zaid? ^' \jo ls3 Li ye have no helper (in which
case the subject ^I receives the addition of Jw*
120 142. NOMINAL SENTENCE.
(= French du, &c.) as strengthening the negation). In
the same way a predicate consisting of a preposition
and its noun, or of an adverb, stands before the subject
when the latter is undetermined and is not more
precisely defined by any qualifying word or phrase,
as sfl/oj sIjJI ^^ in the house is a woman; \Ji (V^x»
Ix\ among them are some who maintain.
Note. A predicate of this sort may even stand before a
determined subject, but in that case the logical emphasis is on the
subject, as 0.^3 j^**^? Zaid is with me, while in ,^JJ^ J^i; the
logical stress is on the predicate: Zaid is with me.
142. Verbal adjectives (§ 60&), in virtue of the verbal
idea inherent in them, sometimes stand as predicate
tefore the noun in the place of a finite verb, as JoC
Sy^i, 5ot C»\\ji> Zaid, his father struck Amr = Zaid's
father &c. The predicate, thus placed in advance,
frequently agrees in gender and number with its subject
following, as *^ JLi' '^y4^\ whose hearts have been
inclined (to Islam), but in respect of case it agrees
with the word on which this kind of sentence is
,9 ^ ^ --
generally dependent, as aiib^ ^ J^ jvaj with a mouth,
whose saliva is sweet; L^IJI RiJU^ vS^ ^.') ^^
found animals, the species of which differed from each
other, of different sorts. A circumstantial accusative
143, 144, 145. NOMINAL SENTENCE. 121
(§ 113 &) may also, in this way, refer to a following
subject, although it is really dependent on the preced-
ing verbs, as s^l \SS^C JoC :^l^ Zaid came, while his
father rode.
When the subject of a nominal sentence consists 143.
of a demonstrative pronoun, the latter agrees in gen-
der with the following predicate, as ibsL^ s joe this
is a female slave.
The predicate of Li not (often also that of jjlll 144.
§§ 50 and 110, and of J.li^§ 110 when occurring with a
negative) is introduced by o, as viJUUo !tV» Lo this is
no king.
In the relation of subject and predicate (cf. § 119«) 145.
may stand in Arabic:
A thing and its dimensions, as Lij. j jjv^' i>5-ii^i a. -
the pillar is thirty cubits (high).
A thing and that which it resembles, as jdjo *Ill I b. ,
IJpl selling is the likeness of (is like) usury; and so
with vj (§ 95/), which likewise may stand in any of
the three cases.
A thing and its parts, as ^Ui ^J I ^"SiJ d^ c. .
the kings of the Persians fall into four divisions.
122 146. NOM. SENT. 147. NOM. SENT. WITH 'intia, 'annc.
d. A thing and its material t\jtX-^ «jLoyi u^ojtS
ij^-^..^ i (?^»f^ one part of the toes was of iron and
another of clay.
146. In certain cases a pronoun has to be supplied as
subject of a nominal sentence, as tX^i* ^J JLiu it is
said of him "he is Muhammed", i. e. he is called
Muhammed, prop. = J^^.:^ yo.
147. The particles ^\^ {t^^V) behold, and ^| that (cf.
* § 96^), the compound particles JjCI {,^*S) never-
theless, JtliT'as if, T.^ because, and other combinations,
and also JJu perhaps, el^xl would that, are all follow-
ed by a nominal sentence the subject of which stands
in the accusative, as l^S \d^\ ^\^ behold (truly) Z.
is generous. The predicate of the nominal sentence
following Tjl or ^|, if it should consist of an adverb
or a preposition with its case (see §§ 139, 141), may
stand before the subject, which must still be in the
accusative, as I^L^"! Ll;ft ^t^ verily (only in the rarest
cases translatable) here is a man; IjG^ &*-UJI ^^ ^j^
in the citadel is a prison.
Note. Sometimes a qualifying phrase consisting of a preposi-
tion and its case appears, in addition, before the subject, as ^ ^^
&^Ui ilJJ I have a request (to make) of thee.
148. NOMINAL SENT. WITH 'wmo AND ^anfia. 123
The corroborative particle J (§ 95^) is frequently h.
prefixed to the predicate after a preceding J^l^, as
J^Lo -iJ Lib I J\l truly our father is in error; or
even to the subject, as sJjlI viJLIj ^ ^.Hruly there-
in is an example.
After the particles above mentioned, the pronoun c.
of the 3. pers. sing, masc, as the so-called pronoun
of the fact, is sometimes used as the subject of a
nominal sentence; the predicate, in this case, consists
of a complete sentence (cf. § 139^), as ^JUj ^ ^ol
^^J^\ of a truth (= the fact is), the evil-doers do
not prosper; Xy^ Li.\ (X^k^J ^ly &j ! Juo it is rela-
ted that M. had four female slaves.
While ^1 introduces a new and independent sen- 148.
"^ c ^ a.
tence, one introduced by ^1 always forms part of
another sentence, as ^^ ij^ J^ ilJl J;i *JUjw LM
wjjo knowest thou not that God is mighty over all;
here the sentence beginning with -| is really the ob-
ject. In jc4-^t iol 3 ^iJl^. iW there has never been
any doubt that he is blind, the sentence with ^| is
virtually in the genitive; in -..yi* ^u! (c^^aJLs it has
reached my ears that he is married, it represents the
subject.
124 148, SENTENCES WITH 'ttu und md.
b. Verbal sentences introduced by ^| also form in
this way an integral part of the principal sentence ; a
distinction must be made, however, between two va-
rieties of this construction. If the sentence beginning
with ^^1 asserts that something is now going on, or
that it has now ceased, the verb in the subordinate
clause remains in the indicative, as \\ \j) o4^
(or simply ^|) J^£. ^ I am surprised that he takes
the field against me, l^i'U ^\ Jl^ dJj l^jiii and
they did this until they died; if, on the other hand,
something is conceived as falling in the future and
therefore still uncertain, the subjunctive (cf. § 100)
is required, as |jo JuiAi* ^^1 dU it falls to thee to do
so, ^s^SySilS ^jo ^i)Jd ^! jc*^ ^^ ^^ ^^ ^^^ proper
that thou shouldst guard against shameful actions.
Note. Sometimes the preposition which indicates the relation
S3* O*
of the two parts of the sentence is omitted hefore ^^] and ^^\, as
«« - i a* ' .'
^^] .iJUj = ^jj2J ^j this was for the reason that, and it was so,
because &c.
c. In the cases discussed in the above sub-section
an infinitive may take the place of ^^1 with the finite
verb. Quite as frequently as ^^j in such cases, we
find Lo with the finite verb (of course always in the
149. SEVERAL PREDICATES. 150. NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 125
indicative), as Ijos ^^ U>o cyJ^r^ I am surprised
that thou hast struck Zaid = Ijov ^^yb Jwxt. The
use of this so-called infiiiitive-7w« is very common;
thus we have it in Lii^(as) — made up of <;^and Li —
with a verbal sentence: ^1^ Vr'^ ^-^^^ Vr*^ 'L^\^
was beaten as 'Amr was beaten.
When more than one predicate is required in a 149
nominal sentence, they generally follow each other
without a conjunction (cf. §§ 122, 113&, note b), as
jvjJLd laxfi^ ^1^ I am attentive and well-informed.
The same is the case with the predicates of the verb
i^li^ (which frequently occurs as the substantive verb)
and the verbs akin thereto (see § 110), as xXJUmJI ^\
^,iAx.o the kingdom will in the latter days become
mixed and a prey to dissension, and one of which
one part will be strong and another weak.
In negative verbal sentences we find Uo with the 150.
perfect, as v^^ci Lo he did not drink, or ^ with the
apocopated impf. (jussive, cf. § 101 c).
With the impf. i ndicative Lx) is used, as ^^l-oo Uo h.
126 151. EXCEPTIVE PARTICLE.
he does not drink, or ^ with the same tense \Liy^ 5^
he does not, or he will not drink.
Other uses of S are (a) with the apoc. impf. (cf.
§ 101 &) and (b) with the perfect (cf. § 98 d). As negativ-
ing an act in the past Sf can only stand before the per-
fect when two perfects come together, as S\ iVJco ^
Jco he neither believed nor prayed, or after sentences
with other negatives.
Note. A preceding negative, even in the same sentence, is
frequently resumed by means of V, as iUa-Uj V^ *i^A^I J^sv JJ lie
did not find the village nor yet his friend again.
151. After the exceptive particle ^| that which is ex-
cepted stands in the accusative when a positive sentence
precedes, as ljo\ !^l^ jj^LJI ^Ls^ the people came, ex-
cept Zaid; when a negative sentence precedes that
which is excepted is less frequently in the accusative,
but rather, as a rule, in the same case as the word
to which the limitation or exception applies, as Lo
tXj\ ^1 (•y^^ ^^ ^^^® people came not, except Zaid;
4>ov !^|^ txkb ^)vo li I passed no one except Z.5
\y^ !^II \Sj:^\ oowO Uo I have struck no one, except
'Amr. Very frequently in such cases it is the exception
that brings us the necessary logical complement, as
152. CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES. 127
JuCj if ^:y;wo L>o I have not passed (anyone) except
Zaid, i. e. I have passed only Zaid.
Note. Also in the sentence &JLJf yf 4)1 y (§ 111) there is no
God but Allah, the last word is in the nominative, because it is
the logical subject (there is no God, if not Allah; but Allah is).
In the sentence ^tJ^axJf ^JWI 4Ub y| 8^ y^ J^a. 2) there is neither
power nor strength except (in union) with Allah, the high and
mighty One, the ideas of power and strength (8y^^ J)^) ™^st
logically be supplied before the exception.
Chapter V. Compound Sentence. (§§ 152—161).
Co-ordinate sentences are as a rule joined together 152.
by a copulative particle. Thus a simple co-ordinated
sentence is usually introduced by 1 (§ 95/), as JlL5
Jli*. Jo\ Z. entered and said, o (§ 95 e), on the other
hand, is used when the connection of the two sen-
tences is less close, when, for example, the second event
follows the first only after a certain interval, as \jdJo
^•jCi Jo\ Zaid was ill; soon after he died, o, according-
ly, is often used when the subject is changed, as joC ^L^
iJ oJLfti Zaid came; and so I said to him. ".U with
a following nominal sentence expresses the motive of
the action and is to be rendered by 'then', 'therefore'.
128 153, 154. RELATIVE CLAUSES.
Note a. In lively narrative prose the connective particles
are often dispensed with, particularly when the story is told in
dialogue form, the words of each speaker being then mostly intro-
duced by a simple J^.
Note b. As illustration of the omission of the connectives
(asyndeton) must not be quoted certain combinations of two verbs
(of. § 99 note a), in which the second verb denotes rather the
end to which some more general activity is directed; such, for
example, is the imperfect with verbs denoting a beginning. In
other cases, a perfect may be made to depend on a perfect, an
imperfect on an imperfect, an imperative on an imperative, as
IjJUIaJ Iyo\3 they arose and fought with each other; V^-Ibi.! *5
arise and woo her.
Note c. Among the connective particles ^X^ may also, in
result expected in the future (§ 100), but denotes the actual
completion of an action, as in the sentence &JCo jy* ^^^ jL** he
journeyed until he alighted at Mecca = he journeyed and at last
alighted &c. In such cases ^^a. may also be followed by an imperf.
indicative or by ^^f with a nominal sentence.
153. Relative sentences or clauses are of two kinds,
those which do not accompany a noun and those
which do accompany and qualify a noun. As regards
the asyndetical connection of several qualifications,
the latter class is subject to the same treatment as
the qualifying adjuncts discussed in §§ 120 — 122.
154. Those relative sentences that do not depend on
or qualify a noun are introduced either by ^ jj| (see
§ 14 «) he that, that which, whoso, &c., which is
155. RELATIVE CLAUSES. 129
declinable and always determined, or by the indeclin-
able pronouns ^ (he that, one that, whosoever, those
that, such . . . as) and Co (that which, a thing that, what).
The former is sometimes determined, sometimes unde-
termined. Exx: xiLiliJI ^Lis'l *^ Cobb l^^aS^^ jJI
those that reject our revelations, they will be the people
of the left hand (Jo jJ! is here in the nom. as being
the subject); Luyb oJjJLi^ ,j^ dJ^W (the devil said:)
Shall I fall down before one whom thou hast formed
of clay {^ is here in the genit.) ? ^^4^!^ b jj^y^
*-gj Juj yllj Uo they speak with their mouth what
is not in their hearts (Lo is here accus.).
A relative clause is made to follow and qualify 155.
a substantive by means of {^ jJI only when the sub-
stantive in question (the antecedent) is determined'^
with it ;^tXJI agrees in gender and number, as o^wo
:^l^ (^JJI J^vJi I struck the man that came. The
explanation of this is that ^5jJI is originally not a
relative in our sense of that word, but a demonstra-
tive, and as such it is always determined. The above
sentence, for example, means, strictly speaking: I
struck that man there, he came. On the other hand
S o c i n , Arabic Grammar.* 9
130 156. RELATIVE CLAUSES.
05-
the relative clause is appended without ;c JJ! when
the antecedent is undetermined, as ^L^ '^<^) c>X-^
I struck a man who came (prop. I struck a man, he
came).
Note. ^oJI is also dispensed with when the antecedent is
only determined in a general sense (i. e. when it has the generic
article see § 118c), as (y\Am\ J^^sw ^l^scvlj JA^ like an ass that
carries hooks.
156. The relative clause, which we have seen to be
strictly speaking merely a verbal or a nominal sen-
tence subordinated to an antecedent noun, ought by
rule to contain a pronoun referring back to this an-
tecedent, as ^h. s^l j^tXil J^wl the man whose
father is rich; \d<4^ ^ZZw ^1 &J ^KS'h.Q had a son,
who was named M. (in this case the pronoun is im-
plied in the verb); Jv.j\ «j JUb J^^^ a man who is
named Z. (prop, of whom it is said: [he is] Zaid, cf.
§ 146). The pronoun which in this way points back
to the antecedent may stand in any part of the rela-
tive sentence ; thus in the sentence (ji^^l iuJI oji* Jo
Jouu jut Jwlo (^iiJl the army had come up close to
him, regarding which he thought that it was still at
a distance, it does not appear till we reach the sen-
tence which is subordinated by ^1 to the verb ^jJi:.
157. CIRCUMSTANTIAL CLAUSES. 131
Collectives which denote living creatures (cf. § 136^)
may be followed here also by a plural verb, as
Jjj^jj *Js people that believe.
Note a. The omission of the pronoun, however, is not un-
frequent, especially when it would merely consist of a suffix of
the 3. person, as »SJ3 li ^^a Camjj for 4Sl5 I regret what I said.
Note b. In certain cases the antecedent may be repeated in
the relative clause; indeed, this is the favourite construction with
jr as ^Ur iU9 X^jjo j^jj Jf ix^ ^]jj Jjjl) jJ^ ^jjlTthe (idol)
Hubal had seven arrows (for casting the lot), of which each single
arrow had writing upon it.
A special kind of subordinate sentence is the 157.
circumstantial clause. Such a clause may consist:
1) Of a nominal sentence introduced by the particle a.
y the subject of which may have been already men-
tioned or may be something quite new, as iU^j v:ioLo
iUCo ^^l ^^J^i; (^5 Amina died while she was return-
ing to Mecca; vjuLo iCol. Jo\ ^^\jo Zaid died while
his son was still young; with a compound nominal
sentence jUjtXiJI O^j^oJj) y»« ^Lw he journeyed taking
Medina as his goal. A sentence, whose predicate con-
sisting of a preposition and its case comes before
its subject, ace. to § 141, may stand as a circumstan-
tial clause, without ., as ^J^Ji (^Jo ^^(^) oo^^ I
went out with a bow in my hand.
132 158. TEMPORAL CLAUSES.
b. 2) Of a verbal sentence frequently; in this case the
imperf. either stands alone or is preceded by JU*..
When the sentence is a negative one, the negative is
y or Uo^; or the verb may stand in the apoc.impf. with
jj or jjl (as the negation of the perf.). We may
also have the perfect with JJL or jTjl?*, when negative
with Lo.; thus we get the following: dl^stj Jos :el^
Z. came laughing; ool/^ j^^ j j^^o ^Sl Jli
La^ JXI! ^xi ooub Jo^ !^L^ ^^r^^ (Zakariya)
said: how shall I have a male child, seeing my wife
is barren and I have reached too great an age; ^y^"^
jS {vi^ y ^-P^ ^® entered the room without
greeting me.
Note. In contrast to the stiflfer accusative of condition
(§ 113 b) the verbal circumstantial clause expresses the commence-
ment of the action; there is very little difference, however,
between ,ii5:u«aj ^J^ zl^ and \X^Lo *>.i^ i\s^.
158. In temporal clauses (also in conditional clauses)
■ which are formed with the particle 16 1 when, if, we find
in the protasis as well as in the apodosis the perfect
in the sense of our present or future, ^S ,^^1^ 161
x^liLo oJ6 ^^1 when John takes the thing in hand,
its difficulties are easily surmounted.
159. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 133
Noxe a. The imperfect maj'- also stand after I Jl if the action
takes place repeatedly. Should lil be followed by a compound
nominal sentence, as kl»^3u« •-oBwJf l3l when hell is heated, it is
considered that this is but another way of writing what we should
expect to find expressed in a verbal sentence (and so with ^^).
Note b. A sentence with IJf may also be inserted between
two closely related words, or rather it is to be regarded as form-
ing with its apodosis a complete unity. Thus : l»5i I JJ ^UO U^*\i
IaIx^ J there were two gates, which when they were opened
could not be shut (again). In the apodosis to IJ( a perfect is found
where we should expect an imperfect (cf. § 99c), as Ij/^J \^\ ly^
4ijoU \yff^ Ij21l9l^ Ux^ they were wont, when they captured a
man and then released him, to cut off his front lock of hair. Very
frequently a sentence like this, with I JI, is inserted between ,^Jl^
(§ 152 note c) and its proper verb, as ^loJl Ji-J fil ,_^Sik. iS-*^
isT^Jl I followed him until I overtook him as he entered the house.
Lo in the sense of 'so long as' takes the perfect, as h.
*yLw LI ou04> Lo so long as I live I shall be thankful.
In sentences containing the notion of a condition 159.
which is the case after ^\ if, ^jjo if anybody, Lo if
anything, Ulg-o whatsoever, oix^ Lo v^oj^ how, how-
soever, JOo when &c. the perf. is used in the sense
of our present or future, and so too in the apodosis,
as v^jCJbe viJU6 oJlii ^\^ if thou doest that, thou
134 160, 161. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES.
wilt perish; jQ Jl^ ^ whoso seeketh, findeth (if
any one seeks, he finds).
Note. If the perf. is meant to retain its proper force in the
protasis, the verb ^IT is placed after ^^, as jjj>o ji 4*05*5 ^\f ^J
C^jjo^ Ja^ if his camisole is torn in front, she has told the truth.
160. The particles above mentioned may also take the
apoc. impf. in protasis and apodosis alike, as Lwyai* ^j [
IJo^ *ijtXlj if ye wait patiently, God will help you.
I, The apoc. impf. also stands in the apodosis after
an imperative (with conditional force) in the protasis,
as LXJL>o ^Jo L£o (jijt live contentedly (i. e. if thou
live &c.) thou wilt be a king.
c. An apoc. impf. in the protasis may be followed by a
perfect in the apodosis, as v:i>wAib j-oaJ> jj[ i^ thou
wait patiently, thou wilt gain the victory. If the clauses
are both negative, we have 1} with the apoc. impf.,
as ^tt Ij I^Caj aJ jjI if he does not go away, I am
not satisfied.
Note. Occasionally the apodosis of a conditional sentence
^ I
is wanting, e. g. I jjfc ^ ^J if this is so— supply : then it is well
• "J
(Arab. \^).
161. Before the apodoses of conditional sentences,
other than those discussed in § 159 — 160 we find the
particle o, which is employed:
161. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 135
1) When the apodosis is a nominal sentence, as a.
a Joii c-^ (j^ if he is refractory, then alas for
him! Also before sentences with ^.t^ and before
interrogative sentences.
2) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence, of which 6.
the perfect is intended to retain its force as a perfect
(cf. § 159 note), especially, too, when Jo (cf. § 98 e)
is employed, as jyy ^\^^ \^d<j^\ JJb l^-i-Lwl jji
> ^ ^O'C ^ a ^
c^LpI viiUJli UjU if they become Moslems, then have
they come to the right way, and if they turn aside,
then thou hast but to announce the message.
3) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence that con- c.
tains an impf. with one of the particles o..**/, ijm, ^^J,
or that expresses a command or a wish, as oJi^ ^l
*-gjbl ^^ v,>JL^Li *«j ^^ if thou findst thyself among
people, milk into their pail.
APPENDIX.
COMPUTATION OF TIME.
a. Names of the Days of the Week.
In the following list the various names may also
be used with the word for day, IlS omitted.
1. t\^!^l **j (1st day) Sunday.
2. jjiII5r ^^ (2nd day) Monday.
3. feTj^SJif 1 J (3rd day) Tuesday.
4. &ljLis^| **^ (4th day) Wednesday.
5. jjjjuL«-il Ajj (5th day) Thursday.
6. xilil *1j (day of assembly) Friday.
7. c:JJUl IIj (Sabbath) Saturday.
h. Names of the Months.
Go "^
In the names of the months the word v^-w, month,
may be prefixed in the constr. state throughout;
indeed, as the following table shows, some of the
names are always so written.
COMPUTATIOX OF TIME. 137
J iS ^ 5
1. *j.^\4JI al-Muharram.
«-
2. yiua Safar.
3. J. ^1 AjOx . (^ "•■ the first Rabi'.
4. j^J^'^ /»^; - , (^ ^v- the second Rabi'.
5. (J.^lj ;^3Lii. the first Gumada.
6. Sw^^ll j^5uj^ the latter Gumada.
7. wciT* Ragab.
8. ^jUjui Sa'ban.
9. j^LiJoT Ramadan (the month of fasting),
G a - >
10. Jtj-wo Sawwal.
11. 5jJtijr^j> Du-lka'da.
12. ^1*6 Du-lhigga (month of the pilgrimage, hagg).
c. The Year.
The Moslems reckon by lunar years of 354 days ;
their first year is usually considered as beginning
at the date of the Christian era given below. In
calculating from one era to the other, it may be
reckoned that 33 eolar years are equal to 34 lunar years.
138
COMPUTATION OF TIME.
In the works of European scholars it is customary,
by means of comparative tables, to give the precise
day of our era with which each Moslem year begins
(see the Bibliography). The following short table will
be useful in helping to a rapid approximation of the
date required.
The Moslem year
1 b
egan
16. July 622 A.
D.
101
n
24. July 719 «
«
201
V)
30. July 816 V
w
301
n
7. Aug. 913 «
n
401
n
15. Aug. 1010 «
V
501
v
22. Aug. 1107 «
v
601
«
29. Aug. 1204 «
n
701
i:
6. Sept. 1301 «
r
801
n
13. Sept. 1398 «
«
901
n
21. Sept. 1495 »
«
1001
n
8. Oct. 1592 «
«
1101
v
15. Oct. 1689 «
«
1201
«
24. Oct. 1786 n
n
1301
n
2. Nov. 1883 «
V
1313
«
24. June 1895 »
n
LITERATURE.
A history of Arabic literature as a whole, or even of pai-ticular
parts of it, does not exist, for the work of Hammer-Purgstall (Litteratur-
geschichte der Araber, von ihrem Beginn bis zu Ende des zwolften
Jahrhundei-ts der Hidschret. 7 Bande. Wien 1850 — 56. 40.) must
be described as premature and as useless by reason of its numerous
mistakes. An acquaintance with Arabic literature must therefore be
got partly from works by Arabs on the history of their literature, partly
from European catalogues. In the course of the present century
numerous works, including not a few specimens of the earlier litera-
ture, have been printed in the East, especially in Cairo (government
press in Biilak), Beirut (where there is an excellent press managed
by the Jesuits) and Constantinople; also in Persia, India and the
island of Java. "We must, in particular, mention the great quantity
of valuable Arabic manuscripts that still await pubhcation both in
European and eastern libraries. A synopsis of such catalogues of
these MSS. as have hitherto appeared will be found below.
In the following selection, books of special importance are marked
with a star, those recommended to beginners with a dagger.
A. BIBLIOGRAPHY.
I. Printed Works.
a Written by Orientals.
*Kitab al-Fihrist (by Ibn abi Ydkub an-nadim; wrote in the year 377
H., beg. 3. May 987) mit Anmerkungen herausgegeben von Gicstav
Fliigel. Xach dessen Tode besorgt von Johannes Rodiger und
August Muller. 2 voll. Leipzig 1871 — 2.
*Lexicon bibliographicum et encyclopaedicum a Mustapha ben Abdallah
Katib Jelibi dicto et nomine Haji Khalfa [Haggi Halt/a f 1658)
celebrato compositum. Ad codicum Vindobonesium Parisiensium
et Berolinensis fidem primum edidit latine vertit et commentario
indicibusque instruxit Gustavus Fliigel. Leipzig-London 1835 —
1858. 7 voll. 40.
140 Literature A.
P Written by Europeans.
Bibliotheca arabica. Auctam nunc atque integram edidit D. Christianus
Fridericus de Schnurrer. Halae ad Salam 1811.
f Bibliotheca orientalis. Manuel de Bibliographie orientale. I. conte-,
nant les livres arabes, persans et turcs imprimes depuis I'invention
de I'imprimerie jusqu'a nos jours tant en Europe qu'en Orient etc.
par J. Th. Zenker. Leipzig 1846. — Bibliotheca orientalis.
Manuel de Bibliographic orientale. IL contenant 1. supplement
du premier volume. 2. Litterature de I'Orient chretien. 3. Litte-
rature de I'Inde etc. Par J. Th. Zenker. Leipzig 1861.
t(Eutin^) Katalog der kaiserlichen Universitats- und Landesbibliothek
in Strassburg. Arabiscbe Litteratur. Strassburg 1877. 4^,
Bibliographic des ouvrages arabes ou relatifs aux Arabes publies dans
I'Europe chretienne de 1810 a 1885 par Victor Chauvin. I. Pre-
face. — Table de Schnurrer. — Les Proverbes. Liege 1892
(is being continued).
Wissenschaftlicher Jahresbericht iiber die morgenlandischen Studien,
von 1844 an in Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen
Gesellschaft Leipzig 1847 ff. The annual reports on works
published up to 1858 appeared in the Zeitschrift, those for the
years 1859—61, 62 — 67 (one part), autumn 1877 — 81 appeared
as independent publications.
Bibliotheca orientalis oder eine vollstandige Liste der im Jahre 1876
in Deutschland, Frankreich, England und den Colonien erschie-
nenen Biicher, Broschiiren, Zeitschriften, u. s. w. iiber die Sprachen,
Keligionen, Antiquitaten, Literaturen, Geschichte und Geographic
des Ostens, zusammengestellt von Karl Friederici. Leipzig.
8 years (to 1883).
Bibliography for 1883 — 85 (not completed) in the Literatur-Blatt fiir
orient alische Philologie unter Mitwirkung von Dr. Johannes
Klatt herausgegeben von Prof. Dr. Ernst Kuhn. 1883 — 85.
*Orientalische Bibliograpbie . . . herausgegeben von A. Muller, now
E. Kuhn. Berlin 1888 ff.
Katalog der Bibliothek der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft.
I. Druckschriften und Ahnliches. Leipzig 1880 (a new and
largely augmented edition will appear in a year or two).
A. G. Ellis, Catalogue of the Arabic books in the British Museum
Vol L A-L. London 1894.
For works from oriental presses an important guide is: E. J. Brill,
Catalogue periodique de livres orientaux I — IX, Leide 1883 ff.
(To parts I — VII Index de noms d'auteurs et de noms de livres,
ib. 1889).
Literature A. 141
II. Manuscripts.
(Die Handschriftenverzeichnisse der koniglichen Bibliothek in Ber-
lin. Vols. 7 ff.). Yerzeichniss der arabischen Handschriften
von W. Ahlwardt. 40. 1. Band. Berlin 1887; 2. Bd. 1889;
3. Bd. 1891; 4. Bd. 1892; 5. Bd. 1893; 6. Bd. 1894. A 7th
and last vol. will appear soon.
(Halle) Katalog der Bibliothek der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Ge-
sellschaft. II. Handschriften u. s. w. Leipzig 1881.
Verzeichnis der orientalischen Handschriften der Bibliothek des
Halle'schen Waisenhauses von Fr. Aug. Arnold und August
Miiller. (Programm der Lateinischen Hauptschule). Halle
1876. 40.
(University Library, Leipzig) Die Refaiya. Von Prof. Fleischer:
Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft. 8,
S. 573—584.
(Municipal Library in Leipzig) Catalogus librorum manuscriptorum,
qui in bibliotheca senatoria civitatis Lipsiensis asservantur, ed.
Naumann. Codices orientalium linguanim descripserunt H. O.
Fleischer et Fr. Delitzsch. Grimmae 1838. 40.
Catalogus codicum manuscriptorum orientalium Bibliothecae regiae
Dresdensis, Scripsit et indicibus instruxit H. 0. Fleischer.
Lipsiae 1831. 4^.
Die arabischen Handschriften der herzoglichen Bibliothek zu Qotha.
Yerzeichnet von Wil helm Pertsch. 5 Band e. Gotha 1878— 1892.
(Also w. the title: Die orientalischen Handschriften der h. B.
zu G. Dritter Theil).
Die arabischen Handschriften der K. Hof- und Staatsbibhothek in
Miinchen, heschriehen von Joseph Anmer. Miinchen 1866. (Cata-
logus codicum manuscriptorum Bibliothecae regiae Monacensis.
Tomi primi pars secunda.)
(Tubingen University Library) Catalog arabischer Handschriften in
Damaskus gesammelt von J. G. Wetzstein. Berlin 1863.
Catalogus librorum manuscriptorum orientalium in bibliotheca aca-
demica Bonnensi servatorum adornavit Joannes Gildemeister.
Bonnae 1864—1876. 40.
Katalog der hebraischen, arabischen, persischen und tiirkischen Hand-
schriften der kaiserlichen Universitats- und Landesbibliothek zu
Strassburg. Bearbeitet von S. Landauer. Strassburg 1881. 4^.
Die arabischen, persischen und tiirkischen Handschriften der kaiser-
lich-koniglichen Hofbibliothek zu Wien. Von Gustav Fliigel.
3 Bande. Wien 1865—7. 4^.
(Copenhagen) Codices orientales Bibliothecae regiae Havniensis enu-
merati et descripti a N. L. Westergaard etc. II. Codices hebr.
et arab. Hafniae 1851.
142 Literature A.
Codices Orientales bibliothecae regiae universitatis Lundensis recensuit
Carolus Johannes Tornberg. Lundae 1850.
Codices Arabici, Persici et Turcici bibliothecae regiae universitatis
TJpsaliensis. Disposuit et descripsit C. T. Tornberg. Upsaliae
1849. 40.
(Paris) Catalogue des manuscrits arabes de la Bibliotheque Nationale
par le Baron de Slane. Pr. Fascicule. Paris 1883. Sec. Ease.
1889. Trois. Fasc. 1895. 40. (To be continued.)
Catalogue general des manuscrits des bibliotheques publiques de
France. DepartementS, Tome VI (p. 437 — 482). Marseille. Par
M. I'abbe Albanes. Paris 1892. — Tome XVIII. Alger. Par
E. Fay nan. Paris 1893.
[Leide) Catalogus codicum orientalium Bibliothecae academiae Lugduno
Batavae I. II. auctore B. P. A. Dozy. III. IV. auct. P. de Jong
et M. J. de Goeje. V. auctore M. J. de Goeje. VI. auctore
M. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni Bavatorum 1861 — 77. — Editio se-
cunda. Vol. I auctoribus M. J. de Goeje et M. Th. Houtsma.
Lugduni Bat. 1888.
{London) Catalogus codicum manuscriptorum orientalium qui in Museo
Britannico asservantur. Pars secunda codices arabicos amplectens.
Londini 1846. fol.
[London) Supplement to the Catalogue of the Arabic manuscripts in the
British Museum (By Charles Bieu). London 1894, 40.
[London) A catalogue of the Arabic manuscripts in the library of the
India Office. By Otto Loth. London 1877. 40.
( Oxford) Bibliothecae Bodleianae codicum manuscriptorum orientalium,
videlicet hebraicorum, chaldaicorum, syriacorum, aethiopicorum,
arabicorum, persicorum, turcicorum, copticorumque catalogus a
Joanne Vri confectus. Pars Prima Oxonii 1787. — Partis se-
cundae volumen primum arabicos complectens confecit Alexander
Nicoll. Oxonii 1821. fol.
[Cambridge) Catalogus Bibliothecae Burckhardtianae cum appendice
librorum aliorum orientalium in Bibliotheca Academica Canta-
brigensitis asservatorum — confecit T. Preston. Cantabrigiae
1853. 4«.
Catalogue of the Oriental Manuscripts in the Library of King's Col-
lege, Cambridge. By Edward Henry Palmer: Journal of the
Koy. As. Society of Gr. Britain and Ireland. New Series III.
105 ff.
A descriptive Catalogue of the Arabic, Persian and Turkish Manu-
scripts in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge. By E. H.
Palmer. Cambridge and London 1870.
{Escurial) Bibliotheca arabico-hispana Escurialensi sive Librorum
omnium Mss. quos Arabics ab auctoribus magnam partem Arabo-
Hispanis composites Bibliotheca CoenobiiEscurialensis complectitur
LiTEPwATURE A. 143
recensio et explanatio opera et studio Michaelis Casiri etc. 2 tomi.
Matriti 1760. fol. — Les manuscrits arabes de I'Escurial decrits par
Hartwig Derenhourg. Tome premier. Paris 1884.
Catalogo de los Manuscritos drabes existentes en la Biblioteca Na-
cional de Madrid [F. G. Eobles). Madrid 1889.
(Florence) Bibliothecae Mediceae Laurentianae et Palatinae Codicum
manuscriptorum orientalium catalogus, Steph. Evod. Assemanus
recensuit. Florentiae 1742. fol.
(Venice) Catalogo dei Codici manoscritti orientali della Biblioteca
Naniana, compilato dell' abbate Simone Assemani, 2 Part. Pa-
dova 1787—1792. 40.
Remarques sur les manuscrits orientaux de la Collection Marsigli a
Bologne suivies de la liste complete des Manuscrits arabes de
la meme collection par le Baron Victor Rosen. Roma 1885 (atti
della R. Academia dei Lincei. Serie 3^ Vol. XII).
(Milan) Catalogo dei Codici arabi, persiani e turchi della Biblioteca
Ambrosiana (Hammer-Purgstall): Biblioteca Italiana t. XCIV,
pp. 22 and 322.
Cataloghi dei codici orientali di alcune biblioteche d'ltalia. 5 fasc.
Firenze 1878—1892.
Catalogue des manuscripts et xylographes orientaux de la Biblioth^que
Imperiale publique de St. Petersbourg. St. Petersbourg 1852.
(St. Petersburg) B. Dorn, Catalogue des ouvrages arabes, persans et turcs,
publies a Constantinople, en Egypte et en Perse, qui se trouvent au
Musee asiatique de 1' Academic. — Chronologisches Verzeichniss der
seit dem Jahre 1801 bis 1866 in Kasan gedruckten arabischen,
tiirkischen, tatarischen und persischen Werke, als Katalog der in
dem asiatischen Museum befindlichen Schriften: Melanges asia-
tiques tires du Bulletin de I'Academie Imperiale des sciences de
St. Petersbourg. Tome V. Livr. 5. St. Petersbourg 1867.
(St. Petersburg) Notices sommaires des manuscrits arabes du Musee
asiatique par le Baron Victor Rosen. St. Petersbourg 1881.
(St. Petersburg) Les manuscrits arabes de I'lnstitut des langues orien-
tales decrits par le Baron Victor Rosen. St. Petersbourg 1877.
(J. M. E. Gottwald) description of the Arabic Manuscripts in the
Library of the Imperial University of Kasan. Kasan (no date)
[1885]. In Russian.
(Cairo) Fihrist al-kutub al-'arabiya al-mahfiiza bil-kutubhana al-hedl-
wiye el-ka'ine biserai derb al-gamamiz. (Under the management
of Spitta and Vollers.) 7 vols. Cairo 1301—1308. Second
Edition. Vol. I 1310.
Catalog der mektebe 'umumiye in Damascus. Damascus 1299. 40.
Studia Sinaitica No. III. Catalogue of the Arabic Mss. in the Convent
of S. Catharine on Mount Sinai compiled by Margaret Dunlop
Gibson. London 1894.
144 Literature B, C.
(Batavia) FriedricJi, Codicum arabicorum in Bibliotheca Societatis
Artium et Scientiarum quae Bataviae floret asservatorum Catalogus.
Absolvit indicibusque instruxit L. W, C. van den Berg, Bataviae
et Hagae 1873.
B. INTRODUCTION.
G-eneral.
Borhan-ed-diui es-Sernudji (as-Sarnugi lived at the and of the 12tli
century of our era) Enchiridion studiosi. Arabice edidit latine vertit
et lexico explanavit Carolus Caspari. Praefatus est H. 0. Flei-
scher. Lipsiae 1838. 40.
Einleitung in das Studium der Arabischen Sprache bis Mohammed
und zum Theil spater . . . von G. W. Freytag. Bonn 1861.
Orientalische Skizzen. Von Theodor NoIdeJce. Berlin 1892. Trans-
lated, with the title 'Sketches form Eastern History' by J. S. Black.
London and Edinburgh 1892.
De auctorum graecorum versionibus et commentariis syriacis, arabicis,
armeniacis persicisque commentatio quam scripsit Joannes Georgius
Weiirich. Lipsiae 1842. 1845.
C. CHRESTOMATHIES.
*f i2. Briinnow, Chrestomathy of Arabic Prose-Pieces. Berlin and Lon-
don 1895.
f Chrestomatia arabica quam e libris Mss. vel impressis rarioribus
coUectam edidit Fr. A. Arnold. Pars I. Textum continens. Pars II.
Glossarium continens. Halis 1853.
|Chrestomathie Arabe, ou extraits de divers ecrivains Arabes, tant en
prose qu'en vers a I'usage des eleves de I'eeole speciale des langues
orientales vivantes ; par A. J. Sylvestre de Sacy. II. ed. corr. et
augm. Paris 1826. 3 vol.; Tome IV Anthologie grammaticale
arabe. Paris 1829.
f Chrestomathie elementaire de I'Arabe litteral avec un glossau'e par
H. Derenhourg et J. Spiro. 2 ed. Paris 1892.
Joh. Godofr. Lud. Kosegartenii Chrestomathia arabica ex codicibus
manuscriptis Paris. Goth, et Berol. coUecta atque tum adscriptis
vocalibus, cum additis lexico et adnotationibus explanata. Lip-
siae 1828.
Georg. Guil. Freytag^ Chrestomathia arabica, grammatica historica in
usum scholarum Arabicarum ex codd. ineditis conscripta. 80maj.
Bonnae 1834.
Literature D. 145
f Thier und Mensch vor dem Konig der Genien. Ein arabisches Mahr-
chen aus den Schriften der lauteren Briider ia Basra im Urtext
herausgegeben von Fr. Dieterici. 2. Ausgabe. Leipzig 1881. —
Arabisch-deutsches Worterbuch zum Koran und Tliier und Mensch
von Fr. Dieterici. 2. Aufl. Leipzig 1894.
Brevis chrestomathia arabiea. In usura scholarum ed. Joh. Bollig,
Koma 1881.
Chrestomatia arabigo-espanola por Fr. J. Lerchundi y Fr. J. Simonet,
Granada 1881.
Girgas and de Rosen. Arabic Chrestomathy (in Russian). St. Peters-
burg 1875. 1876. — Dictionary to the Chrestomathy and to the
Koran by W. Girgas. Kasan 1881 (in Russian).
An Arabic reading-book compiled by W. Wright. Part first, The texts.
London 1870.
Magani el-adab fi hadaik el-'arab. 6. Ed. Beirut 18 85 if. Jesuit Press.
6 vols. Sarh magani el-adab (Notes &c.). 4 vols. ib. 1886 — 8.
D. GRAMMARS &g.
a Written by Orientals.
*al-Muzhir fi 'ulurn el-luga, philological Encyclopaedia by Galal
ad-din as-SuyUtz (f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505, cf. for as-
Sujiiti Goldziher in den Sitzungsber. d. kais. Akademie der
Wiss.' zu Wien. Phil.-histor. 01. LXIX. Bd. 1. S. 7 ff.) Bulak
1282.
*Le livre de Sibawaihi, traits de grammaire arabe par Sibouya, dit
SUawaihi (f 180 H., beg. 16. March 796). Texte arabe public
d'apres les manuscrits du Caire, de I'Escurial, d'Oxford, de
Paris, de St. Petersbourg et de Vienne par Hartwig Derenbourg.
Tome I, Paris 1881. Tome II, Paris 1889. — SlbawaihVs Bach
iiber die Grammatik nach der Ausgabe von H. Derenbourg und
dem Commentar des Siraii iibersetzt und erklart . . . von G. Jahn.
1.— 8. Lieferung. Berlin 1894. 1895.
*AI-Mufassal, opus de re grammatica arabicum auctore Abu '1-Kasim
Mahmiid bin 'Omar Zamahsario (az-Zamah§ari f 538 H. , beg.
16. July 1143) ed. J. P. Broch. Editio altera^ Christianiae 1879.—
Also: Ibn JaU (f 643 H., beg. 29. May 1245) Commentar zu
Zamachsari's Mufassal. Nach den Handschriften herausgeg.
u. s. w. von Dr. G. Jahn. Erster Band. Leipzig, 1882. Zweiter
Band. Leipzig 1886. 40.
*Alfijjah, Carmen didacticum grammaticum auctore Ibn Malik (f 672 H.,
beg. 18. July 1273) et in Alfijjam commentarius quem conscripsit
Ibn Akil {Ibn 'AkU f 769 H., beg. 28. Aug. 1367) ed. Fr. Dieterici.
Lipsiae 1851. — Ibn 'AkTl's Commentar zur Alfijja des Ibn Malik
Socin, Arabic Grammar.* 10
146 Literature D.
aus dem Arabischen zum ersten male iibersetzt von Fr, Dieterici.
Berlin 1852.
al-Agurrumiyya, Arabic Grrammar hy Ibn Agurrum as-Sinhagi (f 723 H.,
beg. 10. January 1323). Often printed with and without Com-
mentaries, Cf. E. Trumpp, Einleitung in das Studium der
arabischen Grrammatiken. Die Ajrummiyyah des Muhammad bin
Daud. Miinchen 1876. On this work see Fleischer in Zeitschrift
der D. Morgenl. Ges. 30 (1876), pp. 487—513; reprinted in
Kleinere Schriften II (Leipzig 1888), pp. 75—106. Text also
printed in Briinnow's Chrestomathy.
Kafiya iin-nahu, Syntax by Ibn al-Hdgib (f 646 H., beg. 26. April
1248). Frequently printed in the East. ^
Mugni al-labib, Grammar composed by Ib7i Sibarn al-Ansari (f 762 H.,
beg. 11. Nov. 1360). Another grammatical work by the same
author bears the title: Katar an-nada wa-ball as-sada; a third
Sudur ad-dahab. All three works have been frequently printed
in the East.
al-HarirVs (f 516 H., beg. 16. July 1143)Durrat al-gawwas, heraus-
gegeben von Heinrich Thorbecke. Leipzig 1871. (On errors of
speech). With the commentary of al-Hafagi, Constantinople 1299.
Cf. Le livre des locutions vicieuses de Djawaliki publie par
Hartwiff Derenbourg (al-Gawaliki f 465 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1072)
in Morgenlandische Forschungen. Leipzig 1875.
Tarika mustahdata fi tashil al-hatt al-arabi. Calligraphic models
i2 parts. Beirut 1891.
P Written by Europeans.
*Die grammatischen Schulen der Araber nach den Quellen bearbeitet
von G. Flugel. Erste Abthl. Leipzig 1862. Abhandlungen der
Deutschen Morgenl. Ges. II. Band. Nr 4. (This work gives
a list of grammarians to about the year 1000 of our era).
f Dr. C. P. Caspari's Arabische Grammatik. Fiinfte Auflage be-
arbeitet von August Midler. Halle 1887. — Grammaire arabe de
C. P. Caspari traduite de la quatrieme edition allemande et en
partie remaniee par E. Uricoechea. Bruxelles 1880. — A Grammar
of the Arabic Language translated from the German of Caspai-i
and edited, with numerous additions and corrections by W. Wright.
2. ed. 2 vol. London 1874 — 5. A 3i'd edit, is announced.
Geo. Henric. Aug. Ewald. Grammatica critica linguae arabicae cum
brevi metrorum dootrina. Lipsiae 1831 — 1833. II vol.
*Grammaire arabe a I'usage des eleves de I'ecole speciale des langues
orientales vivantes; avec figures. Par M. le Bon Silvestre de
Sacy. Seconde edition, corrigee et augmentee, a laquelle on a
joint un traite de la prosodie et de la metrique des Arabes. 2 tom.
Paris 1831. — Yery important notes and corrections will be found in
Literature E. 147
"^Fleischer, „Beitrage zur arabischen Sprachkunde": Berichte iiber die
Verhandlungen der kgl. sachsischen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften
zu Leipzig. Philologisch-historische Classe. 1863 (p. 93 ff.); 1864
(p. 265ff.); 1866 (p. 286 ff.); 1870 (p. 227 ff.); 1874 (p. 71ff.); 1876
(p. 44ff.); 1878 (p. 64ff.); 1880 (p. 89ff.); 1881 (p. 117ff.); 1883
(p. 72ff.); 1884 (p. 272 fif.); conf. 1856 (p. Iff.); 1862 (p. 10 ff.)
Reprinted in Kleinere Schriften von Dr. H. L. Fleischer, vol. I,
I8t. and 2iid. parts, Leipzig 1886; thetwolastarticlesinvol.il,
part 1, Leipzig 1888.
/. G. L. Kosegarten. Grammatica linguae arabicae pp. 1 — 688, without
title and date, incomplete. (Very rare).
Mortimer Sloper Howell. A Grammar of the Classical Arabic Language,
translated and compiled from the Works of the most Approved
Native or Naturalized Authorities. Published under the Authority
of the Government of the N.-W. Provinces. In an Introduction
and Four Parts. 3 vols. Allahabad 1880. 1883. 1886.
Grammaire arabe composee d'apres les sources primitives par le
P. Donat Vernier, S. J. Tome I. Beyrouth 1891 ; TomelL 1892.
Darstellung der arabischen Verskunst mit sechs Anhangen u. s. w. nach
handschriftlichen Quellen bearbeitet und mit Registem versehen
von (?. W. Freytag. Bonn 1830.
Theorie nouvelle de la m^trique arabe precedee de considerations
generales sur le rythme naturel du langage par M. Stanislas
Guyard. Paris 1875 (Extrait du Journal as. 7 ser., t. 7. 8).
Die Rhetorik der Araber nach den wichtigsten Quellen dargestellt und
mit angefiihrten Textausziigen nebst einem literaturgeschichtlichen
Anhang versehen von Dr. A. F. Mehren. Kopenhagen 1853.
E. DICTIONARIES.
a Written by Orientals.
*Sahah al-'arabiyye (or as-Sahah) by al-Q-auharl (Abii Nasr Isma il ibn
' 'Hammad f 393 H., beg. 10." Nov. 1002). 2 vols. Bulak 1282. 40.
Lisan al-'arab by al-Mukarram (Ibn Manziir al-Ifriki al-Misrl al-Ansari
al-Hazragif 711 H., beg. 13. May 1311). 20 vols. 40." Cairo 1308.
*al-Kamus al-muhit (or al-Kamus) by al-Firuzdhddi (f 816 or
'817 H. = 1413/4). 2 vols. Calcutta 1817; 4 vols. Bulak 1279.
40. id. 1301/2. — With Turkish Commentary 3 vols. Stambul
1272 and later. — ♦Commentary to the Kamiis with the title
Tag-el-* ariis composed by Sayyid Murtadd az-Zubaidi (f 1205 H.,
beg. 10 Sept. 1790). 10 vols^ Caii'O 1307.
Muhit al-muhit by Butrus al-Bistdni. 2 vols. Beirut 1286. (1869/70).
an-Nihaya fi garib al-liadit by Ihn al-Atlr (f 606 H., beg. 6. July
1209). 4 vols. Cairo 1311 (Dictionary to the Traditions)
148 Literature E.
Asas al-balaga (Lexicographical Work, dealing esp. with the meta-
phorical meanings of words) bj^ az-Zamahsarl (f 538 H., beg.
16. July 1143). 2 vols. Bulak 1299.
Fikh al-luga, Synonyms by at-Tddlihi (f 429 H., beg. 14. Oct.
1037). (Frequently reprinted; esp. in an expurgated edition
Beirut 1888). Cf. Fleischer, Kleinere Schriften III, 152.
'lalahs (t 291 H, = 904) kitab al-Fasih. Nach den Handschriften
von Leiden, Berlin und Rom herausgegeben, mit kritischen und
erlauternden Noten versehen von Dr. J. Barth. Leipzig 1876.
*GaWaliki's al-Mu'arrab (a work on Arabic! loan-words, by al-Gawdllki
t 465 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1072). Nach der Leydener Handschrift
mit Erlauterungen herausgegeben von Ed. Sachau. Leipzig
1867. Cf. Z. d. D. Morg. Ges. 33, 208.
Liber as-Sojutii (f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505) de nominibus' relativis,
inscriptus Lubb al-lubab, arab. cum annot. crit. ed. P. J. Veth.
1—3. Lugduni Bat. 1840—51. 40.
*Al-Moschtabih auctore Schamso'ddin Abu Abdallah Mohammed ibn
Ahmed ad-Dhababi (ad-Dahabi f 748 H., beg. 13. April 1347).
E codd. mss. editus a P. de Jong. Lugduni Batav. 1881. (On
homonym proper names).
Kitabo-'l-adhdad sive liber de vocabulis arabicis quae plures habent
significationes inter se oppositas auctore Abu Bekr ibno-'l-Anbdri
(t 328 H., beg. 18. Oct. 939) ed. 31. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni
Bat. 1881.
[3 Written by Europeans.
■\Q. W. Freytag, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum praesertim ex Djeuharii
Firuzabadiique et aliorum libris confe'ctum. Accedit index vocum
latinorum locupletissimus. IV. Tomi. Hal. 1830 — 1837. 40maj.
Q. W. Freytag, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum ex opere suo majore in
usum tironum excerptum edidit. Halis 1836. 40 maj.
*Maddu-l-Kamoos, an Arabic-English Lexicon derived from the best
and the most copious eastern sources comprising a very large
collection of words and significations omitted in the Kamoos,
with supplements to its abridged and defective explanations,
ample grammatical and critical comments, and examples in prose
and verse: composed by means of the munificence of the most
noble Algernon, Duke of Northumberland and the bounty
of the British Government: by Edward William Lane. In two
books: the first containing all the classical words and significa-
tions commonly known to the learned among the Arabs; the
second, those that are of rare occurrence and not commonly
known. Book I, Parts 1—5. London 1863—1874. Ed. by
Stanley Lane Poole, Parts 6—8 (and Supplement) 1877—1893.
Literature E, 149
(From the letter k onwards, the book is incomplete; its continua-
tion is not to be expected.)
* Supplement aux dictionnaires arabes par B. Dozy. 2 torn. Leyde
1881. — Cf. Fleischer, Studien iiber Dozy's Supplement: Be-
richte iiber die Verhandlungen der kgl. sachs. Ges. d. Wiss. zu
Leipzig. Philol.-histor. Classe 1881 — 1887. Reprinted in Kleinere
Schriften von H. L. Fleischer. Vol. II, pt. 1. Leipzig 1888.
Vol. Ill id.
A. Kazimirski de Biberstein, Dictionnaiie arabe-franQais I. II. Paiis
1860.
fJ.. Wahrmund. Handworterbuch der deutschen und neu-arabischen
Sprache. I. Neuarabisch-deutscher Theil I, 1. 2. II, 1. 2. —
II. Deutsch-neuarabischer Theil. Giessen 1870 — 77.
F. Steinffass, The Student's Arabic-English Dictionary. London 1884.
H. Anthony Salmone, An Arabic-English Dictionary on a new System.
2 vols. Vol. I Arabic- English ; vol. II English Index. London 1890.
fArabic-English Dictionary by the late William Thomson Wortabet.
Second edition, revised and enlarged, Beyrout 1893.
George Percy Badger, English- Arabic Lexicon. London 1881.
F. Steingass, English-Arabic Dictionary for the use of both Travellers
and Students. London 1882.
English- Arabic Dictionary by Mr. /. Abcarius. New edition revised
and enlarged. Beyrout 1894.
fVocabulaire arabe-fran^ais a I'usage des ^tudiants par un p^re mis-
sionnaire de la Cie de Jesus; 3. ed. Beyrouth 1893. (Arab.: al-
Faraid ad-durrij'e.)
Dictionnaire frangais-arabe par le P. J.-B. Belot, S. J. 2 parties.
Beyrouth 1890.
*Die aramaischen Fremdworter im Arabischen. Von Siegmund Frdnkel.
Leiden 1886.
Dictionnaire detaille des noms des vetements chez les Arabes. Par
B. Dozy. Amsterdam 1845.
Die Namen der Saugethiere bei den siidsenaitischen Volkern. Von
Fritz Hommel. Leipzig 1879.
Die Waffen der alten Araber aus ihren Dichtern dargestellt. Ein
Beitrag zur arabischen Alterthumskunde, Synonymik und Lexi-
cographie nebst Registern von Friedrich Wilhelm Schwarzlose.
Leipzig 1886.
*Glossaire des mots espagnols et portugais derives de I'Arabe par
B. Dozy et W. H. Engelmann. 2. ed. Leyde 1869.
Glossario etimologico de ]as palabras espanolas de on'gen oriental por
D. Leopoldo de Eguilaz y Yanguas. Granada 1886.
Dictionnaire etymologique des mots fian^ais d'origine orientale par
Marcel Devic. Paris 1876. — Cf. Eemarques sur les mots
frangais derives de I'Arabe par Henri Lammens. Beyrouth 1890.
1 50 Literature F.
F. KORAN, ISLAM, LIFE OF MUHAMMED.
CHRISTIANITY.
a Written hy Orientals.
Al-Coranus seu Lex islamitica Muhammedis filii Abdallae Pseudo-
proj)hetae edita ex museo Ahrahami Hinckelmanni. Hamburg!
1694.
Alcorani textus universus summa fide atque pulcherrimis characteribus
descriptus, in latinum translatus, oppositis notis, auctore Ludovico
Marracio. Patavii 1698 fol.
fCorani textus arabicus ad fidem librorum manuscriptorum et impres-
sorum et ad praecipuorum interpretum lectiones et auctoritatem
recensuit indicesque triginta sectionum et suratarum addidit
Gustavus Flilgel. Editio stereotypa C. Tauchnitzii. Tertium
emendata; nova impressio Lipsiae 1869 (I. 1834; recensionis
Fliigelianae textum recognitum iterum exprimi curavit Gustavus
Mauritius Bedslob, Lipsiae 1837). (In Fliigel's first edition and
in numerous oriental editions of the Koran, the enumeration of
the verses, which is indispensable for reference, is wanting).
*Concordantiae Corani arabicae. Ad literarum ordinem et verborum
radices diligenter disposuit Gtcstavus Flugel. Editio stereotypa,
Lipsiae 1842.
Chrestomathia Corani arabica, notas adjecit glossarium confecit C. A,
Nallino. Lipsiae 1893.
al-Itkdn fi 'uliim al-kur'an, a sort of introduction to the Koran by
'as-Suyuti (f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505); 2 pts. Cairo 1278. —
Sayuty's Itqan on the exegetic sciences of the Qoran. Edited by
Mowlawies Basheerooddeen and Noorool-Haqq with an analysis by
A. Sprenger. Calcutta 1852—54.
al-Kassdf. Commentary on the Koran by az-Zamahsarl (f 538 H.,
beg. 16. July 1143). 2 vols. Bulak 1281. — The Qoran with
the commentarj^ of Zamakhshari entitled the Kashshaf, an haqaiq
al-tanzil, ed. by W. Nassau Lees and Khadim Hosain and 'Abd
al-Hayi. Calcutta 1856.
*Beidhawn (f 685 H., beg. 27. Febr. 1286; or 692) commentarius in
Coranum ex codd. Parisiensibus Dresdensibus et Lipsiensibus edidit
indicibusque instruxit H. 0. Fleischer. 2 vol. Lipsiae 1846 — 48.
40, — Indices ad Beidhawii commentarium in Coranum confecit
Winand Fell. Leipzig 1878.
Chrestomathia Baidawiana. The commentary of El-Baidawi on Sura
III trans, and expld. . . . hy D. S. Margoliouth. London 1895.
*Le Becueil des traditions musulmanes par Abou Abdallah ibn Ismail
al-Bokhari {al-Buhdri f 257 H., beg. 29. Nov. 870) pubUe par
Literature F. 151
L. Krehl. I —III. Leyde 1862 — 68 (incomplete). — Oriental
edition: Sahih al-Buhari. 8 vols. Cairo 1290; also frequently
elsewhere, with and without commentary.
Sahih Muslim. Collection of the Traditions of the Prophet, composed
by Muslim (f 261 H., beg. 16. Oct. 874). With commentary by
an-Nawawi (f 676 H., beg. 4. Juni 1277). 5 vols. Cairo 1283.
Masabili as-sunna, composed by Husain ibn Mas'iid al-Farra al-Ba-
' gaicl (t 516 H., beg. 12. March 1122). 2 vols. Cairo 1294.
Ihya al-'ulum, by al-Gazali (f 505 H., beg. 10. JuH 1111). 4 vols.
40. Bulak 1289. — (Cf. Eichard Gosche, Uber Ghazzalis Leben
und Werke: Abhdl. d. kgl. Akad. d. Wiss. zu Berlin 1858).
' Ahdu-r-razzdg^ s Dictionary of the technical terms of the Sufies edited
by Aloys Sprenger. Calcutta 1845.
*Das Leben Muhammeds nach Muhammed ibn Ishdk (f 151 H., beg.
26. Jan. 768) bearbeitet von 'Abd el-Malik ibuHischdm (f 218 H.,
beg. 27. Jan. 833); hrsg. von 2^. Wustenfeld. 2 Bande. Gottingen
1858 — 60. Oriental edition ; Si rat ibn His am. 2 vols. Cairo 1295.
(Translated into German: Das Leben Muhammeds u. s. w. be-
arbeitet von G. Weil. Stuttgart 1864).
Muhammed in Medina. Das ist Vakidi's (al-Wdkidi f 207 H., beg.
27. May 822) Kitab al-Maghazi in verkiirzter deutscher Wieder-
gabe herausgegeben von J. Wellhausen. Berlin 1882.
Sama'il at-Tirmi^i (f 279 H., beg. 3. April 892) Traditions respecting
the Prophet. Cairo 1273; with commentary 2 vols. Bulak 1296.
Usd al-gaba. List of 7500 persons who knew Muhammed, drawn
up by Ibn al-Atir (f 630 H., beg. 18. Oct. 1 232). 5 vols. Cairo 1286.
al-Isabe, A biographical dictionary of persons who knew Muhammed
'by Ibn Hagar (Ibn Bagar f 852 H., beg. 7. March 1448). Edited
in Arabic by Mowlawies Mohammed "VVajyh, *Abdal-Haqq, and
Gholam Qadir and A. Sprenger. Bibliotheca Indica. Vol. I, Cal-
cutta 1856; vol. IV, Calcutta 1873. Vol. II, fasc. 1—13; vol. Ill,
fasc. 1 — 15.
Kisas al-'anbiya (Legends of the Prophet), by at-Ta'labi (f 427 H.,
beg. 5. Nov. 1035). Cairo 1297 and often.
Pillar of the creed of the Sunnites by al-Nasafi, ed. by W. Cvreton.
London 1843.
Ad-dourra al-fakhira: la perle precieuse de Ghazali [al-Gazdll f 505 H.,
beg. 10. July 1111) par L. Oautier. Geneve 1878. — Muslim
Eschatology.
Muhammedanische Eschatologie nach der Leipziger u. Dresdner Hand-
schrift zum ersten Male arabisch und deutsch herausgegeben von
M. Wolff. Leipzig 1872.
Disputatio pro religione Mohammedanorum adversus Christianos
Textum arabicum (composed 942 H. = 1535) e codice Leidensi
cum varr. lect. edidit F. J. van den Ham. Lugduni Bat. 1890.
152 Literature F.
Book of religious and philosophical sects by Muhammed al-Shahra-
stdni {a^-Sahrastdni f 528 H., beg. 29. March 1153). Now first
edited by W. Cureton. 2 vol. London 1846. — Abu-'l-Fatli
Muhammad asch-Schahrastani's Religionsparteien und Philo-
sophenschulen. Aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt mit Anmerkungen
von Th. Haarbrucker. 2 Bande. Halle 1850 — 1.
* {Bible) Kitab al-mukaddas (Old Testament). London. R. Watts.
1822. (New Testament 1. vol. 1821.) — f Beii'ut, various editions.
t New York 1867.
Arabic Bible- Chrestomathy with a Glossary edited by Geo. Jacob.
Berhn 1888.
j3 Written by Europeans.
Der Koran nach Boysen von Neuem aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt
mit einer historischen Einleitung und Anmerkungen von Q. Walil.
Halle 1828.
Der Koran. Aus dem Arabischen wortgetreu neu iibersetzt mit An-
merkungen von L. Vllmann. 6. Aufl. 1862.
Le Koran, Traduction nouvelle, faite sur le texte arabe par Mr.
Kazimirski. Nouv. ed. Paris 1854.
The Koran commonly called the Alcoran of Mohammed: translated
into English from the Original Arabic. With explanatory notes
taken from the most approved commentators. To which is pre-
fixed a preliminary discourse. By George Sale. London 1774.
Last ed. by E. M. Wherry "with additional notes and emenda-
tions". 4 vols. London 1882—87.
J. M. Rodivell, The Koran, translated from the Arabic. 2. ed. Lond. 1876.
The Qur'an translated by E. H. Palmer. 2 parts. Oxford 1880. (The
sacred books of the East translated by various oriental scholars
and edited by F. Max Miiller, vol. VI. IX).
Der Koran. Im Auszuge iibersetzt von Friedrich Riickert, heraus-
gegeben von A. Miiller. Frankfurt a. M. 1888.
Die fiinfzig altesten Suren des Korans in gereimter deutscher Uber-
setzung von M. Klamroth. Hamburg 1800.
f*Geschichte des Qorans von Theodor Nbldeke. Gottingen 1860.
tJber die Religion der vorislamischen Araber. Eine zur Habilitation
etc. offentlich zu vertheidigende Abhandlung von Ludolf Krehl.
Leipzig 1863.
*Skizzen und Vorarbeiten. Von J. Wellhausen. Drittes Heft. Reste
arabischen Heidentumes. Berlin 1887.
Kinship and marriage in early Arabia. By W. Robertson Smith.
Cambridge 1885.
*Das Leben und die Lehre des Mohammad nach bisher grossten-
theils unbenutzten Quellen bearbeitet von A. Sprenger. Zweite
Ausgabe. 3 Bande. Berlin 1869.
LiTERATUEE G. * 153
f Das Leben Muhammed's. Nach den Quellen popular dargestellt von
Theodor Noldeke. Hannover 1863.
*W. Muir, The Life of Mahomet and History of Islam. 4 vol. London
1858—61. 3rd edition 1 vol. 1894.
fDas Leben und die Lehre des Muhammed. Dargestellt von Ludolf
Krehl. 1. Theil. Das Leben des Muhammed. Leipzig 1884.
Skizzen und Vorarbeiten von J. WeUhausen. Viertes Heft. 1. Medina
vor dem Islam, 2. Muhammad's G-emeindeordnung von Medina.
3, Seine Schreiben, und die Gesandtschaften an ihn. Berlin 1889.
fWas hat Mohammed aus dem Judenthum aufgenommen? von Abra-
ham Oeiger. Bonn 1833.
*i2. Dozy, Het Islamisme. Leiden 1863. 2 ed. Haarlem 1880 ^ Essai
sur I'histoire de I'Islamisme par R. Dozy trad, par V. Chauvin.
Leyde-Paris 1879.
*8nouck Hurgronje, Het mekkaansche Fest. Leiden 1880.
Die Mu taziliten oder die Freidenker im Islam. Ein Beitrag zur all-
gemeinen Kulturgeschichte von Heinrich Steiner. Leipzig 1865.
De strijd over het Dogma in den Islam tot op el-Ashari door Dr.
M. Th. Houtsma. Leiden 1875.
Zur Geschichte Abu '1-Hasan al-As'ari's (f about 324 H. = 935) von
Wilhelm Spitta. Leipzig 1876.
Expose de la reforme de I'Islamisme commencee au Illeme si^cle de
I'H^gire par A bou- 1-Hasan Ali el-Ash'ari et continuee par son
ecole. Avec des extraits du Texte arabe d'Ibn Asakir par
M, A, F. Mehren. Vol. II des Travaux de la 3e session du
Congres international des Orientalistes.
I. Goldziher, Die Schule der Zahiriten, ihr Ursprung, ihr System
und ihre Geschichte. Leipzig 1884.
*Mohamniedanische Studien von I. Goldziher. Erster Tail. Halle
1889. Zweiter Teil. HaUe 1890.
Polemische und apologetische Literatur in arabischer Sprache zwischen
Muslimen, Christen und Juden, nebst Anhangen verwandten
Inhalts. Von Moritz Steinschneider. Abhandlungen fiir die Kunde
des Morgenlandes VI, 3. Leipzig 1877.
G. JURISPRUDENCE.
al-Muwatta' fil-hadit. Corpus juris composed by Malik ihn Anas
al-Hi'myari al-Madani (f 179 H., beg. 27. March 795). Frequently
printed J also with commentaries, e. g. that of az-Zarkani (f 1122
H., beg. 19. Febr. 1710). 4 vols. Bulak 1280.
Sunan Abi 'Abdallah al-KazwIni, known as IbnMdga (f 273 H., beg.
8. June 886). Delhi 1282 and 1889. (Legal traditions).
Sunan Abi Baud Sulaiman as-Sigistani (f 275 H., beg. 16. May
I; freq. printed, e. g. Bulak 1280. 2 vols. (Legal traditions).
154* Literature H.
al-Grdmz by Abu isa Muhammad at-Tirmidi (f 279 H., beg. 3. April
892). Frequently printed. (Legal traditions).
Sunan Abl *Abd ar-rahman an-Nasd'i (f 303 H., beg. 17. July 915);
lithogr. in Kanfur 1847. (Legal traditions).
Flugel, Die Classen der hanefitischen Rechtsgelehrten: Abhandlungen
der k. Sachs. Gesellschaft der "Wissenschaften VIII. Leipzig
1860.
Jus Schafiiticum. At-Tanbih auctore Abu Ishak as-Shirazi [Abu
Ishdk a^-Slrdzl wrote the work in the year 452/3 H. = 1060/1)
edidit A. W. T. Juynboll. Lugduni Bat. 1879.
Precis de Jurisprudence Musulmane selon le rite Chafeite, par Abu
Chodja [Abu Sugd^ f in the 6*^ cent, of the Flight). Publication
du texte arabe, avec traduction et annotations, par S. Keijzer.
Leyde 1859.
3Iinhadj at-Talibin, le guide des zeles croyants. Manuel de juris-
prudence musulmane selon le rite de Chafi'i {as-SdfiH). Texte
arabe, public par ordre du gouvernement avec traduction et
annotations par L. W. C. van den Berg. 3 vol. Batavia 1882 — 1884.
(Cf. Snouck Hurgronje in the Indian Gids, 1884 ff. Elaborate
criticism.)
Precis de jurisprudence musulmane suivant le rite malekite par
Sidi Khalil (Halil lived in the 8tti cent, of the Flight) public par
les soins de la Societe asiatique. Quatrieme edition. Paris 1877.
Maverdii (al-Mdwardl f 450 H., beg. 28. Febr. 1058) constitutiones
politicae. Ex recensione Maximiliani Engeri. Bonnae 1853.
H. PHILOSOPHY.
a Written by Orientals,
Documenta philosophiae Arabum, edidit latine vertit illustravit Aug.
Schmolders. Bonnae 1836. — Cf, id. Essai sur les ecoles philo-
sophiques chez les Arabes et notamment sur la doctrine d'Algaz-
zali. Paris 1842.
Tahafut al-falasifa (the mutual refutation of the philosophers) by
al-Qazdli (f 505 H., beg. 10. July 1111), Ibn Busd (f 595 H.,
beg. 3. Nov. 1198), Hoga Zdde (f 893 H., beg. 17. Dec. 1487).
Cairo 1303.
Die sogenannte Theologie des Aristoteles aus arabischen Handschriften
zum ersten Male herausgegeben. Von Fr. Dieterici. Leipzig
1882 (Abhandlungen des Berl. Or.-Congresses). Cf. Die so-
genannte Theologie des Aristoteles aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt
und mit Anmerkungen versehen von Fr. Dieterici. Leipzig 1883.
II commento medio di Averroe alia Poetica di Aristotele pubbl. da
Fausto Lasinio. Parte I. II teste arabo : Annali della Universita
Literature H. 155
Toscane. Tomo XII. Pisa 1872. 4^. — II testo arabo del com-
mento medio di Averroe alia retorica di Aristotele, pubbl. da
Fausto Lasinio. Firenze 1875. (Pubblicazioni del E. Istituto
di studi superiori).
AlfdrdhVs, (f 950 A. D.) philosophische Abhandlungen aus Londoner,
Leidener und Berliner Handschriften. Herausgegeben von Fried-
rich Dieterici. Leiden 1890. — Id. aus dem Arabischen iiber-
setzt. Leiden 1892. — AlfdrdhVs Abhandlung der Musterstaat
aus Londoner und Oxforder Handschriften herausgegeben von
F. Dieteerici. Leiden 1895.
Philosophie und Theologie von Averroes {Ibn Busd f 595 H., beg.
3. Nov. 1198). Herausgegeben von M. J. Midler. Miinchen
1859. — Aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt. Miinchen 1875.
Le Guide des Egares. Traite de Theologie et de Philosophie par
Moise ben Maimoun dit Maimonide (f 605 H., beg. 16. July
1208). Public pour la premiere fois dans I'original arabe et ac-
compagne d'une traduction franQaise par Munk. I — III. Paris
1856—66.
Kitab Ihivan as-safa wa-hullan al-wafa (between 950 — 1000 of our
era). 4 vols. Bombay 1305 — 1306. — A part of the rasail
ihwan as-safa has also been printed in Cairo, 1306. — Die
Abhandlungen der Ichwan Es-Safa in Auswahl herausg. von
F. Dieterici. 3 Hefte. Leipzig 1883—6.
Statio quinta et sexta et appendix libri 3Ievakif auctore *Adhad-eddin
el-Igi (f 756 H., beg. 16. Jan. 1355) cum commentario Gorganii
ex codd. etc. edidit Th. Sorensen. Lipsiae 1848 (Scholastic
Metaphysics).
Definitiones viri meritissimi Sejjid Scherif Ali ben Mohammed Dschor-
dschani [al-Gorgdrii f 816 H., beg. 3. Apr. 1418). Accedunt de-
finitiones theosophi Mohji-ed-din Mohammed ben Ali vulgo Ibn
Arabi (f 638 H., beg. 23 July 1240) dicti. Ed. et adnot. critica
instruxit Gitstavus FliXgel. Lipsiae 1845.
P Written hy Europeans.
Die griechischen Philosophen in der arabischen Uberlieferung. Von
August Midler. (Festschrift der Franckischen Stiftungen zu dem
50jahrigen Doctorjubilaum Bernhardy's). Halle 1873.
Al-Kindi (f ca. 850 A. D.) genannt „der Philosoph der Araber". Ein
Vorbild seiner Zeit und seines Volkes. Von G. FJicgel. Leipzig
1857. (Abhandlungen der D. Morg. Ges. 1. Band. Nr, 2). Ci.
Otto Loth, Al-Kindi als Astrolog, Morgenlandische Forschungen.
Leipzig 1875, pp. 261 ff. and Sir Wm. Muir, The Apology of
Al-Kindy 2 Ed. London 1887.
Al-Farabi, des arabischen Philosophen, Leben und Schriften. Von
156 Literature I.
Moritz Sieinschneider: Memoires de rAcademie Imp. des Sciences
de St. Petersbourg. VII. serie, tome XIII, 4. 1869. 40.
Ernest Renan, Averroes et I'Averroisme. 3. ed. Paris 1861.
Die Philosophie der Araber im X. Jahrhundert n. Chr. aus den
Schriften der lauteren Briider herausgegeben von Fr. Dieterici.
Die Naturwissenschaft und Naturanschauung der Araber. Berlin
1861. — Die Propadeutik. Berlin 1865. — Die Logik und Psy-
ohologie. Leipzig 1868. — Die Anthropologie. Leipzig 1871. —
Die Lehre von der Weltseele. Leipzig 1872. — Die Natur-
anschauung und Naturphilosophie. 2. Ausg. Leipzig 1876. —
Einleitung und Makrokosmos. Leipzig 1876. — Mikrokosmos.
Leipzig 1879.
I. NATURAL SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
F. Wilstenfeld, Gesehichte der arabischen Arzte und Naturforscher.
Gottingen 1840 (rather out of date).
Histoire de la medecine arabe par le Dr. Lucien Leclerc. 2 vol.
Paris 1876 (insufficient).
Ibn Ahi TJseibia. Herausgegeben von August Muller. Konigsberg
I. Pr. 1884 [Ibn Abi TJsaibi'a f 668 H., beg. 14. May 1297
wrote this great work on the history of Arab physicians under
the title: 'UyCln al-'anba' fi tabakat al-'atibba'. For which see
Vol. II des travaux de la 6^ session du Congres international des
Orientalistes a Leide. Leide 1884. p. 257 if.).
Hayat al-haiwan (zoological work) bj'- ad-Daniiri (f 808 H., beg.
29. June 1405). 2 vols. Bulak 1284. Cairo 1305.
Kitab al-kaniin fit-tibb, Theory of Medicine, composed by Abu 'All
ibn Smd (Avic'enna f 428 H., beg. 25. Oct. 1036). 3 vols.
V Bulak 1294.
al-Gami' li-mufradat al-'adwiya wal-'agdiya (On the common medicines
and foods) by Diya' ad-din Abii Muhammad Ibn al-Baitdr
(t 646 H., beg. 26. April 1248). 4 vols. Bulak 1231.
Tedkire (Science of medicine) by Baud al-Antdki (f 1005 H., beg.
15. Aug. 1596). 3 vols. Cairo 1294.
La Chimie du moyen-age . . . par M. Berthelot. Tome III. L'al-
chimie arabe comprenant une introduction et les traites de Crates,
d'el-Habib, d'Ostanes et de Djaber . . . texte et traduction . .
avec la collaboration de M. O. Houdas. Paris 1893. 40.
Materiaux pour servir a I'histoire des sciences mathematiques chez
les Grecs et les Orientaux par M. L. P. E. A. Sedtllot. 2 tomes.
Paris 1845. 1849.
Traite des instruments astronomiques des Arabes, trad, par J. J. Se-
dillot. Paris 1834. 1835. Memoires sur les instruments astro-
nomiques des Arabes par J. J. Sedillot. Paris 1841—45.
Literature K. 157
K. HISTORY, BIOGRAPHY.
a Written by Orientals.
Ibn Coteiha's (ihn Kutaiha f 276 H. beg. 6. May 889) Handbuch der
Geschichte herausgegeben vouFerd. Wustenfeld. Gottingen 1 850. —
Oriental edition: Kitab al-ma'arif. Cairo 1300.
Abu Bekr Muhammed ben al-Hasan Ibn Boraid's (f 321 H., beg.
1. Jan. 933) genealogisch-etymologisches Handbuch herausgegeben
von F. Wustenfeld. Gottingen 1854.
* Chronologic orientalischer Volker von Alberuni. Herausgegeben von
Eduard Sachau. Gedruckt auf Kosten der D. M. Ges. Leipzig
1878. 40. — Chronology of ancient Nations. An English Version
of the Arabic Text of the Athar ul Bakiya of Albiruni, or
"Vestiges of the Past". Collected and reduced to writing by
the Author in A. H. 390—1, A. D. 1000. Translated and
Edited, with Notes and Index, by C. E. Sachau. Published for
the Oriental Translation Fund of Great Britain and Ireland.
Roy 80. London 1879.
Ibn Wadhih (Wadih) qui dicitur al-Jaqubi (Ya'kiibi) Historiae (composed
ca. 297 H.). 2 partes ed. M. Th. Eoutsma. Lugduni Batav. 1883.
Anonyme Arabische Chronik Band XI vermuthlich das Buch der Ver-
wandtschaft und Geschichte der Adligen von Abulhasan ahmed
ben jahja ben gabir ben dawiid elbeladori elbagdadi (al-Baladuri
f 279 H. , beg. 3. Apr. 893). Autogr. und herausgegeben von
W. Ahlwardt. Greifswald 1883.
Kitab al-ahbar at-tiwal verf. von Abu Hanifa Ahmed ibn Daiid ad-Dai-
nawari (f 282 or 290 H.) hrs. von Wladiniir Qirgas, Leiden 1888.
*Annales auctore Abu Djafar Mohammed Ibn Djarir At-Tabari (at-
Tabari f 309 H., beg. 12. Mav 921), quos ediderunt J. Barth,
th. Noldeke, O. Loth (f), E. Prym, H. Thorbecke (f), S. Frankel,
D. H. Miiller, M. Th. Houtsma, S. Guyard (f), V. Rosen et
M. J. de Goeje I, 1—5; II, 1—3; III, 1—4. Leiden 1879 seq.
Magoudi (al-Mas Hdl f 346 H., beg, 4. Apr. 957) Les prairies d'or.
Texte et traduction par C.Barbier de Meynard et Pavet de Cour-
teille. 9 tomes. Paris 1861—77. (id. 2 vols. Bulak 1283).
Hamzae Ispahanensis [Hamza wrote about 350 H.) annalium libri X.
Edidit J. M. E. Oottwaldt. I. textus, II. transl. Petropoli-Lipsiae
1844. 1848.
Fragmenta historicorum arabicorum. Tomus pi'imus continens partem
tertiam operis Kitabo '1-Oyun wa 'Ihadaik fi akhbari '1-hadaik
(written after the 11th cent. A-D.) quem ediderunt M. J. de
Goeje et P. de Jong. Lugduni Bat. 1868. 4^, — Tomus secundus
continens partem operis Tadjaribo 'lOmami, auctore Ibn Maskotoaih
(t 421 H., beg. 9. Jan. 1030) edidit M. J. de Goeje. Lugd. Bat. 1871.
158 Literature K.
*Ibn el-Athiri {ibn al-'Attr f 630 H., beg. 18. Oct. 1232) Chronicon
quod perfectissimum (el-KamQ) inscribitur. Edidit Carolus Jo-
hannes Tor7iberg. 14 vol. Lugdnni Bat. 1851 — 1876. — 12 vols.
Bulak 1290 and later.
Commentaire historique sur le poeme d'Ibn-Abdoun [Ihn '' Ahdun
t 529 H., beg. 22. Oct. 1134) par Ibn Badroun [Ibn Badrun
wrote in the same century) publie par R. P. A. Dozy. Leide 1846
(Ouvrages arabes publies par Dozy).
Historia saracenica arabice olim exarata a G-eorgio Elmacino (al-MaJcm
t 672 H., beg. 18. July 1273), edita et latine reddita opere et
studiis Thomae Erpenit. Lugduni Bat. 1625.
Ta'rili muhtasar ad-duwal (Outlines of History by Gregorius abu
'1-Farag Ibn el-*Ibri {Barhebraeus | 1286 A. D.) ed. by Salhdni.
Beirut 1890. (The edition by Pococke, 2 tomi 40. Oxonii 1663
is rare).
Elfachri. History of the Moslem Empires from the beginning to
the end of the Califate by Ibn etthiqthaqa (wrote about 1302
A-D.). Edited in Arabic by W. Ahlwardt. Gotha 1860.
Abulfedae (f 732 H., beg. 4. Oct. 1331). Annales muslemici arabice
et latine. Opera et studiis J. J. Reiskii, nunc primum ed. J. G.
Ch Adler. 5 voh Hafniae 1789—94. — 2 vols. Stambul 1286.
t Abulfedae historia Anteislamica , Arabice e duob. Codd. Paris,
edidit, vers. lat. notis et indicibus auxit H. 0. Fleischer. Lipsiae
1831. 40.
Ta'rih Zain ad-din *Umar ibn al-Wardl (f 749 or 760 H. = 1348/9).
2 vols. Cairo 1285. — An excerpt: Aegyptus auctore Ibn
al-Vardi. Edidit vertit notulisque illustravit Martimis Frdhn.
Halae 1804.
Ibn Ealdun (f 808 H., beg. 29. June 1405) al-'ibar etc. History of
the World. 7 vols. Bulak 1284. — Prolegomenes d'Ebn-
Khaldoun. Texte arabe par Quatremere. 3 vols. Paris 1858
(Notices et extraits des mscr. XVI, 1. XVII, 1. XVIII, 1.). —
Prolegomenes historiques d'Ibn Khaldoun. Traduction par Mac
Ouckin de Slane. 3 vols. Paris 1862 — 68 (Notices et extr. XIX,
1. XX, 1. XXI, 1).
The Tarikh al-Kholafa; or history of the Caliphs, from the death of
Mohammad to the year 900 of the Hijrah by the celebrated Jaldl
al-Din Al-Osyooti [as-SuyuU f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505), ed. by
W. N. Lees und Mawlawi Abd al-Haqq. Calcutta 1857. Another
edition Cairo 1305.
*Liber expugnationis regionum auctore Imamo Ahmed ibn Jahja ibn
Djabir al-Baladsori {al-Balddurt f 279 H., beg. 3. Apr. 892) ed.
M. J. de Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1866. 40.
Ousdma ibn Mounkidh un emir syrien au premier siecle des Croisades,
(1095 — 1188) par Hartwig Derenbourg. Deuxi^me partie. Texte
Literature K. 159
arabe de I'autobiographie d'Ousama. Paris 1886 (cf. Carlo de
Landberg, Critica arabica II. Leyde 1888). — Ousama ibn
Mounkidh etc. par H. Derenbourg (French edition.). Paris 1889.
'Imdd ed-dln el-katib el-isfahani (f 597 H. = 1201) Conquete de la
Syrie et de la Palestine par Sal ah ed-din. Public par le comte
Carlo de Landerg. Vol. I. Texte arabe. Leyde 1888.
Vita et res gestae sultani Almalichi Alnasiri^Saladini auctore Bohad-
dino F. Sjeddadi {Bahd ad -din ibn Sadddd f 632 fl. = 1234)
edidit ac latine vertit Albertus Schultens. Lugduni Batav. 1732
(1755). fol.
Kitab ar-raudatain^fi ta'rih ad-daulatain (History of Nureddin^ and
Saladin) by Sihab ad-din al-Mukaddasi , called Abu Sdma
(t 665 H. = 1267). Cairo. 2 vols. 1287.
Kitab al-'ins al-galil bi-ta'rih al-kuds wal-halil. History of Jeru-
salem and Hebron by Mugir ad-din (f 927 H., beg. 12. Dec.
1520). — Cf. Histoire de Jerusalem et d'Hebron. Fragments de
la Chronique de Moudjir-ed-dyn traduits sur le texte arabe par
Henry Sauvaire. Paris 1876.
Die Chroniken der Stadt Mekka. Gesammelt und herausgegeben von
Ferdinand Wilstetifeld (I Azraki. II Fakihi, Fasi, Ibn Dhuheira.
Ill Kutb ed-din. IV German edition). I— IV. Leipzig 1857—61.
Hulasat al-wafa bi'ahbar dar al-mustafa (History of the town of
Medina) by as-Samhudi (f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505). Bulak
1285. — Extracts translated by WiXstenfeld in den Abhandluugen
der k. Ges. der Wissenschaften zu Gottingen. Bd. IX. 1860.
*al-Hitat (Geography and History of Egypt) by al-MaJ<rizi (f 845
^H.,'beg. 22. May 1441). 2 vols. Bulak 1270. — JEistoire des
Sultans Mamlouks de I'Egj'pte, ecrite en arabe par Taki-eddin-
Ahmed Makrizi , traduite en frangais et accompagnee de notes
par Quatremere. 2 vol. Paris 1837 — 45. 4°.
Abul-Mahdsin ibn Tagri Bardii (f 874 H., beg. 11. July 1469) Annales
(History of Egypt) I, 1. 2 ediderunt T. G. J. Juynboll et B. F.
Matthes. II, 1. 2. ed. T. Q. J. Juynboll. Lugduni Bat. 1852—61
(incomplete).
Husn al-muhadara. History of Egypt by as-Suyutl (f 911 H., beg.
4. June 1505). 2 vols. Cairo.
'Agaib al-atar fit-taragim wal-ahbar (History of Egypt) by aUQabartl
(t 1236' = 1821). 4 vols. ^ Cairo n. d.
Ahmedis Arabsiadae [Ahmed ibn' Arabsah f 854 H., beg. 14. Febr.
1450) vitae et rerum gestarum Timuri, qiii vulgo Tamerlanes
dicitur historia. (Ed.) Latine vertit etc. S. H. Manger. 2 vol.
Leovardiae 1767. 1772. — Cairo 1285.
The History of the Almohades by Abdo - '1 -Wahid al-Marrekoshl
(wrote in the year 621 H. = 1224) edited by B. Dozy. 2. ed.
Leyden 1881.
160 Literature K.
Historia Abbadidarum praeniissis scriptorum Arabum de ea dynastia
locis nunc primum editis , auctore B. P. A. Dozy. I — III. Lug-
duni Bat. 1849. 4°. (Deals w. Spain).
Annales regum Mauretaniae a condito Idrisidarum imperio ad annum
fugae 726, ab Abu-1 Hasan Ali ben Abd Allah Ibn Abi Zer'
Fesano, vel ut alii malunt Abu Muhammed Salih ibn Abd el
Halim Granatensi conscriptos ed. illustr. Carolus Joh. Tornherg^
2 vol. Upsaliae 1843. 1846.
Histoire de I'Afrique et de I'EsiDao^ne intitules al-Bayano '1-Moglirib
par Ibn Adhdri (de Maroc) (I6?i aVIddri wrote between 363
and 366 H.) et fragments de la chronique d'Arib (de Cordoue)
publies par jB. P. A. Dozy, 2. vols, Leyde 1848—51.
Analectes sur I'histoire et la litterature des Arabes d'Espagne par
Al-Afykkari {al-Makkan f 1041 H., beg. 30. July 1631). Publies
par E. Dozy, G. Dugat, L. Krehl et W. Wright. 2 vol. Leyde
1855 — 61. (Couf. Fleischer, Textverbesserungen in Al-Makkari's
Geschichtswerke. Kleinere Schriften. Vol. II pt. 1. Leipzig
1888.) — Lettre a M. Fleischer contenant les remarques critiques
et explicatives sur le texte d'Al-Makkari par E. Dozy. Leyde
1871. — Cf. The history of the Mohammedan Dynasties in Spain
by Ahmed ibn Mohammed Al-Makkari. Translated and illustrated
by Pascual de Gayangos. 2 vol. London 1840 — 3. 40.
Bibliotheca arabo-sicula, ossia Eaccolta di testi arabici che toccano la
geografia, la storia, la biografia e la bibliografia della Sicilia,
messi insieme da Michele Amari. Lipsia 1857; Appendice, ibid.
1875.
Alheruni's India, an account of the religion, philosophy, literature,
chronology, astronomy, . customs, laws and astrology of India
about 1030. Ed. by Edw. Sachau. London 1887. 4'\ — Id.
An English edition with notes and indices. By E. Sachau. London.
2 vol. 1888.
Scriptorum Arabum de Kebus Indicis loci et opuscula inedita rec.
et illustr. Joannes Qildemeister. Ease. pr. Bonnae 1838. —
Cf. id., Dissertationis de rebus Indiae, quo modo in Arabum
notitiam venerint, pars I. Bonnae 1838.
*Ihn ChaUican, Vitae illustrium virorum. E codd. nunc primum
arabice edidit variis lectionibus, indicibusque locupletissimis in-
struxit Ferd. Wustenfeld. Gottingae 1835—40, 4°. — Ibn Hal-
likan (f 681 H,, beg. 11. Apr. 1282). 2 vols. Bulak 1275; another
edition 1299. — Ibn Khallikan's Biographical Dictionary, translated
from the Arabic by Baron Mac Guckin de Slane. 4 vol. Paris-
London 1843—71. 40.
Fawat al-wafayat (supplement to Ibn Hallikan) by as-Saldh al-KutuM
(t 764 H., beg. 21. Oct. 1362). ^2 vols. Bulak "1283.
OF THB
CTNIVERSITl
Literature K, ^"^^f illlfOR**^!^
The biographical dictionary of illustrious men chiefly at the beginning
of Islamism by Abu Zakariya Jahya el-Nawawi (f 676 H. = 1277)
edited by Ferd. Wilstenfeld. Gottingen 1842 — 47 (cf. idem for
the Life and Writings of el-Nawawi, Gottingen 1849, from the
4*11 vol. of the Abhandl. d. kgl. Ges. d. Wiss. zu Gott.i.
Nuzhat al-'alubba fi tabakat al-'udaba. Concerning celebrated Men.
By Abul-Baraka't al-Anhdri (f 577 H., beg. 17. May 1181).
Cairo lithogr. n. d.
P Written hy Europeans.
fVergleichungstabellen der muhammedanischen und christlichen Zeit-
rechnung nach den ersten Tagen jedes muhammedanischen Monats
berechnet. Herausgegeben von JP^erti. Wii^^en/eZi. Leipzig 1844. —
Fortsetzung der Wiistenf. Yergl. - Tab. bis 1500 von E. Mahler.
Leipzig 1887.
*Die Geschichtsschreiber der Araber und ihre Werke. Von F. WiXsten-
feld. (From the XXVIII. and XXIX. vol. of the Abhandlungen
der Kgl. Ges. d. W. zu Gottingen). Gottingen 1882. 40.
*Genealogische TabeUen der Arabischen Stamme und Familien . . .
Aus den Quellen zusammengestellt von Ferdinand Wustenfeld.
Gottingen 1852. q.-fol. — Register zu den genealogischen Ta-
beUen der Arabischen Stamme und Familien. Mit historischen
und geographischen Bemerkungen von Ferdinand Wustenfeld.
Gottingen 1853.
* Caussin de Perceval, Essai sur I'histoire des Arabes avant I'islamisme
3 vol. Pai'is 1847.
Geschichte der Perser und Araber zur Zeit der Sassaniden. Aus
der arabischen Chronik des Tabari iibersetzt und mit ausfiihr-
lichen Erlauterungen und Erganzungen versehen von Th. Noldeke,
Leyden 1879.
t*Der Islam im Morgen- und Abendland. Von A. Miiller. 2 Bande.
Berlin 1885. 1887. (AUgemeine Geschichte in EinzeldarsteUungen
hrsgg. von L. Oncken. Zweite Hauptabteilung. Vierter Teil).
*Geschicbte der Chalifen. Nach handschriftlichen grosstenteils noch
unbeniitzten Quellen bearbeitet von Gustav Weil. 3 Bande.
Mannheim 1846 — 51. — Geschichte des Abbasidenchalifats in
Aegypten. Von Qustav Weil. 2 Bande. Stuttgart 1860 — 2.
f Geschichte der islamitischen Volker von Mohammed bis zur Zeit
des Sultan Selim iibersichtlich dargesteUt von Qustav Weil.
Stuttgart 1866.
fGeschichte der Araber bis auf den Sturz des Chalifats von Bagdad.
Von Gustav Flilgel. 2. Aufl. Leipzig 1864.
The Caliphate, its rise, decline, and fall from original sources by
Sir William Muir. London 1891. New and revised edition 1894.
Socin. Arabic Grammar.' 11
162 Literature L.
Handbuch der morgenlandischen Miinzkunde. Von J. G. Stickel,
2 Hefte. Leipzig 1865—70. 40.
Catalogue of Oriental Coins in the British Museum, 9 vol. London
1875—1889.
The Mohammadan Dynasties, chronological and genealogical Tables
with historical Introductions by St. Lane-Poole. London 1894.
Die Charidschiten unter den ersten Omayyaden. Ein Beitrag zur
Greschichte des ersten islamischen Jahrhunderts von B. E.
Brunnow. Leiden 1884.
De opkomst der Abbasiden in Chorasan door G. van Vlooten. Leiden 1 890.
Memoires sur les Carmathes du Bahrain et les Fatimides par M. J.
de Goeje. Leiden 1886.
Die Statthalter von Agypten zur Zeit der Chalifen. Von F. Wiisten-
feld. Parts 1 and 2. Abhandlungen der Kgl. Ges. d. Wissen-
schaften zu Gottingen. 1875 (4"^). Band 20. Parts 3 and 4.
ibid. 1876, Band 21.
History of the Moors in Spain to the Conquest of Andalusia by the
Almoravides (711 — 1110), by R. Dozy. German Edition with
additions by the Author. 2 vols. Leipzig 1874.
Poesie und Kunst der Araber in Spanien und Sicilien. Von Adolf
Friedrich von Schack. 2 Bande. Berlin 1865. 2. Aufl. 1877.
*Culturgeschichte des Orients unter den Chalifen. Von Alfred von
Kremer. 2 Bande. Wien 1875 — 77.
Das Einnahmebudget des Abbasiden-Reichs vom Jahre 360 H.
(918 — 919) von Alfred von Kremer. Denkschriften der philos.-hist.
Classe der Kais. Akademie der Wiss. in Wien. Bd. XXXVI. 1887.
*Gescluchte der herrschenden Ideen des Islams. Der Gottesbegriff, die
Prophetie und Staatsidee. Von Alfred v. Kremer. Leipzig 1868.
Die Baustile. Historische und technische Entwicklung. Des Handbuchs
der Architectur (von J. Durm) Zweiter Theil. 3. Baud, zweiteHalfte :
Die Baukunst des Islam. Von Franz Pascha. Darmstadt 1887.
Prisse d'Avennes, L'art arabe d'apres les monuments du Caire depuis
le Vile siecle jusqu' a la fin du XVIIIe. 3 vol. fol. 1 vol. 4.
Paris 1877. — La decoration arabe. (Extrait du grand ouvrage.)
Paris 1865. fol.
L. COSMOGRAPHY, GEOGRAPHY, ETHNOGRAPHY,
TRAVELS.
a Written by Orientals.
Cosmographie de Chems ed-din Abou Abdallah Mahommed ed-Dimichgi
(ad-Dimi§kt f 654 H., beg. 30. Jan. 1256). Texte arabe publie
d'apres I'edition commencee par M. Frahn, et d'apres les manu-
Literature L. 163
scrits par M. A. F. Mehren. St. Petersbourg 1866. 40. — Manuel
de la cosmographie du moyen age, traduit de I'arabe ^Nokhbet
ed-dahr fi'adjaib-il-birrwal-bah'r"de Shems ed-din Abou-'Abdallah
Mohammed de Damas et accompagnee d'eclaircissements par M.
A. F. Mehren. Copenhague 1874.
*Zakarija Ben Muhammed ben Mahmud el-Cazwini's (al-Kazmm
f 682 H., beg. 1. Apr. 1283) Kosmographie. Herausg. von Ferd.
Wustenfeld. 2 Bande. Gottingen 1848—9. — id. nach der
Wiistenfeld'schen Textausgabe etc. iibersetzt von Hermann Ethe,
Erster Halbband. Leipzig 1868.
Haridat al-'agaib wa-faridat al-garaib, a species of Cosmography-
composed by 'Umar ibn al-Wardi (f 749 or 750 H. =» 1348 or 9).
Cairo 1292.
Specimen e Uteris orientalibus exhibens az-Zamaksaru, {az-ZamalSan
t 638 H., beg. 16. July 1143) lexicon geographicum quod auspice
T. G. J. Juynboll edidit Mathias Salverda de Grave. Lugduni
Bat. 1856.
Al-Harnddni's (f 334 H., beg. 13. Aug. 946) Geographie der Arabischen
Halbinsel. Nach den Handschr. herausgegeben von David Heinrich
Muller. Leiden 1884.
Das geographische Worterbuch des Abu 'Obeid 'Abdallah ben 'Abd
el-'Aziz el-Bekri (f 487 H. ■=» 1094) nach den Handschriften
zu Leiden, Cambridge, London und Mailand herausgegeben von
Ferd. Wiistevfeld. 2 Bande. Gottingen, Paiis 1876. 1877.
*Jacut's {Yakut f 626 H. = 1229) Geographisches Worterbuch aus
den Handschriften zu Berlin, St. Petersburg und Paris auf Kosten
der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft herausgegeben von
Ferdinand Wustenfeld. 6 Bande. Leipzig 1866 — 73.
Jacut's Moschtarik, das ist: Lexicon geographischer Homonyme.
Herausgegeben von Ferd. Wustenfeld. Gottingen 1846.
Marasid al-ittila*i, Lexicon geographicum ed T. G. J. Juynboll I — VL
Lugduni' B. 1850—64. (An Extract from Yakut).
Geographie d'Aboulfeda {Abu I- fidd f 732 B..,heg. 4. Oct. 1331). Texts
arabe par Eeinaud et Mac-Guckin de Slane. Paris 1840. —
Geographie d'Ismaii Abou '1-Feda en arabe publiee par Charles
Schier. 'Ed. autogr. Dresde 1846. — Geographie d'Aboulfeda,
traduite de I'arabe en frangais par Reinaud I (^Introduction
g6nerale a la geographie des Orientaux) II, 1 Paris 1848 ; II, 2
par Stanislas Guyard. Paris 1883.
*Bibliotheca geographorum arabicorum. Edidit M. J. de Goeje.
Pars prima. Viae regnorum. Descriptio ditionis moslemicae
auctore Abu Ishak al-Farisi al-Istakhri {al-Istahrij cf. Zeitschrft
d. D. Morgenl. Ges. Bd. 26, p. 42 ff.). Lugduni Bat. 1870.
Pai's secunda. Viae et regna. Descriptio ditionis moslemicae
auctore Abu '1-Kasim Ibn Eaukal (ibid.). Lugduni Bat. 1873.
11*
1 64 Literature L.
Pars tertia. Descriptio imperii Moslemici auctore Al-Moliad-
dasi {al-Mukaddasi wrote in year 378 the H.). Lus^duni Bat. 1876.
Cf. Description of Syria &c. by Mukaddasi. Translated from
the Arabic by Guy Le Strange. (Palestine Pilgrims' Text Society).
Pars quarta. Continens indices, glossarium et addenda et emen-
danda ad part. I— III auctore M. J. de Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1879.
Pars quinta. Compendium libri Kitab al-boldan auctore Ibn
al-Faklh al-Hamadhani (wrote ca. A. D. 290). Lugd. Bat. 1885.
Pars sexta. Kitab al-masalik wal-mamalik (liber viarum et
regnorum) auctore Abu'l-Kasim Obaidallah ibn Abdallah ibn
Khordddbeh (Ibn Hordadbeh wrote in the second half of the
9tli cent. A. D.) et" excerpta e Kitab al-Kharadj (K. al-harag
Taxbook) auctore Koddma ibn Djafar (Kuddma ibn Ga'far
wrote about 930 A. D.). Lugduni Bat. 1889.
Pars septima. Kitab al-a'lak an-naflsa VII avictore Abu AH
Ahmed ibn Omar ibn Bosteh (wrote before 301. H.) et Kitab al-
boldan auctore Ahmed ibn abi Jakub ibn Wadhih al-Katib al-
Jakilbi (cf. p. 157). Lugduni Bat. 1892.
Pars octava. Kitab at-tanbih wa'1-ischraf auctore al-Masudi
(cf. p. 157). Accedunt indices et glossarium ad tomos VII et
Vin. Lugduni Bat. 1894.
Description de I'Afrique et de I'Espagne par Edrisi (wrote 548
H., beg. 29 March 1153) texte arabe public pour la premiere fois
d'apres les man. de Paris et d' Oxford avec une traduction, des
notes et un glossaire par B.^Dozy et M. J. de Goeje. Lej'de 1866.
The travels of Ibn Jubair {Ibn Gubair end of the 6tli cent.) edited hy
William Wright. Ley den 1852.
Voyages d'Ibn Batoutah {Ibn Batuta f 779 H., beg. 10 May 1377).
Texte arabe, accompagnee d'une traduction par C. Defremery et
B. B. Sanguinetti (Publications de la Societe asiatique). 4 vol.
Paris 1853—58; deux. tir. 1874—77. — Cairo 1288.
j3 Written by Europeans.
F. Wustenfeld, Die Litteratur der Erdbeschreibung bei den Arabem.
Zeitschrift fiir vergleichende Erdkunde hrsgg. von J. G. Liidde I,
1841, S. 24—67.
Carte generate des provinces europeennes et asiatiques de I'Empire
Ottoman, dressee par Henri Kiepert 4 feuilles. Deux. ed. en-
tierement corrigee et augmentee d'un index alphabetique. Berlin
1892.
(Karte von) Arabien zu C. Bitters Erdkunde, Buch III, West-Asien,
Teil XII und XIII bearbeitet von H. Kiepert. Neue berichtigte
Ausgabe, die Orthographic revidiert von Th. Noldeke. Berlin 1867
(D. E-eimer).
Literature L. 165
Skizze der Geschichte und Geoo;Taphie Arabiens von den altesten
Zeiten bis zum Propheten Muhammad. Auf Grund der Inscliriften,
der Angaben der alten Autoren und der Bibel von Ediiard Glaser.
Zweiter Band. Berlin 1890.
Die alte Geographie Arabiens als Grundlage der Entwicklungsgeschichte
des Semitismus von A. Sprenger. Bern 187.5.
Arabien im sechsten Jahrhundert. Eine ethnographische Skizze von
Otto Blau. Mit einer Karte : Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenl.
Gesellschaft. Leipzig 1869 (XXIII B.) p. 559—592.
Arabien und die Araber seit hundert Jahren. Eine geographische
und geschichtliche Skizze von Albrecht Zehme. Halle 1875.
Palestine under the Moslems. A description of Syria and the Holy
Land from A. D. 650 to 1500. Translated from the works of the
mediasval Arab Geographers by Guy le Strange. (London) 1890.
Relation de I'Egypte par Ab dallatif {'Ahd al-Latif al-Bagdadi f 629 H.,
beg. 29. Oct. 1231). Le tout traduit et enrichi de notes par
Silvester de Sacy. Paris 1810. 4". (The text of 'Abd al-Latif
has been published by J. White: 'Abdollatiphi Historiae Aegypti
compendium. Oxonii 1800).
*Beschreibung von Arabien. Aus eigenen Beobachtungen und im
Lande selbst gesammelten Nachrichten abgefasst von Carsttn
Niebuhr. Kopenhagen 1772. 4*^.
Carsten Niebuhrs Reisebeschreibung nach Arabien und andem um-
liegenden Landern. 1. Band. Kopenhagen 1774. 2. Band. 1778;
English edtn. 2 vols. Edinb. 1792.
f*Travels in Arabia (1814) comprehending an account of those territories
in Hedjaz which the Mohammedans regard as sacred. By the
late John Leicis Burckhardt. London, 2 vol. 1829. — Johann
Ludwig Burckhardt' s Beisen in Arabien, enthaltend eine Beschrei-
buug derjenigen Gebiete in Hedjaz, welche die Mohammedaner
fiir heilig achten . . . Aus dem Englischen iibersetzt. Weimar 1830.
f*/. L. Burckhardt, Notes on the Bedouins and Wahabys. 2 vol.
London 1831. — Bemerkungen iiber die Beduinen und Wahabi's.
Weimar 1831.
Richard Burton, Personal narrative of a pilgrimage to El Medinah and
Meccah. 2 vol. London 1857 (and frequently, also in the Tauchnitz
edition).
*Travels in Arabia Deserta by Churles M. Doughty. 2 vol. Cambridge
1888. (With new map).
Adolf von Wrede's Eeise in Hadhramaut, Beled Beny 'Issa und Beled
el Hadschar. Herausgegeben . . . von H. Freiherr von Maltzan.
Braunschweig 1870. — Eeise nach Siidarabien und Geographische
Forschungen im und iiber den siidwestlichea Teil Arabiens von
Eeinrich Freihern von Maltr.an. Braunschweig 1873.
166 Literature M,
Mekka von Dr. C. Snouck Hurgronje. 2 Bande. Mit Bilder-Atlas.
Haag 1888. 1889.
I* An account of the manners and customs of the modern Egjrptians,
written in Egypt etc. By Edward William Lane. Various
editions. London. — Lane, Sitten und Gebrauche der heutigen
Egypter. Ubersetzt von /. Zenker. 3 Bde. Leipzig 1852.
E. W. Lane, Arabian society in the middle ages. Studies from the
Thousand and One Nights ed. by Stanley Lane Poole. London
1883. (Supplement to the "Manners and Customs", containing
the notes to Lane's translation of the Thousand and One Nights
{y. infra).
M. VERSE.
Delectus veterum earminum arabicorum. Carmina selegit et edidit
Th. Noeldeke, glossarium confecit A. Milller. Berolini 1890.
Tiber Poesie und Poetik der Araber von Wilhelm Ahlwardt. Gotha
1856. 40.
Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Poesie der alien Araber. Yon Th. Noldeke.
Hannover 1864.
Kitdb al-agdnl by Abu '1-Farag *Ali sil-Isfahdm (f 352 H., beg.
30. Jan. 962). 20 vols. Bulak 1285. — Alii Ispahanensis
liber cantilenarum magnus, ed. Kosegarten. T. 1. Gripesvoldiae
1840. 40. — The twenty-first volume of The Kitab al-aghani
ed. by Rud. E. Brunnow, Leyden 1888. — Tables alphabetiques
du Kitab al-Agani par J. Quidi. ler fasc. Leide 1895.
Kitab raudat al-adab fi tabakat suara* al'arab by Iskander-Aga
Abkarius (modern Beyrout scholar). Beimt 1858.
Bizanat al-adab wa-lubb lubab lisan al-'arab, by '' Ab-dal-Kddir ibn
"Umar al-Bagdddi (f 1093 H.; beg. 21. Aug. 1629) 4 vols. Bulak
1291 (A work on poets; on the margin are printed the Sawahid
al-'Aini). An index to the poets appeared from the pen of Guidi
in the transactions of the R. Accademia dei Lincei, Rome 1887.
*The Diwans of the six ancient Arabic poets Ennabiga, 'Antara, Tharafa,
Zuhair, 'Alqama and Lnruulqais, ed. by W. Ahlwardt. London.
1870.
Bemerkungen iiber die Achtheit der alten Arabischen Gedichte mit
besonderer Beziehung auf die sechs Dichter etc. von W. Ahlwardt,
Greifswald 1872.
Le Diwan de Nabiga Dhobyani publie par H. Derenbourg. Journal
asiatique 1868 — 9.
H. Thorbecke, 'Antarah, ein vorislamischer Dichter. Leipzig 1867.
Die Gedichte des'AZ^awa Alfahl. Mit Anmerkungen herausgegeben
von Albert Socin. Leipzig 1867.
Le diwan d'Amro'lkais par le Bon de Slane. Paris 1837. 40. With
Literature M. 167
Commentary by al-Batalyusi. Cairo 1308. Cf. Amrilkais, der
Dichter und Konig. Von Fr. Bilckert. Stuttgart und Tu-
bingen 1843.
f*Septem Mo'allakdt carmina antiquissima Arabum, textum etc. rec.
F. A. Arnold. Lipsiae 1860 (out of print) — "With commentary
by az-Zauzani (f 375 H., beg. 24. May 958). Cairo 1288.
A commentary by Abii Zakariya Sabya at-Tibrizi (f 420 H. , beg.
11. Aug. 1108) on ten ancient Arabic poems edited from the Mss.
of Cambridge, London and Leiden by Charles James Lyall.
Fasc. I Bibliotheca Indica, New Series, No. 789, Calcutta 1891;
Fasc. II ib. No. 840. Calc. 1894.
Der Diwan des Lelnd. Nach einer Handschrift zum ersten Male
herausgegeben von Jusvf Dija-ad-dln al-Chdlidi. Wien 1880.
Cf. A. von Kremer in den Sitzungsberiehten der phil.-hist.
Classe der Kais. Akademie d. Wissenschaften 98. Bd. 2 Heft.
Wien 1881. — Die Gedichte des Lebid. Nach der Wiener
Ausgabe iibersetzt und mit Anmerkungen versehen aus dem
Nachlasse des Dr. A. Huher herausgegeben von Carl' Brockel-
mann. Leiden 1891.
Die Mufaddalijat (Anthology of the Grammarian al-Mufaddal; f about
170 H.) Nach den Handschriften herausgegeben von Heinrich
Thorbecke. Erstes Heft. Leipzig 1885.
*Hamasae carmina cum Tebrisii scholiis integris edidit, indicibus in-
struxit, versione latina et commentario illustr. 6. G. Freyiag.
2 vol. Bonnae 1828—47 (collected by Abu Tammam f 180, beg.
27. Nov. 805; at-Tabrlzi Comm. f 420 H., beg. 11. Aug. 1108).
Another edition Bulak 1296. Cf. Hamasa oder die altesten
arabischen Volkslieder, gesammelt von Abu Temmam, iibersetzt
und erlautert von Friedrich Ruckert. 2 T. Stuttgart 1846.
The Hudsailian poems contained in the manuscript of Leyden edited
in Arabic and translated with annotations by J. G. L. Kosegarten.
Vol. I. London 1854. 40. — Letzter Theil der Lieder der Hu-
dhailiten, arabisch und deutsch: Skizzen und Vorarbeiten von
/. Wellhausen. 1. Heft. Berlin 1884. Comp. Z. der D. Morgenl.
GeseJlschaft 39. pp. 104, 151. 411 ff.
Die Gedichte des 'Urtca ibn Alward. Von Th. Noldeke: Abhandlungen
der Kgl. Ges. d. Wiss. zu Gottingen. Hist.-Phil. Classe 11.
Gedichte und Fragmente des ^Aus ibn Hajar, gesammelt, herausgegeben
und iibersetzt von Rudolf Geyer: Sitzungsberichte der Kais.
Akademie der Wissenschaften in Wien. Philos.-hist. Classe. Band
126. Wien 1892.
Anis al-gulasa fi diwan al-Barisa (The poetess al-Hansa is said to
have died A. H. 24, beg. 7. Nov. 644 A. D.) Beirut 1888. —
Le diwan d'al Hansa' traduit par le P. de Coppier et suivi de
fragments inedits d'Al-Hirniq. Beyrouth 1889.
168 Literature M.
Ibn Hisami (t 762 H., heg. 11 Nov. 1360) Commentarius in Carmen
Ka^bi ben Zoheir Banat Suad ed. Guidi. Lipsiae 1871. 1874.
Der Diwan des Garwal b. Aus al-Hutefa (f between 68 — 70 H.)
Bearbeitet von Iffnaz Goldziher: Zeitschrift der D. Morgenl.
Gesellschaft Bd. 46, S. 1—53; 173—225; 471—527; Bd. 47,
S. 43—85; 163—201. Also in a collected edition. Leipzig 1893.
Diu'an sayyidna Hassan ibn Tdhit (f 54 H., beg. 30. Aug. 683).
Tunis 1281.
Diwan d'al-Ahtal, Texte arabe publie pour la premiere fois d'apres le
manuscrit de St. Petersbourg et annote par le P. A. Salhani
S. J. Beyrouth 1891.
Divan de Ferazdak (f 110 H., beg. 16. April 728) recits de Mohammed
ben-Habib d'apres Ibn-el-Arabi publie sur le manuscrit de Sainte-
Sophie de Constantinople avec une traduction fran^aise par B.
Boucher. Paris 1870. 4^. (incomplete),
Magmii' mustamil 'ala hams dawawin (an-Nabiga, 'Urwa, Hatim, 'Al-
kama and Farazdak) Cairo 1293 cf. Z. der D. Morgenl. Ge-
sellschaft 31, 667 fe."
Chalef elahmar^s (died after 155 H.) Qasside. Berichtigter arabiscber
Text etc. von A. Ahlivardt. Greifswald 1859.
Diwan al-Buhturt (f 190 H., beg. 27 Nov. 805). Constantinople 1300.
Diwan des Abu Nowas nach der Wiener und Berliner Handschrift
mit Benutzung anderer Handschriften herausgegeben von W. Ahl-
tvardt. 1. Die Weinlieder. Greifswald 1861. — Diwan Abi Nuwas.
Cairo 1277. (Abie Nuwds f about 195 H. = 810).
Diwan poetae Abu-'l-Walid Moslim ibno-'l-WalTd al-Angari cognomine
Qario-l-ghawani (Sari al-gawdni f 208 H., beg. 16. May 823)
quern edidit M. de J. Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1875. 4".
Al-anwar az-zahiya fi diwan Abi'l-'Atahiya (Abu*l-Atdhiya f 221
H., beg. 26. Dec. 835). Beirut 1886. 2me Mit. 1888.
Diwan Abi Tammdm Habib ibn Aus at-Ta'i (f 231 H., beg. 7. Sept.
845). Cairo 1292.'
Diwan amir al-mu'minm Ibn-al-Mu tazz al-'Abbasi (f 296 H. = 909)
Cairo 1891. Cf. Uber Leben und Werk des 'Abdallah ibn al-
Mutazz von Otto Loth. Leipzig 1882.
Mutanabbii (al-Mutanahbi f 354 H. = 965) carmina cum commen-
tario Wahidii primum edidit, indicibus instruxit, varias lectiones
adnotavit* i^r. Dieterici. Berolini 1861. 4^.
Diwan Abi Firds al-Hamdaui (f 357 beg. 7. Dec. 967). Beirut
1873.
Abu'l-Ald' al-Mdarri (f 449 H., beg. 10 March 1057) Sakt ez-zind,
Poems with Commentary. 2 vols. Bulak 1286 and 1302 (Another
edition Beirut 1884). — Luzum mil la yalzam. Bombay 1303.
40; Luzumiyat 2 vols. Cairo 1891. — Caroli Bieu de Abul-Alae
Literature N. 169
poetae arabici vita et cai-mimbus. Bonnae 1843. Cf. Zeitschrift
der D. Morgenl. Gesellschaft 29, 304; 30, 40; 31, 471 ff.
Yatimat ad-dahr fi suara' ahl al-'asr, Anthology composed by Abu
Mansui' 'Abd al-Malik ai-Tadim (f 429 H., beg. 14. Oct. 1037)
4 vols. Damascus 1302.
Anthologie arabe ou choix de poesies arabes inedites traduites pom-
la premiere fois en frangais et accompagnees d' observations critiques
et litteraires par M. Grangeret de La Grange. (Paris) 1828.
N. BELLES-LETTRES, ETHICS, ROMANCES.
*The Kamil of El-Muharrad (f 285 H., beg. 28. Jan. 898), edited
for the German Oriental Society by W. Wright. Part. 1 — 12;
Leipzig 1864—92. A reprint appeai-ed in Cairo 2 vols. 1308.
al-'Ikd al-farid, by Ibn "Abd-rahhihi al-Andalusi (f 328 H., beg.
28. March 860) 3 vols. Bulak 1293.
Kitab al-Muwassa of Abu 't-Tayyib Muliammed ibn Ishaq al-Wa^^d
(lived 860—938 A. D.j edited by B. Brunnow. Leyden 1886.
Ihn Arabschah (f 854 H., beg. 14. Febr. 1450) Fructus imperatorum
et jocatio ingeniosorum edidit G. G. Fret/tag. 2. vol. Bonnae
1832. 4". — Oriental editions with the title: Fakihat al-hulafa'
wa-mufakahat az-zurafa'.
Makamat badr az-zaman al-Hamaddnl (al-Hamadani, the predecessor
of Hariri died 398 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1007) with commentary by
Seih Muhammad Abdo. Beii'ut 1889. Other Makamat of Hama-
dani Constantinople 1298.
*Les seances de Hariri (al-Hariri f 516 H., beg. 12. March 1122),
avec un commentaire choisi pao Silvestre de Sacy; 1 ed. Paris
1822; 2. ed. par Reinaud et J. Verenhourg.^ 2 tom. Paris
1847—1853. — With the Commentary of as-Sarlsl (f 619 H.,
beg. 15. Feb. 1222) 2 vols. Bulak 1284. — Makamat (Vowelled
text) 2. Ed. Beyrouth 1886. — The Assemblies of Al-Hariri,
transl. &c. by Thomas Chenery. Vol I 1867. — Do. Arabic text
with English notes &;c. by F. Steingass 1895.
*Kitab Adab al-Kdtib (proply. an aid to elegant writing) composed
by Muhammed Abdallah ibn Muslim Ibn Kutaiba (f in the
2nd. haif of the 3rd. Centy. of the Flight). Cairo 1 300.
Kitab al-matal as-sa ir fi^ 'adab al-katib was-sa'ir (Treatise on Style)
by Ibn al-Atlr al-Gazari (f 637 H., beg. 3. Aug. 1239) Cairo
1282.
Rasail (Letters) abi'1-Fadl badi' az-zaman al-Hamaddni (f 398 H.,
beg. 17. Sept. 1007). Constantinople 1298.
al-Maiddm (f 518 H., beg. 19. Feb. 1124) Magma' al-amtal. (Collec-
tion of Proverbs). 2 vols. Bulak 1284. — Arabum proverbia,
170 Literature N.
vocalibus instruxit, latine vertit, commentario illustravit G. Q.
Freytag I, II, III (a b.), BoDnae 1838—43.
fLes colliers d'or, allocutions morales de Zamakhschari (az-Zamah§ari
t 538 H., beg. 16. July 1143) texte arabe suivi d'une traduction
frangaise et d'un commentaire philologique par C. Barbier de
Meynard. Paris 1876.
Ali^s hundert Spriiche arabisch und persisch paraphrasiert von Keschid-
eddin Watwat, nebst einem doppelten Anhang arabischer Spriiche
herausgegeben, iibersetzt und mit Anmerkungen begleitet von
H. L. Fleischer, Leipzig 1837. 40.
Sirag al-muluk (Ethics and Anecdotes) composed by Abii Bekr Mu-
hammed at-Tartusi al-Maliki (f 520 H., beg. 27. Jan. 1126).
Cairo 1289.
Muhadarat al- udaba wa-muhawarat as-§u'ara' wal-bulaga , a species
of Ethics with Anecdotes by ar-Ragih al-Isfahdnl (f in the
beginning of the 6*11 centy. of the Flight). 2 vols. Cairo 1287. 40.
al-Mustatraf fi kull fann al-mustaz raf, a species of anthological En-
cyclopaedia compiled by Ahmad al-lhMh% (lived about 800 H.)
2 vols. Cau'o 1304. 1307.
Siret 'An^ar ibn Saddad, 32 vols. Cairo 1286. 1307. (another recension
10 vols. Beirut 1871). Cf. Antar, a Bedoueen romance. Trans-
lated from Arabic by T. Hamilton. Part. I, i — iv. London 1820.
Alf laila wa-laila. Tausend und eine Nacht arabisch. Nach einer
Handschrift aus Tunis herausg. von Maximilian Eabicht I — YIII;
fortges. von H. L. Fleischer IX— XII vol. Breslau 1825—43.
(This edition is not suitable for beginners in Arabic, as the
language is in many parts strongly influenced by the vulgar
tongue). — The Alif Laila or book of the thousand nights and
one night, published from an Egyptian Ms. by W. H. Macnaghten.
4 vols. Calcutta 1839—42. — 4 vols. Bulak 1279. — Original
in expurgated edition. Beyrout 1888 — 90. — Following the
earlier Bulak edition: The thousand and one nights commonly
called, in England, The Arabian nights' entertainments. Trans-
lated by W. Lane. 3 vol. London. 1 ed. 1841. Other editions
by Edw. Stanley Poole (the last 1882).
PART n.
PARADIGMS, CHRESTOMATHY
AND
GLOSSARY.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.
X.t.
TT7'
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA
I.
Suffixa et Praefixa
in flexione
verbi adhibita.
Persona
Numerus
Perfectum
Imperfectum
3. masc.
sing.
-'. (i)
3. fern.
»
—
s a-)
2. masc.
n
^
S (i)
2. fern.
?>
^ —
(^ ) vlh! i- 6)
1.
n
9
1 (I)
3. masc.
dual.
1 '
(1^) J—ic)
3. fern.
n
IV
(1 ' ) Jl ' 5 (i)
2.
»
a-
(1^) ^l_ 5 (i)
3. masc.
plur.
'r—
(1, ' ) i,^ ' '^ (^)
3. fern.
n
u—
u- ii (i)
2. masc.
D
9
(l-L) ^,-l-i(i')
2. fem.
li
;;,-5(i)
1.
rt
LS_
A*
4*
Paradigmata.
^^%
t
B
be
a
>
•1-C
o
<I5
o
o
o
P4
<5l
o
o .c( o .el o :oJ o :o( o
7t -1 i, -i; <
v\-^
s ^
_5
o
1)
B, \^ i| i| i^
Paradigmata.
•i-|
o :o( o :« o :o( o :cl o .o(
r-i> 'Ti -^ '"x '^
A'
o :3 o
5 ^-i^ 3-^ •'■^ """H "■
=^ -4 i| d ^i 4 g i
r3 '^
. masc.
. fem.
►. masc.
1. fem.
}. masc.
5. fem.
CO
Paradigmata.
TABULA III.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I verbi sani
Persona
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
turn
Imperfectiim
Indicativus
Subjunc-
tivus
Apocopat.
3. masc.
sing.
i^
J.Xib
J^XLj
3. fern.
}?
JjCiii*
^ J
2. masc.
M
^ >
2. fern.
n
5
1 r..'^.'.
1.
n
' 1..!.
3. masc.
dual.
IXH
--0 J
. ^
3. fern.
n
LxJUi-
- J
2.
n
> J
3. masc.
plur.
1^-
i,I?k;
3. fern.
H
o 9
^ i.:.^
^-^.
2. masc.
«
5 0>
2. fem.
n
^ 0>
^ji^j-
1.
«
^0 '
^ -0 >
^0 9
Paradigmata.
a*
S
On
C5
3 a
a a
- >>
'^m.
IXl
,
en
■*^
m
-4^
^
o
OS
o
03
<
CL,
<^
Pi
8*
Paeadigmata.
■I
B
be
«5
Oi
>
vtd V H \:3 \ 3 ^:3 TiQ- C:? 3
"^ «-6 "-6 '••^-6
t
^4 :^ :i2; 4 :i3; i| j| jj3
3
^^ .^^ ^^ «i2,^ ^^ ^^ .;i2, §^
B
x-6 'B^ '-^ *H^ ^-6 ^Jj «'3 -3^
M
^4 4 ;4 .:2,> ^4 4 ^^ ^^4
Perfectum Activi
Imperfectum «
Imperativus »
Participium »
Perfectum Passivi
Imperfectum n
Participium »
Infinitivus
Paradigmata.
><
a
4 .^i:
4> »>^4
s
^-s :j2, °-s „j^^ >-6 ;ja, ,^i2, '•'-i
• rn"
~
,^
?>-
>
■4^
R
K
p
M
K
R
r
o
CC
^
C3
-
a
CO
S
o
a
• r-l
CO
:3
o
-t-3
o .
zs
<v
Ph
>-
-t-3
o
;^
O
o
u
O
CD
cS
o
^
«f3
o
l-H
fl
C3
CP
fl
ce
p^
1— 1
P-i
flH
1— 1
CU
h— 1
10'
Paradigmata.
TABULA VI.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi mediae geminatae
Persona
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
turn
Imperfectum
Indica-
tivus
Subjunc-
tivus
Apocopatus
Impera-
tivus
3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fern.
1.
3. masc.
3. fern.
2.
3. tnasc.
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
sing.
f
«^
Y)
^y.
«
'^)f
n
0^^
J 0^^
n
■^>f
dual.
9
«
by-
V
plur.
'>>-
n
0—^
n
*0
o '«„
n
c^';7'
Y)
^?
«'
7^
03 ^
7^'
7^'
75'
';^
55 »»
t '^•^
^0 ^^
7^
7^;7^
55 - o O"
'7^
^,
ej;7^'
;^;7^
w - w «
';^:
r.
'^)}\
Paradigmata.
ir
TABULA VII.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I yerbi mediae geminatae
Persona
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
tum
Imperfectum
Indicati-
vus
Subjunc-
tivus
Apocopatus
3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1-
smg.
dual.
^
b
y
Ui-
piur.
" j hf
7^-
1°''
S'7^
I ^^
7^
85-'
'•I
r''
7^
12'
Paradigmata.
5>
'1" '1 '1 n ~! ^? -1 "T
i
0^
^til!mi^51ii;|
©
0?
1— 1
9Z
s
be
P
3ULA VllI
mediae
1— ^
« *>> -"^ :>.A « '^ ^"i- ».-^ :>?^
Si
h-l
t— 1
•- := P R •- P « Ji
CO
"^^ s - s "^ s a
S 1 1 .2 S -5 .2 §
5 ^ 11 3 -3 ^ .2^ .^
sii So S-. ^ .t^
,^ a a ^^ ^« a =« rt
Phi— ihhP-iP-ihhP-ihh
Paradigmata.
13^
TABULA IX.
Paradigma formarum selectanim flexionis
verborum hamzatorum
1
'
verbi tert.
Verbi pr. *
Verbi sec. ^
*•
I. Perf. Act.
r*^' ^
Impf. »
S^.J^.
Imperat. «
i°M
';*^i4^.
G — ^
?• .-
Partic. n
;^'
^^
^;U-
Perf. Pass.
rJ
Imp erf. «
7"^
ri^
II. Imperf. Act.
S *'
6^ o^
Infin. V
^b
iiu^JiJ'
^^^
^^c:^
%0-f-
IV. Perf, Act.
?'
r^'
l^f
i>
»
t ci
Perf. Pass.
;^>'
^'
^/»
^^^ ^^05
f-^0
:^ ^0
VIII. Perf. Act.
y^.]. (Aii'l)
;.Ldi
ipcii
Imperf. «
1^
^ > > ^ i>
^' > 0>
Perf. Pass.
^',\ i<XM\)
^1
(57^1
Imperf. «
;t^
14*
Paradigmata.
TABULA X.
Paradigma flexionis verborum
primae radicalis . et ^
Verbi pr. 5
Imperf. i
Verbi pr. ^
Imperf. a
Verbi pr. 5 sani
Verbi pr.
I. Perf. Act.
J^5
^5
C"^
" ^ ^
Imperf. «
5 ^-
9 0^
Imperat. «
£^
(jii, ^;^;i)
h^\
Imperf. Pass.
J-^^
9^9
J -- 9
9 ^ 9
Infinit.
s^ _^
6 ^
6 ^
IV. Perf. Act.
^,1
..0*
^jf
Imperf. n
t^'r'
* >
> >
Partic. »
tU>_5-«
S 9
Infinit.
jl^i.t
I''^!
t^l
;^!
mi, Perf. Act.
^ ^ C5
gcX^I
^ ^ 85
wmOJ
Imperf. »
9 ^^
r!
5 *^
{2>
Perf. Pass.
J-^l
£JJ|
^.^1
;^i
X. Perf. Act.
(1
-- ^:''i
Infinit.
|lJua:i
"1 ••"t
Paradigmata.
15^
TABULA XI.
Paradigma ilexionis
Activi I verbi mediae radicalis
Persona
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
turn
Impera-
Indicati- | Subjunc-
Apocopa-
tivus
vus tivus
tus
3. masc.
sing.
Ju
JyQ
^ 9 ^
(1 9 ^
3. fern.
n
^'li
> 9^
- *-
>^
2. masc.
n
9
Jyi3*
*--
O 9
2. fem.
n
>
'^,y^
4yiS
iyu-
i^-
1.
n
9 9'e.
if-
3. masc.
dual.
:/ii
u^^.
y^.
3. fem.
n
uu
:^i^-
2.
n
^9 O f
c>^^-
V5
- *
V
3. masc.
plur.
l^ls
y^
3. fem.
«
>^ ! >_^
2. masc.
n
9 9
yyS-
y^-
2. fem.
n
^
1.
»
Jy6
Jyij
CI J-'
16*
Paradigmata.
TABULA XII.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi mediae
, radicalis ^^
Persona
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
turn
Imperfectum
Impera-
Indicati- Subjunc-
vus tivus
Apocopa-
tus
tivits
3. masc.
sing.
S\JM
vA.^jO
^
7^.
3. fern.
11
lOsLu;
i
7^
7*^
°j^
2. masc.
11
^
9 ^
>^
2. fern.
1.
11
11
9
^y^
3. masc.
dual.
IJLL
(jI/^v^.
Lajw^J
IwWaaO
3. fem.
2.
11
1;-
3. masc.
plur.
i,;uL
tJ^T*^
'j^.
3. fem.
11
.-0 "
.-0 —
2. masc.
2. fem.
11
n
1.
V
Uw^y
9 -
;-^
r^
Paradigmata.
17'
TABULA XIII.
Paradigma (lexionis
Passivi I verbi mediae radicalis . vel
Persona
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
tum
Imperfectum
Indicativus
Subjunc-
tivus
Apocopa-
tus
3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
sing.
J^:
»
"1 ••
n
k-kIs
m
^:
t)
^:
dual.
^
»
tlLi-
ri
UJU
plur.
1^-
»
^ o
M
9
7)
»
jlii-
Jlis
JUi
Jl4
Jlis
JUi-
S o c i n , Arabic Grammar.*
B
Jjij*
Jju
4U^-
.,*
iilii-
- V-'
o -^ >
JJu
18'
Paradigmata.
1 ^
^ -: 1
y M 4' °i i % ii'k
B
s
1
r3
ffl3h5'i;|^i|:i
>
ffll||i'I!|i|i|f
1 -
^-> -•! „4^ -^ „4= v4' -=D »=0 <.-5^
S
©
1'
s
,j ,:^> !]y)' .A ^J -4; -5- ^1 vi
.1
Km
1 p; 1 1 1 -2 1 1 1
^
Paradigmata.
19^
TABULA XV.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi ultimae . JLii
iNume-
Imperfectum
T
Ferfec-
1 ;
Impera-
Persona
rus
turn
Indica- Subjunc-
tivus tivus
Apoco-
patus
tivus
1
3. masc.|sing.
1
9
3. fern. 1 «
^^
9 0^
^9 0"
,0-
^ — -*
9 0"
- >«'
,0^
'tl
2. masc.
»
o^y.
i)^ yy^
^"
>^'
2. fern.
»
^i?'
0^ 0-
;5p^" i5>^''
1
''•t
-'°t
'';?
1.
"
'^if'
^r^
5>"'
>-'
3. masc.
dual.
'?
j;^.
'#^:
3. fern.
n
b;^
/^
^i^
.''**'
1,^-
2.
n
'^P
'^•
3. masc.
plur.
';?
'.>^:
3. fem.
n
^ *0'
'*"
. *"'
. ' '^J
2. masc.
n
p^y'
Oif^
f^^-
1^^-
\,y.\
2. fem.
n
'o, -
^if^
1.
V)
J * -
^9 «"
,0^
20*
Paradigmata
TABULA XVI.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi ultimae ^ J^ii
hume-
rus
Perfec-
tum
Imperfectum, 1
X... „
Persona
Indica-
tivus
Subjunc-
tivus
Apoco-
patus
Impera-
tivus
3. masc.
sing.
^)
0^
'?:
3. fern.
r
^^
^
c^'
2. masc.
11
1
^
'^?
^
61
2. fern.
n
^^
^
0"
^
is'/
J)\
1.
"
9 0^^
^;t
'^l
r;1
3. masc.
dual.
LLos
ui^^
^r^
lji<W>
3. fem.
n
lii^
s?^/
1 -^ " '
buoo
2.
11
1 -.'."--
1' "••
Uuo^J
^f
^;j
3. masc.
plur.
i;j;
1^^^
\^f.
3. fem.
55
^;
U^^
o^°f.
2. masc.
n
5 0-—
-- JO'-
1 '""
'.^;i
2. fem.
n
a 9 0^^
i^p"'
lI^*i?r'■
^?
^;j
I.
n
1 T"-'
^^
r/'
Paradigmata.
21*
TABULA XVII.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi ultimae . vel ^ JjLi
hume-
rus
Perfec-
turn
Imperfectum
T _
Persona
Indica-
tivus
Subjunc- jApocopa-
tivus 1 tus
Impera-
tivus
3. masc.
sing.
'^)
^f.
— —
3. fern.
It
cr^/
^?
u^;^-
2. masc.
n
u^/
^>\
2. fern.
n
OtA^%
c^*^/
«
-»-
-e.
^l
1.
«
9 ^
15^;'
^i'
u^i'
3. masc.
dual.
\14)
1"."-
l^^
3. fern.
n
u^/
1 " "<» '
i;^/
2.
n
Uiyf;
c;l4i/
1 ". ^■:
Llilf
3. masc.
plur.
1^3
3. fem.
n
u^^;
- - 0--
^^
2. masc.
n
r^;
ip>^
,0 - ^
';^j
2. fem.
V
1^/
J^/
1.
n
Ua^J
i >5^y
(5^>'
u^^j
22^
Paeadigmata.
s
X) 3
i^ o
On
>
>
"Si
>
:t;:^r^'t.:t^i:^-t
•«'§-"''^' '-"•.« '^i^i-s
u
>
;_».-;ii^':3.,-,l-:|ii:*
Perfectum Activi
Imperfectum »
Imperativus «
Participium «
Perfectum Passivi
Imperfectum »
Participium »
Infinitivus r
Paradigmata.
23^
X
M a J
B
o
o
a>
Oh
a
c3
c3 .;:r
ft u
hS PL,
B
o
a
.2
*ft
05
o
f^
o
•4^
^
S
-t-3
fl
s;-i
ft
S-i
cC
a
l-H
c8
1— i
24*
Paradigmata.
TABULA XVIII.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I verb
i ultimae ^
vel ^
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
tum
Imperfectnm
Persona
Indicativus
Subjunc-
tivus
Apocopa-
tus
3. masc.
sing.
'^
C5^-
3. fern.
w
^ . .'.
^ " 9
2. masc.
n
^ CI >
2. fern.
«
y
^ -c '
-- " >
^ * '
9 >
^ci
oi
1.
«
OAJUOi-
C5^-'
^^i-l
ij£w!
3. masc.
dual.
La.^'
1- - *"'
Ludib
3. fem.
n
LxLoi'
^ ■^ " '
^ ^ >
1 - ^ "'
2.
^1
UJC^^d
1 - - ?.;.
3. masc.
plur.
,0 ^o>
^ *^J
3. fem.
w
^ - «?
^ -' " >
(J.A.OJL5
2. masc.
11
^ ^ " J
2. fem.
n
^ ^ " '
^ -- " '
1.
n
^ >
^ >
Paradiqmata.
25^
TABULA XX.
Paradigma flexionis nominis
a) generis
masculini
a) triptoti
indetenninati
determinati
cum articulo
determinati in
statu construct
Sing. Norn.
v^LoJ>
- (^LoJ»
Gen.
^
>
1 * '
Ace.
oLoi*
Dual. Nom.
^^^
- fiS ""^
uiJi
Gen.-
Ace.
O^^
^, a^
Plur. Nom.
uy^^
^^'Liill
•.fLa2»
Gen.-
Ace.
^y^
^^A^iiJl
^Lli-
p) diptoti
Sing. Nom.
F
^1^1
F
Gen.
>^^
7^'
Ace.
>^^
F^'
F
Dual. Nom.
Jj^^
u'F^'t
'7^[
Gen.
Ace.
J^f^^
e>^;'i3l
(5;^'
26*
Paradigmata.
indeterminati
determinati
cum articulo
determinati in
statu constructc
Plur. Norn.
U>7^^''
.F
Gen.
Ace.
uij^'
^^"Sit
^^T
TABULA XXL
b) generis
feminini
a) friptoti
Sing. Nom.
6^ ^
■il\lS\
ki:
Gen.
iiLlJI
X£.Lw
Ace.
k^Ll
siLlJi
2I&LI
Dual. Nom.
^jUciLAw
^jli^LlJl
La^LIw
Gen.-
Ace.
u^^LUT
^iLl
Plur. Nom.
v::^L^Ll
^ULlJI
v:yLilIw
Gen.-
Ace.
^LiLlJI
v^LiLl
P) diptoti
Sing. Nom.
2Lyo
ceterum idem
Gen.
Ace.
Paeadigmata. 27*
TABULA XXn.
a) generis masculini in desinentis.
. , , . . determinati determinati in
indeterminata . , ^ ,
cum articulo statu constructo
Sing. Nom.-Gen. ^U
^UJI
C5^^-
Ace. LloLi*
^Uji
<5^^-
Dual. Norn. ^LLoU'
^^ULoUJi
ll^li
Gen. -Ace. ^jAAvnb*
^^^liJl
Plur. Nom. ^y^
ur^^i
Gen. -Ace. ^^juoLi*
^liJi
^^-
b) nominis in ^5-!-, I-L desinentis.
a) triptoti
Sing. Nom.- ] tr " ' "f "'"tT -rf * '
Dual. Nom. ^LyAia-o^ .^1 a p h »n j M LBh,vix
Gen.-Acc. ^jj^QJn^nfi ^j.Aj^Bh^»ll ^xm.«a^
Plur. Nom. ^^sdaJ!a./o ^jch^^lf "ysSaJaJo
Gen.-Acc. ^iixci^o ^<^ la ^4 It gh^^
28* Paradigmata.
. ^ . determinati determinati in
mdetermmati ^. , , , . .
cum articulo statu constructo
Sing.Nom.- | ^i LixiJI Lki
Gen.-Acc.J
Dual.Nom. ij^r*^ jjlI-oUl l^-o^
p) diptoti
id. Llij LjOJJI Ujt>
TABULA XXIII.
Paradigma nominis cum suffixis.
a) nominis masc. in singulari positi t^Loi'; fern. ibsLi..
cum suffixo 1. pers. sing. (C?*-^ ^®^* cs^) •
» » 2. 5' :) masc. dljLoi*
n n 2. n n fem. ^iAjUki'
fl n 3. n » masc. ioLai* (gen. xjLai*)
» » 3. 5? » fem. L^L^ai*
n n 2. » dualis UioLoi?
» " 3. 5) M Li.^l.*a.5(gen. LJ-^L.^*)
n n 1. n pluralis Ll^Lii*
» « 2. 5) n msc. iJoLoj*
n " 2. « n fem. ^JolAai*
» » 3. » n msc. l^l.o.i* (gen. |U..^Loi*)
» » 3. n n fem. v,^ U J-t «? (gen. ,j,^Lo3')
Paradigmata.
f OF THE
r'JNlv^SITT
^)
nominis in duali positi.
v^cAriTT.i ^\^ --^
Nominativus cum
suffixo 1. pers. sing.
^^LSLoS
J» V
It 2.5?
« msc.
cJULoi* etc.
Gen.-Acc. »
« 1. ,•
-
n ji
11 2i, V
V msc.
n n
n 3. 11
n »
XjoLfli*
n «
11 3. n
v fem.
, ^ 0^, a -
c) nominis masculini in
plurali positi.
Nominativus cum
suffixo 1. pers. sing.
if*-^*
« n
11 2. n
r msc.
^J^LoJjetc.
Gen.-Acc. n
V 1 . n
»
t^Lls
» n
r 2. n
n msc.
dLuUai*
M S)
n 3. 11
n msc.
", a -•
fl n
n 3. »
n fem.
L^joLoi' etc.
d) nominis feminini in plurali positi.
Nom.-Gen.-Acc. cum suff. 1. pers
. sing.
15^'LILI
Nominativus « « 2. r » msc. dbLill*/
5) n w 3. 51 « » xjLdLuw etc.
Gen.-Acc, » « 2. » « n dbLcLL
n n n 3. w :? » XjLcLw CtC
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
I.
A. EXERCISES EST READINGS.
v^Ai*. Ja.li.fik ys^N \yX\Mj\ lO»^-*-J \^Jv-fr (3"T^ LlLo.
U^)^ cLf ^^ oUo ^i)«J.A« iu-wio (joLo ^^* ^y^ 'is.i.ij
IbL^P \ilii.::^j (j«2.Aiu sLw i^AJd* -.>t> v:yU.A^.^
2. 3. S«.A^ e;'y^ V-*^. [•t^ ).5"€^ £. VT"^ ^^
? O^ I - T ?
^ ^^.aJJw lyuAu ^ii>yi' (•^j-^ W.t^
^ ^^^ 0^^ ItXo iL^^ Jol^ ykj
Exercises in reading. 31*
j»^j J o a ^ j».^jo^ 'a"-' — a"*" j"""
G'""' "^^ ''^ -' •""■ > ^ -* ^ 6 '*' — ' "^ ^ '' * "^ 0'"'*' -i*
Uc>^ lU^^ cftX^ Si>^ (J^ (*-S^i ij-5r^ c^-V^*^^ ^- ^•
(V^^U ,j-»^y! ^T^^l ^oJ^ '^ya^ ^ \5y^.
^^ lyLU&-| it-Usi ^Ji*ja\ xXS^LiJl J^:Cw| (c^A^'j
j-;^ 6-r-o^ oj-0^ « >« J 5 j«i-;^o'^«^^
32 Exercises and texts.
B. EXERCISES ON THE ETYMOLOGY.
16-29. v«A-o»ft Py^-> ..vww.:> (.)V=^' i^>L5 ^^cXa:^! v^
J^ /»-^-^i 7*^^! tX^Lw (^JJajl^ *rpJa.^[ ^^s^Xw!^
c^AJl ^^^.^Js /^^y^ J^^aa^I Jy^yj* ^"^-^ r*^^ J^^
# Jyi\ ^ovia-ol yOys:S ^^1 ^^vi* J^xiij
30-33. ff-AO^j^ *J>tXxJM ^^^^wvw^a».| w^v:? Oi^>-ss»>l LA^-X:^ loy^i*.
' o^ I --- " ' ? ^ " , ' " ' M " " " ' % ^ ' "" ^^"f
LSxOl jjliticXj JaAX^i^! d^^^ JV^.^ ^^-^1 Uy*"^)^ O)^
Ow^Jol (jj*-^Aj ^^*wy (^J^'I iv-VXaj 't'>'^5r'. Y^-*^^'
r./"' " f! » - o>„-, "^^^r irt.'t '-i ^ ^r
OIXC^Xaj ci>j.aa:5».! ^^..^.aaCo v^a^. ^^^-^ v— >>v..^V.-o
OnXw^.& !».AAJf^ LlAAA<<OJ _i2.A.AM^3' |VAJ«.^ UlXaam! p-'y^.
L^\5o LwAa.^1^ LtXulo ^j^yf-'s Ucryi I^AAA-JI ^^4.A..&t
34-36. Nv^ (^f^**^ tXJ'vJ V-J/-0 ii^Aj uiy^Ass^! j^^^ LjJi>>
La^! ij\y*j '^>^ (joJi-o i^^v^yi' [VA4.4.;c ^viiJ c^/^aXaawJ
4^ t><X<3.J* wft/L^ Ui^OiXw *./0 J^
Exercises on the etymology. 33*
LaaJLXjI^ j^ -J* ^j«iOuU«u> <\^\Jo jj^AAXo L*^ lV V. 37-38
i f j: > , - ^«,' ^ - or. - ^f ", ^ fa '- f-f- o^ o ' f^ o
^ ^^Ubj LUaj jj.xXki^ ^jVjuoj vcijuJJ LkuJLwwO itXjf
jj^-^yj (>5«-> ^-fl-ftj f^i> ^j^tXAj' '^-^v. >fc-*^»y^
(J.aaa.wv-5 I^W (^' ^T^ YS '-^r^' (•y^ ^^y^ 41-44.
{•^\jo! ^^^Jtxj j^^ ■^^^ ^^r'-* U^5"!^ y^"^^^, "^^^^y^j.
sUg-o LstA.bl oc^«yJ> ^ItXjo *Lo Uyx^t
J-, -. 0)0 s^ ^."TT • o- o^, ^
dlJ LuJ |W f*^LoX) |V^'r^ sii/JJff! cXxJCwwo losL^j
!«-»x j^tXxAJ o^^AJ U9^' o«<Xi >cAA-^fc^l ^c4^. 45-48.
v,::;.aXj io»ojuj y^'*^ vc:ax^1 <<4^' U.?'^^ ^^ g, VaI^
a -^- ^o""* J-'" ))o> ti^^o -o) ,, -
c:: . ■c' t .. .• t t .. .• I t .T • I ... ^ . ".. -
^>«A-0 ^.-LXJ l^jJUwj UwX^I UwiLvCj /tf-^-y j^wXAJLJ
0^^ 0^ > a-j o ^o ' ^ ' "-^ ^f^ I '"»
^ v:>Jt> ^:i^^«-j i*"^ <s^y- ^y^) '^^■)^^ '^)i
S o c i n , Arabic Grammar.* C
34* Exercises and texts.
49. jj^>J LU:s». cyJiJ>] ^y^yi. i>\Ji*^ <5y^ ^^^^y* i»^.
53. S..4JU w& 4^*-V^ (*^ ^-y^' |*"S-iV^7^* ^-^^^ sLUju^
^ U^^^jUj jj-XJtW (jJ&LuJji?
60-61. ko^L:S\.A>o jj>aX^ ^^^yXXjo ia-Lw^ — ^.i^ cXxJ^ (•^^■^
G^^ •> G^^ Q ^ ^j Q ^ Oy G^c5> ^ ^ ^ G --oJ Gw-'J
Hw&.Lft^ J^ ^J Ll«o «iSVi2-OyO ^txXx) Jifli* /^tf^ Ww^
G ^? ®| " U S > I ^" S o.-c G o - o J G "-■ G| .^ ",
JULft^l. oLwXjj £'"*"^V r'^^ i*--^* )^-^i *^^~^^M^
67-71. JJ^ V^ ^-jLyXwJ fl.'*-^ (jajU^o ^Of <i/L\-ftjf *„w
Qfi-g, G o G.^.G *^^ ^^ <*-? °'" " ' ® »"-'
G^a? G|^ . G^-- fr"' ?^, ^"> T'T"* ^^''' I "^
cN.x.xx> P^-^i <^*^^ Ua-yo tJsX^jo ^uajT^ U'T^* ^^-^"♦^
Go^ Go^ ^ ^0- G o^ S- > G f G r- o 6^
x^Lbl^ ^S:>Laj )Lw.x> Wj^/J (W.Lj nLxX^I y?^ (*-^5^
G '- S-0? w^ 0, ^<^ , \^^f G5— G-, - o
o«i^ _^yu) "^i^A-yo ;^-^'*-<' cN-V'=^ F'^T^* iouU^j
v^^.XA;C aUI^ \3y** ^^J^f*^ Y^^^' ^^V^-^l ^^^9^
Exercises on the syntax. 35
^jLc 4>jiAX> ^^xLft/> eLujI (J^^•^ is^9^ y^) is^^^
^i (c-^i S^Lft:^ EUtof^ axJoo ^JlJuukwo ^-*-> 8ii>L»-«
^ .iXfr /c-*^ ^^ iS^^^^ ^HV***^* (5^^*^
^s% wrLww..D ju^ u^) u^^5^ (jW.<^' ^-^^-^ ^^* °^'
iU^AxI J^>l iUw.s v,g<y ^^l^' ^-^ L§'^ xX^l
,5^K*w iL^I ibvi'l v.::o%LIfc bi^^ ij^* J^-^^ 5'-^^
9 9".^ s,--©^ 9^ 9"' 9 ". Q ^9 *, H -^ ®iT "?
^j«wwJ! [•uiJj (j'"*-V^ ^^V f»y^ ^^**^ viUU^ sUax>!
9,. 9*j 5.-' Sj ^rrr- ^tf-f ' »"^
_.L^ _.^www ^jlJ^ 4>^ ri^-^**^ u'^i u^:?^'T^
/ ,- - ,-»-^ 9,^ 9 ^^ i,^^ 9o, ^^ ®^^r -
9 '""^ 9 J J ® ^ ^
C. EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX.
, ^ -• ^ -- ' ^* ir* 1"" 1 *1 I '^M * ® *' >- ^ ^
L_)b ^.D (j^^^' yy^ # *^ UcXc ^w4^ Vr*^ 135-13S
Ju^ ^1^ ^ JL^Y-M (j-i^iiJ &IUI4! ^^ iLlJl
1 § 130. 2 § 99 c.
36 Exercises axd tests.
iLjvj.AJt ciJyjl ^ ^LftXJI oL§^ xlXc: LT^r^^ ^r^'^^
^jUaA-Cwiil jj-« ^Lj 6«-ct ^^ ^^iU^ SwA^ vi)^S"
d^ ^^j^J dLUJ! bl Jyis *i* x^A^^ ^l^l^l
i§ 110. 149. 2 § 136c 2. 3 §124. 4 § nsb. 5§ii8c. 6 § 137 d.
7 § 121a. 8 § 101b. 9 § 113d. 10 §108. ^ § 126. 12 § 109. 13 § no.
i4§92b. I5§ii3a. 16§141. i7 § 108. 18 § ef 2. 19 § 98ef. 20 § ne.
Exercises on the syntax. 37
2 - '«f^
^o ^xjl^ («^^ ^^<:?^ r^^ «J^5^^ ^'^H^
Ju..^^ I^r^ <^-i^^ O; ^^^"^^ aLjJNo tXiV^'
u-'; ^c5^ ^ ^ 1*^^ /^b *7^ r^ ^ C"^
iokJI '^ ^U-l lU^I ^iit ^Uisl s^pl ^p,
1 § 147 a, 148 b note. 2 § 99 a, cf. note b. 3 § 123,
38 Exercises and texts.
o:^
147. 'sir ^t ^i- pi ^^ ^T 4ij^ i^j '^}M^i •
# vr^' r^*^ '^' *^i '^' ■• * cj-i^^*^'
i^y S^ dui ^ i!,r'^ ^U3' dji ^ ^^t"
• § 134. 2 § 162.
Exercises on the syntax. 39
f JJO^)^ j^O^ JOS'* '-»*' >>*"* i \ '•"
v-^^JjiJI ^ ^iiAjuo J^Ji iUtXa. i^^y^^ r^
iai^cOLi i,^4\JUjc jjMwxjyi^ L^Ui'l sLa^J!^ ^^'
X^l jj^ *^J4^^^ ^i ^Jj^T* ^ MLfti »v*^ J4^
G . >
(j.w.xiij>« ^^.'^ sLdi*^ aXmmJI X-^^^ ^^"^i XJ^LS* j^^
^o^Lxx) JU* ^ v^^JJaJ^^ ^ii'^^H^^ (5^^^ ^ # ^r^
1 § 131. 2 § 101 a note. 3 § 152. 4 § ggd. 5 § 132.
6 § 144. 7 § 141.
100.
40 Exercises and texts.
-- ^ ^ ^ J -^ j"--^ ^ C^oxi ^^ ^ ^ > ^ ^y^ J, ^g'
SU^LaX^ ^Y-S?9 Jj-w^I SwCwIjU? v.yAAA^ jjl jjLwO^
^^^ ^ ^^^^ ^-i^^ ^^^^^ c^ ^i>J\J ^^ sLa^f
^ ^^i ^Cft^ ^Y^ J^Y-^^ /«^. (j^ ^-^^ ^y^)
jj.^^ «JJ! ^t> ^ |v5tXAaj^ wA^*JC4JI^ ^-3-f (J
-- ^^ ^ o i y ^^ o ^ ^ Jo -o J y^ ^ ^^^ o > > ' '
1 § 151. 2 § 113b. 3 § 157.
Exercises on the syntax. 41*
or ^"r jiliT ^ ^j-v^pT ^t l: i^u 154 ff.
,-,-5;,;° i.-^r '"PI"- ^--j • fr^ I I "*»»* ^'i"
UL^J! Jlyb XAjfy^ w^JiJ (^<XJ' ^LUJf J^
^d^\ V^IvaJL XaAJ ^k-W ;J-V^. ^tXi! jLA4i^
w' 0^"Cj'"" ^^0 j> ""^
-- i^^ " "1'^ ^i^w-o o"o" " ^a5^
8L? viLob J^il <^Ui wi.S^.uO !^l 3^ C)^tX&
^ a "S- --G^^ ww'^ '^"^ C-o ^ o "^ y (if-
\0<b>\ ^^1^ w^l ;jU^t S:ft;V^-'^ O^^^ (^^^
42 Exercises and texts.
i'-O ^ ^
^ s^bJI L4JL0I is3 iU^xJI ^ ^A.sxiaJL Lgjob
-o:g £, o.^
158 If. (3Jt\-o oiJI ^aXjCwwJ ^. ItX^I* t^tXfi^ J.AA*w^i* ^
^:^ iS.^
io viwUXj loU <i)U-^t d^ ^ db'T ajLj* |J JU
O >" c
EXEECISES ON THE SYNTAX. 43*
..... . u^ ^ .. ^
<3|^ &AA^ J^i4^ piix^i j^i i<^^ J^yi JLi*
jpdl v-v^^ JLa^ (•Liu) JXJ 45c ^y^^ Vr*^.^
s^jjjf J| ^cU* I3| ^^aJI Jli 4^ Jlil (jil^ Lo
l^-:SU**^!^ (^ijwiJI vii (*^<^:?^; ^^f^^ ly^^U
jv4^i cM^ ^^ ^6|; '^^^^ V^^^ 4 ^^*^^
44* Exercises a^-d texts.
V:>XvWwLw* *.A.^^ Iw)l«.<ff oJ^i^* ^l^tAMJI V^ts^l
) 9 O 9 ^ ii^ y^ ^___ ^ (1 ^ ^ f '^ "^^ ^O^^ 9 ^ " ""^
- o--- > " o.
^ ^t^^^ 5^' C>^^ ^"^^ J^tXi* jjl J^ viL?
Jjci^ (V-g-A^ly^ (?^^'y*; (*-f-^y* ^ (j'-vti^^^ J^
|V>Uj b ^jl5' Lo aJJI^i ^.AAs^^Jj (vTbLw *J tl'^j-!. J'^*
,^^ ^^LbJ.^ Hyb JLiii ^fLx) *i\.A^L ^^ LLw
jciilJ JjXI^ JjT iU ^llj J^^ xijf h^
Exercises ox the syntax. 45*
3 c^tV.> u« x^lxjjLu; v::^x3!t>« eOCciuLD ooLb a^JLLS.
— ..J dwi UJ ^ aU^ (j^«.AaJI ^r'vAJ^ XA^ij v:i^l4>«
J * -- ^ ^^'"**'
I- o ' J,
ogju-l (>xr ^ xjL^aawo s^JJ x^Lw SvAa*^
O > " ^ O -- o
^|wC^!| Jwxs? (^^.-wC^x> (^tX:^ f*^^ feLft-lil (j4*J
46* Exercises and texts.
^1 ^5c^ oJUil ^LXi, v/*^^ (j-^ c>^ U^
T^Lxi ^4^^ r-^ ^y^l P^"*^ ^^^) ab»-L&.
x^s J^ L^A*^«J 'iy^^-:^ &J ibsL^ iO):eLs? s^LvaJI
J^Lc jLa^4> ^ ^5^^^ i^ J^ 7'^-*^* *-^^^ ujjJI
L^£iXufcX> 5LX^«i aU^ xJJI ^^^j L-jUail ^^ ^^ju
,^^«o J^4^ ^Lj i^fy^* ^-ft^^ ^^^^ dL^lj ;3^5^*
Exercises on the syntax. 47*
Lo jlu.^ '^'i^^ ^'))^ u4*^ ^*-LJI \jQjt-^ JU>
> „- ».
io'w^' &JLC.Lai JU 2U04V& (jU JU 8>JCwkO JUi
^ t>^LJI. c>La*J! ia>o /p^.Y^
" - ^\ - -" o' "f" - ' <- -«'f f -Txt " " * ^- -'
Jli iS Ui Jli J;i^!^T J^ JU sjuaii ^7^1 v^QT
^s.X.0-5 Ux iJlLl UoLa. LCuJb Lg-5 ^ (5^*-^
v^^lJI aJ JLfti *LjtiaJJ s«»^-ccJI Juiij ^U ^ci*-^^
clJij I6| JU ^ Li^ JU S^Li viLJl^ J J^^
48*
Exercises and texts.
II.
AEABIC PROSE EXTRACTS.
UU LI^ajo L^^t> i^ftjj^ ^"^SyklS P^^U £;V-^N
^J! ^jtXi^l ^J^J lI^I ;j»f J4*"5 tk-i^'l <^i ^' Y^-ii?
^j^^ iUjiXi-M » tX^ Ui oJ^* UXI ^1^ dL^<X^I xi
,o^ ^fifc L^Kaa/. iL-jNli iUj(>.xj sjje JLai L^aJ LI«
" ^AA^^I ^_5yl vJ [w' 5'>-<>i U^f ^y <>i it,>^^^>^'
Arabic prose extracts. 49"^
LgjL^ Y-^' *^^ Uiis^ L^ lU^I ^« Lg-T*^ L^-^
*-X^^ oLSj^M L^ jjJcciU ^i^^V'j^ v-^^^ *^% x^LLo
I ""■'' »" t * ' ""•' I "P'xi I ' " " "» r " ' I f '^ T '■"
J^£. o\^iX^\ Ow.o3Li J^lcXit j4*yJI c)oLiA^r
&.',^ xjI^} lt>Li iui kxJcXiJI o^'SLi, 4>LiA4~M
,?Lil^ ^^jc^ x>oj^^ ju)^? k^LL 3 J^l ^♦».L4^I
Socin, Arabic Grammar.- D
50 Exercises and texts.
J ^o-- ^ --co c'^ ^53 /« ^"^ ^o^Po'O 4,53 .<o
^^- jft^i £i^i^ g^yt ^\^\, u^u^ifi; jiiJw
J^l i« I^LS |J ^S L^iyi^ J/Ut >s.L^
X^ ^iJ t>lij^l jj*^i; ^^-4-^ 4!4;^ ^"^^ X-jf^l
> ^^ X ^
(jllf ^^-^^ ^^ ^^) '^ ^^ ij^.y^ v:yJL».s»'l
Arabic prose extracts. 51'
Jfc-wws kXj^ U^-r* /^iVt^ 5'<3ljt4J 5«j* jv-wLsO j-XaJ
^Lo« sJuLfr oils' ^x!! *j|jyl 4>jJ 2^tvi vi^ H^-^
abcLii*. 5^y^ v;:AXiuLc tXi* sLiil oLj ,J^ l«-Rit«J
J^> ^vS? |«jwo3l« Jl^I nLxJI IjjD 3 Lo fJLfti
^aojo cXi' xj| (jii->J> oiljti XAJtV-iJI J| L^^Xo siJI
aJJl Jvww^ JU* 2uii U-U aLrL-w 2Ulo!. ^->>^ jj|
,j»jLj «-L^ h*tf^ ^^^ o*«=»-LJwJ xiiwww Llft5^| [V^-UI
JU* N^-o-Ui! ^ixiil v^^^si.!^ ^7'^ C>^ (5^^
J^N ^^ uLa:^ v.:y»Aj|« UiL^ ^\S ^^) ^ii^^j ^
52 Exercises and texts.
^aaJ !^I«.^I^ /*?^^5 scXaa ^! syfl-uJ! Jl^ xj fc*^
^ C o ' ^^
v-uo! Ls JLfti Lx.^ L^-*^ [VaXJ ^I. UJ L^^^^^^U iLyol
^_^^ JU' ^ JU Rjyol ^^^-J ^y^ oo!! ^^^jOx^M
vdAjLLx) Ui JU* S JU (*-^ '»■?;; I^-!.'^^' ^i (^
^ fj f O'C '1''' ''* ^^ ^ C '', "— > --^-' - '--' C ^ -f ^ . ^
&Jt>Lft Xajo JixjLii (Jl^ -^U^^i (j^^^^il wuol Lj JUii
c ^ ^ J 5 ^ ^ ^ s^ ^ J ^a ^j ^ _, Si's-
J 1^1 Y-c£ Jt^/ol jv-g-i >,:iol^ tXi* &A/o| ^k^ ^U
^^ ^ ^ ^ "^ '^ ^055'^ ^■^ ^ J ^ -- "'''^
T.. I*" -!"" *'fvf» i^r-- I— "7 T- * '
J.A5 UmC •.AJtJ (jl j)]^ U.«..w^ Lx). ^^c^ ^^y^ V^
I ^ ^ , ^ o ^ " -r. - ^ - , - c n i" ■' fi "='.»" -
Aeabic prose extracts. 53*
t> ^ ^ ij.'"' o^ ^ ^ a ^ o
4 t5*^ (J^ c^<^; t5^ (;^-^" \J^ \j^^y^^ ^^
^A«. 5^j (^'V^ J^^^ <^^^^ ^^; ioo^^ xjU wi'U
iiij JUii ScX-J 3 *iij ^! ^a^ Li«^« f:^^ WtX? ^
*-- " x' " f ° ^ ^'c" O^ >0*' ^ -'i* y id's- ^ y J O^"^
^ c -o ^m^o-a yy y^
y 9U ^ yy ' ' ^^ ^1^ i O y 9 0"^
syoX^S sJ JUi xaJ]^ L^iJ>! ^7^' ^^ ^ xj^^j.
O a /O _- I ^0 ^ "^^ y ^ * ^ 9 y" " y^ ^ y 9
isA^J! liXj» J.;C/o ciolv Ijo J«Jb Swfj UJi\ aO-c
54* Exercises and texts.
jjj^lisLkAA;,! X^ijlX) ^b'^ Xjol JOIJ vilLo ^^JOwi'Jl
55 ^ O /^_^ ,JOj ^'^^ — *'''0 "'^ >"'' ^ ^ < 9 -»"'*
xjw ^1^^ &iw*4.JI^ cMiaJI^ x^fXii^l aOjliL iOUa-Lww
Jf^ v_aa5 jj! ;2^ aa^t> ^^-c- ^^^ LT-W^ ^*^
^jJ^ XA^li? j| ^^y^i^i (jLi^l/ |V>-ILS^T d^
xXll+^JI viLlj xj^4- ^Y^ u^r^^ <^ ^ • 'J^^'
sUw^i ^^-^ (J^-^ XA^Lb ^JJ^ '6yS-d^^ KJ^y-^ ™^ <2I
tXLo^ jj*;wftj( viLl/0. JoU (joJ ^jf /ff^-^ slX-aX^w^'I
c)^ ^f c^* <J^^^ ^y^ ^y ^l ;^^ i*--' ^'
J >^^ 03 ^ J ^^ ^-; C C'O 9 ^ (^y y y yy C O^
O ^ O ^ y O O 'C " ^ 9 " " ^0 "1'' yd y C'
.55- u* -o^ -; .y o^ 7. C=^. o <^Y c>
^^o ^! tX*^ J^b ^^! j| ^^ jvJ iXA^Ji 0^'
Arabic prose extracts. 55*
jvXc- XawlAJ ^j«« U'*?:? ^-♦-^ 2U-Lc (CjJJLwli JjCtl
^ i- j,^ '''^^ *^ 050-^^ a'. ^1*.'* ^-^-
iul.^P| a^JCj^U iCU v-AJvJ ^tXJ! ^*^9^ 3 >tXAX^j)|
i-a3'^ *->■ ^^^ ,j^ ^yi^'^ (i ^^5"^^ sya-;.:5i.j s^jUxi
G ^ 9 o^ r ' "•' ^ ^ ^o-c ^ G ^ o^^
L« 8y^ ;J«f 7^^'^ lvJi\>0 ^jl^ Li 8w^ ^^ lM* I
^3 |vX!Lo ^wol Jo J^iixj sUX^I wCcoix) U Jliii
56* Exercises and texts.
^Jww ^^ tXi^-»^'i r"^y^ v.:i^*j>^ (c^i (j^jLiUI L^jI viljjl Lo
;^jJ| (^^iUl IJJO JUi wi^l f*li* jvJ viX^xib ;5tXi!
!^-Jo (•%-t^-^i /^"^^ ^^^^ 7-y*"''^ '"•^^v*-^ r^-"^' ^H-^^
Jo ^i/i*.^ ^A,oLi iwftA^*,A-3 j) ^J»La^ lJ ^ ■T' 7^
' ^"^ \1 T**"* ^ " " — ^ " t" """'<? V ' ' o -- ^ o^^
' lAJiiaJt. xj^X^^j xtNjX^NI US'*.^ JU'i wc»-l ^U^
. .0-0 ^«iP- g> ^^"-o ^1 jS^^^ j^
o ^ „ 0-0 --
^ Rj^jiX!w^t ^1 J^:^^^
III.
TKANSLATION INTO ARABIC.
Note. The order of the words in the folio wing sentences
has been adapted, so far as possible, to that required by the
Arabic translation. In addition, however, the student must bear
especially in mind the difference of order (§§ 135, 139 — 142)
which marks the cardinal distinction between verbal and nominal
sentences (§ 139 note). The square brackets enclose words
which in translation should be omitted, while those in curved
brackets give the form of the sentence required by the Arabic
idiom. — Past and perfect tenses are generally to be rendered
by the Arabic perfect, present and future tenses by the Arabic
imperf. The extensive use of the (generic) article in Arabic is
to be noted. All nouns not in the construct state should have
the (definite) article prefixed unless qualified in English by an
indefinite article. — So far as lexical the footnotes to the exer-
cises are only Supplementary to the Glossary. It is, for example,
only in special or exceptional cases that "oh" is to be rendered
by l^il instead of by U, and the notes draw attention to such
cases. — The apology for violence done to the Queen's English,
in the interests of the learner, may be repeated from the first
edition, from which the following is in the main reprinted.
58 Translation into Arabic, a.
A. Nominal Sentences. ^
1. The glory of the man [is] his sons, and the
solicitude of the man [is] his dwelling and his neigh-
bour. — 2. The elegance of the man [lies] in his tongue,
and the elegance of the woman in her understanding. —
3. The liberal [man is] related to God. — 4. The worst
(of) repentance [is] at the day 2 of resurrection. — 5. The
love of the world [is] the beginning of every sin. — 6. The
promise of the king [is] a security. — 7. The learned
[men are] the heirs of the prophets. — 8. Wisdom [is]
for the character 3 like medicine for the body. 3 — 9. The
world [is] the prison of the believer and the paradise
of the unbeliever. — 10. Contentment [is a part] of^
the nature 3 of the domestic animals. — 11. The malady
of covetousness has no (not is ^ for it a) cure; and the
disease of ignorance has no (not is for it a) physician. —
12. The nutriment of the body 3 [is] (the) beverages
and (the) viands, and the nutriment of the under-
§§ 139 ff. 2 § 113 a. 3 piur. 4 ^^ 5 § 50.
Translation into Arabic, b. 59*
standing [is] wisdom and learning. — 13. Money has
(to money [is]) a difficult entrance and an easy exit. —
14. Yerilyi God [is] forgiving and ^ compassionate. —
15. Verily ye^ [are] in a manifest error. — 16. The
nobles of-* Pharaoh's folk said 5, "Verily this [is] surely 6
a learned enchanter". — 17. Verily in that "^ [lies] surely
an example for the unbelievers. — 18. Flight in its
[proper] time [is] better than endurance in its wrong
time (in another than its [proper] time). — 19. There
is no (not^ [is there]) strength and no (nots) power
except with 9 God, the High and^o Mighty [One]. —
20. The best of gifts [is] understanding, and the worst
of misfortunes [is] ignorance. —
B. The Strong Verb.
21. Jonah went out from the whale's belly. —
22. Zaid killed Muhammed. — 23. They gave's (beat)
Omar a violent beating ^i. — 24. The direction of prayer
was shifted 12 from Jerusalem to Mecca. — 25. God
knoweth (knowing) what 1 3 ye are doing. — 26. Verily'
God provides for every one his sufficiency. — 27. Learning
and money [they] cover up ^^ every fault, and poverty
1 § 147 a. 2 § 149. 3 suffix. 4 J^. 5 perf. sing. § 136.
§147Z>. ' % \i7 a. 8 §111. 9<_j. 10 § 122. II § 109. I2§i36fe.
' l^, § 56 note a. i* dual. §"l36rf. i5 § 137 b.
60* Translation into Arabic, b.
and ignorance [they] uncover i every fault. — 28. They
took him away and put him in the bottom of the
well. — 29. The brothers of Joseph returned 2 to their
father. — 30. "Why hast thou^ not^ washed thy shirt?
— 31. The most 5 of mankind are not^ grateful 2. —
32. They' believe not 8 in 9 the future life.— 33. We
made heaven [to be] a [well-]preserved roof. — 34. Do
not do good out of ^^ hypocrisy, and do not leave off
[doing] it out of 10 modesty. —
35. Why do ye render waste the cultivated coun-
tries ? — 36. Thereupon we sent Moses and his brother
Aaron with our signs to Pharaoh and his nobles; then
they declared the two of them 1^ to be liars. — 37. The
angels said^^^ "0 Mary! be obedient to thy Lord and
"prostrate thyself; verily 1 3 Qod giveth thee glad
"tidings of a word from 1^ him; and he ^4 [is on.e] of ^^
"those 16 who are placed near [to God], and he shall
"talk to mankind in the cradle!" — 38. It is not seemly
to hurry (not is good the hul-rying), except in the
marrying of a i' daughter, and the burying of a i' dead
[man], and the entertaining of a ^8 guest. — 39. Glorify 1^
God in the early morning 20 and [late] in the evening 20.
^ 1 dual. § 136 d. 2 piur. 3 fem. * ^ § 101 c. 5 sing. § 127.
6 "5. "7 pronoun. 8 part. 9 j_;. 10 § 113 d. 11 suffix in the
dual. 12 § iSQb. 13 § 147 0^. 1* pronoun. 15 ^. 1 6 prut.
17 § 118 c. i^ § 118 c. 19 plur. 20 indeterm. accus. § 113 a.
Translation into Arabic, b. 61*
40. Verily tlie hypocrite has (to the hyp. [belong])
three characteristics; his tongue contradicts his heart,
and his speech his action, and his exterior his in-
terior. — 41. The men of his people used to sit with
himi on account of his learning. — 42. Yerily the
holy war [is] incumbent 2 on you. — 43. The vehemence-
of a (the) man 3 [is what] causes him to perish'*. —
44. The head of al-Husain the son of Ali was brought
into the city^ of Damascus 6 and was placed before
Yazid. — 45. Yerily we" have become Muslims, so 8
become Muslims ye 9 [also]! — 46. Do not talk to one
another with disgraceful talk! — 47. Every thing has
(to every thing [belongs]) an indication; and the in-
dication of understanding [is] reflection, and the in-
dication of reflection [is] being silent. — 48. We started
off towards Bagdad to bring an action against one
another 10 before ^ its 12 governor. — 49. The most ex-
cellent [kind] of praise [is], "[there is] no i3 god ex-
cept God!" and the most excellent of [good] works
[are] the fivei^ prayers; and the most excellent [kind]
of character [is] (the) being humble. — 50. They, fought
with one another four days 1^, then the Byzantines
1 ^3^ sing., then subject, then the verb in the plur.cf. §§89 notee; .i'if-
136 d. 2 part, 'a 2^". 4 nominal sent. § 139 cZ a. 5 § 107. 6 § 128.
7 § 96 d. 8 ^. 9 pronoun. 10 part § 113 &. " (1,1. 12 § 72.
13 § 111. 1* masc. determ. after the noun, § 92 a. is § us a.
62* Translation into Arabic, b.
were routed i. — 51. What is disliked in 2 the king [is]
the being devoted to (the) pleasures, and the hearing
of (the) songs and the spending of (the) time therewith
(with that). — 52. They said^ "0 our father! verily we 3
"went away, running races -i, and left Joseph with^
"our baggage; then the wolf ate him". — 53. Observe
what [is] in the heart of thy brother by means of his
eye, for^ the eye [is] the title-page of the heart! —
54. In the fourth year from the birth of Muhammed
the [two] angels ' cut open § his belly and extracted ^
his heart; then they cut it 9 [his heart] open and
extracted 9 from it a black clot of blood; thereupon
they washed 9 his heart and his belly with snow. —
55. They conversed 10 about the case of the Apostle. —
56. Yerily God hath (to God [are]) n servants
whom ^2 he distinguishes (he distinguishes them)
with his favours. — 57. Restrain thyself from meatus
which 1^ causes thee to acquire an indigestion, and [from]
an action which i4 occasions thee regret 1 5. — 58. Thou
hast fallen in love '^ with a girl, a possessor of beauty ^^
and elegance ^\ — 59. Muhammed said, "Help thy brother,
"[whether he be] doing wrong i' or wronged 1^!" They
» fern. sing. 2 J. 3§96 d. •»imperf.merely,§ 157 b. ^ J^^ with gen.
6^1^. 7 dual. Ssfng. §136a. 9 dual § 136 d 10 § 137 «. ii§l47a.
12 without relative particle § 155. ^3 indeterm. i* without rela-
tive particle § 155. 15 indet. I6 § 98 e. n § 113 b.
Translation into Arabic, c. 63*
asked, "0 Apostle of God! how shall we help him,
"[if he be] doing wrong i?" He said, "By restraining
"him from doing wrong!" — 60. Do not turn away 2 a
beggar! — 61. A man (servant) does not believe, until
he love for his neighbour (brother) what 3 he loves for
himself. —
C. The Weak Verb.
62. A 'poor [man] begged of me, so I gave him
[two] pieces of money i — 63. Be mindful of death, for
he 5 takes hold of your forelocks; if 6 ye fly from him,
he overtakes you, and if 6 ye stay, he seizes you. —
64. Music [is] like the spirit and wine [is] like the
body; then through their 7 coming together is born
joy. — 65. The Apostle used toS preach to his com-
panions and to exhort them and to teach them the
beauties of character 9. — 66. Verily 10 our [true] friends
will 1 1 entrust to us their secrets. — 67. The lust 12 of the
world entails care and sorrow, and abstinence with
regard to it restores the heart and the body. — 68. Moses
said, "I have brought ^^ you an evidence from your
"Lord; so let go i-* along with me the Sons of Israel!"
— 69. Depend on the Living [one], who does not die!
1 § 113 J. 2 contracted § 36. 3 U^ § 156 and note a. •* dual.
5 pronoun with foil. part. 6 § 159. ^ dual-suffix. 8 see p. 61*
note 1. 9 pi. determ. »" § 147 a. 'i ^ § 99 a. 12 ^h,. i3 § gg e. i< sing.
64* Translation into Arabic, c.
— 70. He pleases me, who makes poetry to i show his
education, not to ^ make gain, and applies himself to
singing to ^ enjoy himself, not to ^ seek for himself [reward].
— 71. Demand help of the good (people2 of the good),
and of those that act well (and of the acting well). —
72. Choose 3 whichever of the pages thou wilt! —
73. Supplicate much (make much the supplicating),
for thou 4 dost not know when 5 answer 6 will be given
thee! — 74. Restrain your tongues and 'lower your
glances and guard your continence! —
75. A (the) kingdom is made flourishing through
justice and is protected by courage and is ruled
through [good] government. — 76. [Good] government
[is], that 7 the gate of the chief be guarded ^ in the
[proper] time of being guarded 9, and opened in the
[proper] time of being open 9, and the gatekeeper
friendly. — 77. Jalal-al-din used not to go to sleep i<>
except drunk 11, nor (and not) to arise in the morning
except seedy and tipsy n. — 78. It is not seemly for
the wise [man], that 12 he address the fool, like as
it is not seemly for the sober [man], that he address
the drunken [man]. — 79. People i3 of the world
[are] like folk in a ship, who ^4 are carried onwards
1 inf. § 113 d. 2 § 133. 3 fern. 4 § 96 (^. 5 ^^Xx.. 6 impf.
pass, impers. "? § 148 &. 8 ^1^ with part. § 110. 9 61 c. »" see
p. 61* note 1. 11 § 113 b. 12 § ug &. 13 § 133. u §§ 155, 156.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, C. 65*
whilst they are sleeping i. — 80. The evil-doer [he]
does not consider 2 mankind except [as] evil, because
he 3 sees them with^ the eye of his nature. — 81. God
elected Abraham [as] an [intimate] friend. 7 — 82. Every
affair in the world [is] transitory. — 83. Wickedness
[is] to be feared ^ and no one (not) fears it except
the intelligent [man]; and good [is] to be hoped for,
and every one 6 seeks it. — 84. [To] a man (servant) shall
not 8 be given [anything] more ample than endu-
rance. — 85. I looked into Paradise, then I saw the
most of its inhabitants [to be] the poor; and I looked
into hell-fire, then I saw the most of its inhabitants
[to be] (the) women. — 86. He 9 whose counsel is
asked [is] one 10 in whom one confides; and he^o ^ho
asks counsel [is] one^o who is to be aided. — 87. Do
not put offi' the work of to-day till to-morrow 12. —
88. Thou dost not • 3 find (see) in the creation of God any i4
imperfection. — 89. Little which 10 continues [is] better
than much which ^0 is interrupted. — 90. Pharaoh said,
"We will IS kill 16 their sons and spare their women." —
91. A Bedouin looked at a gold-piece; then he said,
"How small i' is thy size and how great i^ thy value!" —
^1 § 157 a. 2 § 139^ a. 3 guff. * i^. 5 § 60 c. 6 j!it.
7 \LJ^. 8 y § 100 end. 9 part. " 10 part. »i § lOlb.
12 indeterm. ^3 ^. ** cr^ as used § 141. i5 ^, § 99 a.
16 § 19. 17 § 52.
Socin, Arabic GrammaT.^ E
66* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, D.
92. The envious [man] is not well-pleased with thee \
until thou diest! — 93. Be [the] tail and be not [the]
head! for 2 the tail escapes whilst 3 the head perishes.
D. Various subordinate Sentences.
94. Muhammed said, "Do not anticipate (begin) -i
Jews and Christians by the greeting, but when ye
meet one of them ^, (then) 6 force him towards the
narrowest place (his narrowest)". — 95. When comes to
thy knowledge concerning thy brother what is evil,
then seek for him excuse; but if thou dost not^ find
[one], then say, "Perhaps he has an excuse." — 96. Ifs
thou eat little, thou shalt live long. — 97. Ifs ye talk
in a good manner (make ye good the talk), ye shall
enter Paradise. — 98. Ali said, — may 9 God be well
pleased with him 10 — "Q '^ mankind! do not hope except
for your Lord, and do not dread [anything] except your
transgressions; and be not he ashamed, who 12 doth not
know, to 13 learn, and be not he ashamed, who 12 knoweth,
to 13 teach!" — 99. The subsistence which thou seekest
is like the shadow (the likeness of the subsistence . . .
[is] the likeness of the shadow) which moves on along
1 verbal sentence. 2 ^Ls. 3 § 157 nomm. sent.
4 plur. 5 j^\ with gen. § 133 end. 6 § lei c. J §§ 159, 101c.
8 § 160&. 9 § 98 d 10 after the subject. 11 ^\ § 85. >2 J;i,
*3 ^\ with subj.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, D. 67*
with thee; thou i dost not overtake it in pursuing 2 [it],
then when thou turnest 3 away from it, it follows
theel'i — 100. A man said to the Apostle of God:
"0 Muhammed, give me thy cloak!*'; then he threw
it down to 5 him; then he said: "I do not 6 want it";
then he [Muh.] said, ''May^ God combat thee! thou
didst wish toS declare me to be niggardly, but
(and) God has not made^ me [to be] niggardly!" —
101. Whoso 10 longs for Paradise, he is unmindful of
lusts 11. — 102. That a man 22 give in alms in his life-
time a drachma (the alms -giving 12 of a man — a
drachma) [is] better for him than that ^3 he give in
alms a hundred drachmae at his death.
103. The Prophet — may God bless '^ him and save
him — said, "Whoso 10 drinketh wine in this world, [and]
thereupon do not^^ repent, he shall be forbidden iti6
in the future life." — 104. If anyone light a lamp in a
mosque, then verily ^^ the angels [they] will beg for-
giveness for him as long as^s that lamp continues ^9
kindled 20. — 105. The reed-pen [is] a tree, whose 21
fruit [is] the ideas, and thought [is] a sea, whose 21
» pronoun. 2 part. U3b. 3 § 158a. * perf. ^ (J,}. 6 Lc
Avith imperf. t % 9B d. ^ ^\ jyvith subj. 9 § 101 c.
It' § 159. II determ. 12 inf. i3 ^\ ^J^ § 148 b with subj.
1* § 11 end. 15 ^§§ 160 c, 101c. »6 § 108. i7§i6la. is § 153 6.
19 § 110. 20 part. pass. § 110. 21 § 155. 22 2l<r.
^ E*
68* TKANSLATION INTO ARABIC. D.
pearls [are] wisdom. — 106. Yerily the dead [man] and
he who 1 has no religion (he who no 2 religion to
him) [are] equal 3; and there is no 2 trust in (to)
him who 1 has no 2 piety. — 107. Every woman
that ^ has no ^ modesty [is] like a dish that has no ^
salt. — 108. If anyone's 6 [whoso, his] tattle is much,
his erring is much [also]. — 109. The anger of the
nohle [man], although his fire flare up', [is] like
smoke of woods in which [there is] no^ blackness.
— 110. To the ignorant [man] are forgiven 10 seventy 11
transgressions, ere to the knowing [man] is forgiven one.
111. Be not 12 like the needle, which 1 3 clothes
mankind whilst i^ it [is] naked, nor (and) like the wick,
which I'* gives light to mankind whilst it is consumed is.
—112. The believer does not escape from the chas-
tisement of God, until he leave off four things, lying,
and pride, and niggardliness, and evil thinking (evil
of the thinking). — 113. It is seemly for the younger
[ones] to 16 precede the elders in three places; wheni?
they travel by night ^% or wade through a stream, or
encounter horsemen. — 114. Do not drink (the) poison
out of reliance 19 on the antidote which thou hast
1 Cr*- M 111. 3 sing. 4 §§ 155, 156. 5 part.pass. § 110.
6 § 156. 7 §159. 8 indeterm. § 155. 9 §111. io§136a. »i§92 6. |
12 "3 with energ. I. § 101 b. i3 § 155. i4 § 157 a. is § 157 a, pron.
with imperf. le § us. n § 158 a. '8 § 113 a. is § 113 d
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, D. 69*
(that which [is] withi thee of 2 the antidote). — .
115. Paradise is desirous 3 of four [kinds of] folk; the
first 4 of them 5 [are] those who have fed<> a hungry
' [man] , and the second [are] those who have clothed ^
a naked [man], and the third [are] those who fast^
in 8 the month of Eamadan^, and the fourth [are]
those who read 10 the Koran. — 116. Socrates was asked,
"Why hast thou notn mentioned in thy law-code the
"punishment of him who kills 12 his brother?" He said,
"I know not that this [is] a thing which exists." —
117. Everything [it] begins small 1 3, thereupon it be-
comes great, except misfortune i'*; for it begins great,
thereupon it becomes small ; and every thing [it] becomes
cheap, when 15 it becomes abundant, excepting education;
for 16 when it becomes abundant, it rises in value.
118. After Moses had returned to the Sons of
Israel with the Thora (and along with him [was] the
Thora), they refused to i" accept it and to do according
to what [was] in it. — 119. God commanded Moses to is
fast thirty is days and to purify himself and to purify
his garments, and to come to ^ ^ the mountain, that he
might talk to him and give him the book. — 120. After
^ ^X^. 2 ^/ye, 3 part. * masc. 5 suffix in fern. sing.
6 perf. sing. ' imperf. sing. s § usq^. 9 § 128. 10 imperf.
sing. 11 § 101 c. 12 § 159. 13 § 113 5. u accus. § 151. i5 § 153 a.
16 with suflf. § 96 d. 17 ^\ with subj. is § us a. i9 jl
70*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. D.
.Damascus was taken i, much folk 2 of 3 its inhabitants
joined Heraclius, whilst ^ he was in ^ Antioch. — 121. A
certain one of the wise men said, Nothing (not) repels
the onslaught of the conquering enemy like^ being
submissive and giving way, like as ^ green plants are
safe from the vehement wind through their pliancy, be-
cause they s turn along with it, as (how) 9 it turns. —
122. They disagree 10 concerning Waraka ; and of 1 1 them
[there are] those who assert ^^ that 12 he died a Christian 1 3
and did not i4 reach the appearance of the Prophet;
and of 1 1 them [there are] those who are of opinion i^
that 12 he died a Muslim. — 123. [ye two] companions
of the prison! as to the one of you^^^ he shall serve
to his lord wine ^\ and as to the other, he shall be
crucified, then shall is the birds eat of 12 his head; the
affair is decreed i9 concerning which ye inquire! —
124. The Apostle wrote to chieftains ' 7 o^n the tribes,
inviting 20 them to become Muslims 21. — 125. A wise
[man] was asked, "What [is] the thing, which [it] is
not good that it be said, although it be 22 right?" He
said, "A man's eulogizing himself23". — 126. Woe to
1 fern. § 136 b. ly^, coll. 3 Cf^^ ^ § 157 a. 5 »_>. 6 JJu as
subject, § 145 &. 7 ^^\ li^ § 147 a. 8 sing, suff. 9 § 159. ^^o § 93 6 with
JS', §^137a. 11 cr«. i2§i47flj. I3§ii3&. i4§ioic. is § gg 6.
16 j^\ w. dual suff. § 133. ^1 indeterm. is fem. sing. § 136 c, 2.
19 § 98 h. 20 § 99 ft. 21 infin. determ. 22 ^^ § 159. 23 § 131 w. Ace.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
r
[him] who converses with lying, that he may make the
people laugh by it! — 127. This (the) world and the
future life [are] as the East and the West; when thou
approachest one of them \ thou dost recede from the
other. — 128. Fear ye God in secret 2 and do not enter
into what is not lawful for you! — 129. The devotee without
learning [is] like the ass of the mill 3, who 4 goes around
and does not 5 get through (cut) the distance. — 1 30. The
eye of hate [it] draws forth every fault, and the eye
of love [it] does not find the faults.
E. Anecdotes.
131. An astrologer was being crucified ; then he was
asked 6, "Hast thou' seen this in thy star?" Then he
said, "I saw a raising upS, however I did not 9 know
that it [was to be] upon a piece of wood."
132. A man knocked at the door of ^o ' Amr the son
of 'Ubaid; so he said "Who [is] this?" He said, "I." He
[' Amr] said, "I do not know (I am not I know 1 1) among
our friends (brothers) 12 [any] one i3, whose name [is] I."
133. (The) thieves came i^ in upon Abu Bekr al-
Rabbani, seeking i^ something (a thing), and he saw
1 dual suffix. 2 determ. 3 § 123, note. * § 155 note. & § 1576
M w. impf. 6 137 a. ' with interrog. part. Jjb. ^ 73 c end.
9 § 101 c. io J^. 11 j:iJJ § 50 and impf. '2 order § mb.
13
-\- 14 § 136 a. '5 § 157 5 imperf. alone.
72*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
them going around i in the house. Then he said, "0
young men! This which ye are seeking 2 in the night ^
we have 4 already sought 2 in the day-time, but have
not 5 found it!" So they laughed and went out.
134. It is related 6, that^ a certain one of the
polite scholars eulogized a certain one of the princes;
so he commanded [that] to him an [ass's] saddle and
saddle-girth [should be given]. So he took thems on 9
his shoulder and went out from his presence 10. Then
a certain one of his companions saw him, then said,
"What [is] this?" He said, "I eulogized the prince
with the most beautiful of my poems, then he invested
me with [something] of ^i the most glorious of his dresses".
135. Al-Mugira, the son of Suba said: No one
(not) 12 has deceived me except (another than) a youth
of 13 the sons of al-Harit. For I mentioned a woman
of theirs (of ^ them), that is I should marry her; then
he said, "0 i^ Prince! [There is] no good is for thee
in her." So I said, "And why [not]?". He said, "T
saw a man kissing 1^ her." So I turned from her; then
the young man married her. So I reproached him
and said, "Didst thou not 1 ^ inform me that thou 1 § hadst
7 imperf. 2^ with suffix. 3 § 118 a. * § gse. 5 U §160 a.
6 § 98&. 7 ^t. 8 dual suffix. 9 J^. 10 Sv>J* ^. 11 ^.
12 101 c. 13 J. 14 U^y 15 § 111. 16 imperf. i^ JJl § 101 r.
18 ^» with suff.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E. 73*
seen a man kissing her?" He said, "Yes, 1 saw her
father kissing her.*'
136. Al-Dahhak the son of Muzahim said to a
Christian, "[How would it be] if i thou wert to become
a Muslim?" He said, "I have not 2 ceased loving 3
Islam 4, except that ^ my love for wine 6 prevents me from
it." So he said, "Become a Muslim and drink it !" So
after he had become a Muslim, he said to him, "Thou
hast 7 become a Muslim, so if thou drink it s, we shall
chastise thee ; and if thou apostatize, we shall have thee
killed 9, so choose for thyself. Then he chose Islam and
his Islam was good. So he had taken ^o him by stratagem.^
137. A Bedouin stole a purse in which (it) [were]
pieces of money ' \ thereupon he entered the mosque
to pray 12 ; and his name was ^3 Moses. Then the
leader of prayer recited, "And what is that 1^ in i^ thy
right hand, Oh Moses i*^?" So he said, "By God, verily
thou [art] an enchanter!" Thereupon he threw away
the purse and went out.
138. A man claimed the (a) gift of prophecy in
the days i7 of al-Easid. So after he had appeared
i y § 102. 2 U with perf.^^ 3^§ 110 with indeterm. part.
'* § 132 end. 5 §§ 147 c, 148 «^l "^^ with foil, verbal sentence.
6 § 131. 7 § 98c with SS. s § 159 . 9 § 17, note b. »o perf.
11 indetei-m. t2 § 99 J. n ^\^. 14 fem. ^^ <^. 16 Surah 20, 18.
'" § 113a.
'\nn
74*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
before him [the Caliph], he asked him, "What [is
that] which is said of thee?" He said, "that I^ am
a noble prophet." He asked, "But what 2 indicates
the truth of thy claim?" He said, "Demand what 3
thou wilt" 4. He said, "I wish that^ thou make these ^
beardless slaves, [who are] standing ^ [there] this
moments [to be furnished] with beards 9" Then he
looked down for a while 10, thereupon he raised his
head and said, "How is it lawful that I make these ^
beardless [ones to be furnished] with beards ^ and
alter these 6 beautifully forms? but^^ I will make the
bearded ones (owners of beards) beardless in one
twinkling." So al-Easid laughed at him and pardoned
him and commanded a present [to be given] to him.
139. A person pretended to prophecy i^; then they
besought of him in i5 the presence of al-Ma'mim a
miracle. So he said, "I will cast for you a pebble into
the water, then it will dissolve". He [al-Ma'miim] said,
"We are 16 content." So he brought out a pebble
[which he had] along with him^', then cast it into the
water; then it dissolved. So they said, "This is is a
1 § 96 fZ. 2 fe^ :;^\, 3 § 5, note h. 4 perf. § 159. s ^\.
6 § 120 d; the dem. in sing., the adj. in broken pi. ' determ.
§ 120 a. 8 § 118 a. 9 indeterm. lo § 113 a. it piar. 12 § 120
fern. sing. " UilJ. i* § 22. is ^ 16 § 93 c. '-"' ^^>^ § 121a.
18 § 143.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
trick; however, we will give ^ thee a pebble of our
own 2, and let^ it dissolve!" Then he said, "Ye are
not 4 more illustrious ^ than Pharao and I am not (and
not 1 6) mightier in wisdom ' than Moses, and Pharao
did not 8 say to Moses, 'I am not 9 content with what
thou doest lo with thy staff, so that ^ i I will give thee
a staff of my own ^-, which i3 thou shalt make [into] a
serpent.'" So al-Ma'mun laughed and let him pass on.
140. It is said i^ that Abu Dulama i^ the poet was
standing 16 before al-Saffah on^? a certain day (a
certain one of the days). Then he said to him, "Ask
of me what thou dost want (thy want)!" So Abu
Dulama said to him, "I want a hunting-dog". So he
said, "Give ye it is to him!" Then he said, "And I want
a horse, onis which I may go forth to hunt." He said,
''Give ye it to him!" He said, "And a page 20, who 21
will lead the dog and hunt with him." He said, "And
give ye him a page!" He said, "And a slave-girl 22,
who 23 will prepare the game and give us to eat of it."
He said, "Give, ye him a slave-girl!" He said, "These,
1 imperf. 2 liwX-U ^. 3 imper. of. ^>^ w. suff.; then impf.
^v>^"§110. 5§63&. 6 lit ^5. 7 § iisc. 8§ioic. 9 iX
10 § 156. 11 f^j^^^ with subj. 12 ^vX^ft ^^. 13 §§ 155—56.
14 § 98 c. 15 147 a. 16 ^\S ^vith part. § 110. ^^ (3. i3 with
^.]_, which stands last, § 54 6. i9 ^ (after the verb) § 155.
20 acGus. 2t § 155. 22 accus. 23 § 155.
76*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
Prince of tlie Believers! have need of ([there is]
no 1 escape for them from) a dwelling, which 2 they
may inhabit." So he said, "Give ye him a dwelling,
which 2 will contain them !" He said, "And if they have
not (and if not is 3 to them) an estate, then wherefrom
shall they live ?" He said, "I grant ^ thee ten cultivated ^
estates and ten waste estates V He said, "And what
[are] the waste ^ [ones] Prince of the Believers?"
He said, "In which 6 [there are] no plants 7." He
said, "14 grant thee, Prince of the Believers, a
hundreds waste estates of 9 the deserts of the Sons
of Asad." Then he laughed at him. and said, "Make
them 10 all of them lo cultivated! lo"
141. It is related ii, that Harim al-Rasid had (that
to H. was 12) a black slave-girl, of ugly mien i3. Now
he scattered one day gold-pieces i4 among (between)
the slave-girls; so the slave-girls set about i^ gather-
ing i6 up the gold-pieces, whilst i^ that slave-girl stood
still, looking is at the face of al-Rasid. Some one
asked (it was asked), "Dost thou 1 9 not pick up the
1 § 111. 2 §§ 155—56. 3 ^'i p. 4 § 98c with O^.
^ § 87 a. 6 L< and prep, with pronoun at the end of the sentence.
7 § 111. 8§92c. 9^^. 10 fern. sing, n § 98c. isJ^U'^l
§ 147 c. 13 determ. § 134. i* indeterm. i5 § 136 a. 16 §§ 152
note 6, 136 d (impf^ pi. fern.) i" § 157 a with part. is § 157 h
impf. alone. i^ "^\ w. impf. fern.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E. 77*
gold -pieces?'' Then she said, "Verily what i they
seek [is] the gold-pieces, but (and) what ^ I seek
[is] the owner of the gold-pieces." Then her speech
pleased him; so he placed her near [to him] and
brought good upon her. Then the report got to the
grandees, that 2 Harim al-Rasid was enamoured 3 of
a black slave-girl. So after that had come to his
knowledge, he sent for the whole of the grandees,
until he had assembled'* them in his presence -l Then
after he had commanded the bringing in 6 of the
slave-girls, he gave every one of" them a goblet of^
chrysolite 8 and commanded it to be thrown down 6.
But they declined [doing it] in a body (as a whole 9).
Then the turn came to (the affair got to) the ugly
slave-girl; but she threw down the goblet and broke
it. So they said, "Look 10 at this girl, her name [is]
ugly, and her manner [is] ugly, and her action [is]
ugly". Then said to her the Caliph, "Why then didst
thou break 11 it"? Then she said, "Thou didst 12 command
me to break iti3; so I Avas of opinion that^^ ini^ its
being broken [lay] a detriment ^^ with regard to the
1 part. pass, with s affix. 2 ^li. 3 imperf. ^ § 152, note c.
5 ij^. 6 ^ with infinitive § 131. 7 ^ § ii9 a.
8 determ. 9 §^113 i. 10 plur. 'i 2nd. pers. fern. perf. w. sufi'.
§ 53 a. 12 § 98 e. 13 (_j with inf. i^ gj\. 15 ^. I6 § 147 a.
78*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
treasure of the Caliph, and in its not being broken
(in the lack of its being broken) a detriment ^ with re-
gard to his command ; and the detriment with regard
to the first is fitter to keep intact 2 the inviolability
of the command of the Caliph. And I was of opinion
that in its being broken [lay] my being called (qualifi-
ed 3 as 4) the crazy [one], and in keeping it intact my
called being (qualified ^ as 4) the disobedient [one]; and
the first [is] more agreeable to me than the second."
Then the grandees found ^ that^ to be beautiful of her
and praised her forS it and excused the Caliph for 9
loving her. And God knows best ([is] most knowing ^o).
1 § 147 a. 2 § 113^^ indeterm. inf. with foUowing J § 131.
3 § 61 c. 4 ^. 5 § 136 a. 6 at the end. 7 ^. 8 j^.
^ ^. 10 elative.
GLOSSARY A.
pi. = plural, see §§ 88 — 90. The numbers within parentheses after
the broken plurals refer to the forms as numbered in these sections.
Aaron ^^yS^-
Abraham f^y^^*
abstinence Jjev.
Abu Bekr al-Rabbani ^1
Abu Dulama JuoSlj -j|.
abundant see much.
^ accept (to) JuJ> mpf. a.
^ acquire (to cause to) ^^^.^
IV with two accus.
^ act well (to) jj-wwL^ IV.
action J^ii. See also bring,
address (to) ^^i^. III.
affair ^|.
after, after that conj. O
§ 98/-.
i ^
after prep. v^dJla-
agreeable to elat
with J I.
aid (to) ^Lft w^<?. • IV
with ace.
'All :Ai.
^ all Jl5^ w;27A determ. noun
or suffix § 119 &.
alms (to give in) ^k•tX-o
F w'iY^ ^ of the gift.
along with prep. Ijo.
already <i5 § 98^.
alter (to) X^. med. ^ II.
although ^r^ § 159.
^among ^.
ample «^L e/«/. § 63 b.
80*
Glossary A.
\
■Amr .w4^ § 90/2.
^and
y
9^0
"^ angel J^p/.RjLcUi) (28).
9 ^ ^
anger ^^i.
9--
animal (domestic) iU^^^
i?/. jLSUi (25).
9o ^
X another than ^^£, w?^^ /b/-
lorving gen.
answer (to give) to s»>L^
X med. . with J.
antidote ,kLj*o.
Antioch iu^^UaJJ.
any J^ (i?r^;?.)» cf. § 141.
apostatize 3^ i^///.
apostle J«.^s.
appear (to) J^aX).
appearance \y^h.
apply oneself to (to) Ua-t
VI with ace.
approach (to) C^Ji impf.
u, with ^jo.
arise (to, in the morning)
e-co JV.
as see like.
as to Uo! with nom. and o
in the apodosis.
Asad tXiwI.
ashamed (to be) ^^ X
§ 49 c.
^ask (to) JL» med, • w^27^
J. — to ask something
of JLw impf. a, with two
ace. § 38 &.'
9,^
ass >U-:^.
assemble (to) l^^a- /;wj9/. «.
assert (to) I^C mjt?/. w.
9 w ^ J
astrologer jv^sx-Lo.
at (one's house) i?r^^. tijut.
Bagdad 4>ltXij.
baggage cLio.
be, exist (to) ^^ med. y
— not to be ^jjj^ § 50.
9^o» 9^
/ beard liC^L ph JJti (3); of.
§ 71 &.
Glossary A.
81*
beardless SJo\pl JjU (1). beseech of (to) v^Jis -TO"
with ace. of person and
^ beat (to) (^wo impf. i, inf.
G o ^
^ beauty Jy^^^-:^- — beauties
\
beautiful
6 ^
(J*^*^^
fern, aL.;
elat. § 63 &. — to find
to be beautiful jj-ww^^ X.
because ^y § 147 «.
Bedouin ^cjIv^I-
before (of place) = be-
tween the two hands
of (dual stat. constr.).
beg of (to) JLw impf. a,
with ace,
beggar part. act. of JLwu.
io of thing.
best elat. of good,
better elat. of good.
between ^^^.
beverage v-ij^ pi. JlcUjc
(23).
birds CO//, wxb.
birth JjJo.
black 4>llt fern. § 74&.
blackness olll.
bless (to) ^Lo // with jLc.
body <Ll4 i'^- JLjJI (17).
X U<^ (^0. 67).
book l-jLxT.
begin, begin with (to) I Jo ^^rn (to be) tXJ^ V.
impf a, with ace.
bottom JbLLt.
beginning J^\j (lit. head), break (to) J^impf i.
believe (to) ^jjol IV; — bring (to) ^^ AL med. ^.
believer id. part. act. _ to bring an action
belly jjJaj. against one another
Sooin, Arabic Orammar.* F
82'
Glossary A.
ivjC^ VI. — to bring in
w^^ IV, — to bring
into jLa-t> IV. — to
bring out ^ y^ IV. —
to bring upon ^i IV
. with J.^.
^ brother ? f § 90 «, c : pi.
§ 88, 5; pL when =
"friends" § 88, 21.
bury (to) ^4> impf. i, inf.
So-.
but o.
by, by means of l->; in
oaths = ^ w. the gen.
§ 95 ^.
Byzantines (the) coll. »•* Jl-
Caliph XixX^.
2 ^
care ^je.
carry onwards (to) vLw
case^.A^.
cast (to) ^io mp/. «.
wr
cease (to) JK m^^. . {ft
J5^§42^, §44).
certain one (a) (joju rvith
pi. of follow, noun.
Go, G „:^ >
character (^JLa- pi. JLiil ^
(17).
G^ ^ ^
characteristic iLoiLr..
chastise (to) J<^ 2mj9/'. w.
chastisement olcX^-
cheap (to become) (jk^^s
impf. u.
chief (j^^ i?/. i>"kxi (20).
choose (to) .Us- med. ^
VIIL
G , ^
chrysolite i^^jtsLj).
Christian ^|l*aSi?/. Jbii
(29);^^^Lii.
claim (to) Uo VIII § 25,
note.
claim (^1d5.
cloak EJiSy
clot of blood xiiJLc.
Glossary A. 83*
clothe (to) Lwl5 impf. u, — to command any
^city Ljui. ^^^""^ ^"^ ^^ ^^^^' ^^-
Q with \^ and infin,
cognizant of \^ ajJLd. '"
1. X /x ^ I . rrr command yof.
combat (to) Joi ///. >
,^ . rf . ^ . companion vl^^Lo pi.
come (to) ^! tmpf, i. — s^^^ • -
to come to one's know- r
T J , • \ "T" compassionate -U^v
ledge (concerning) iJLp n^
m;?/. I., ;t;eY^ ace. (and concerning ^.
J^). - to come in ^^^^^^ ^^ (*^) U^^ ^^^^•
uponj^S/mi?/.!/,;.//;^ conquering i?«r^. act of
J<£.. — to come out X^'
from _ ;L impr. u, mih °«°^i'^«'' ^^ (*°) O^ ^'"^Z'-
" consumed (to be) . y^^
come together p^-^ VIII. ^/
\ ' .^-^
\ command (to) yo\ impf. u. contain (to) ^^ impf a.
-to command anyone ^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^ '^ ^ .^^^
to do a thing, id. with ^"^^
% a, — to be content with,
ace. and ,%t with the
^ id. with \^.
subj. — to command ^ g^ ^^
anything to be given contentment X^Lo.
to anyone, id. with J continence -l.li (pi. of
of pars, and ^ of thing, 1, Is) .
84* Glossary A.
continue (to) 1\3 med. . ad-Dahliak ^L^sUj.
§ ^^^' Damascus ^^^^(:>,
contradict (to) ^.AJLis^ ///. -, ,, ® " o In • /
^ ^ daughter o^.^ § 90^. ^
converse (to) idjtX^ r. — o^^ o^^^
to converse about, id. ^^^ r^^.^^' r^-^ §§ ^^'/'^' ^
w;27^ (^. 90 5. — one day Lo^.
counsel (to ask) .1^ med. to-day |»^il.
^ ■^' day-time ^L^. /
country jJLs pl^ JL*i (9). dead v^i^juo. ^
6- ' - - " 9^0- /
courage aLcL^iui. death ^:i>^. ^
cover up (to) JUt, impf, u. deceive (to) £.d^ impf, a.
covetousness yjol^. decline (to) mJuo VIII.
cradle J^gjo. decree (to) ^^ja3 impf. i.
crazy part pass, of \^ demand (to) a thing JLI
fem. xl. ^^P^' ^' ^^^^^ ,j^ § 38 &.
9 o ^ depend on (to) Xf^ V, with
creation ^^Jli^.. ^ ^ ^
crucify (to) ..JLa m;?/: e.
cultivated jo^fr^. act. of
desert i>\juipl JL*i (26);
^ desirous of (to be) ,^Uc/
cure %lUi.
t (to) ^
to cut open ^^impfu. detriment uah
med. . VIII, with J|or
cut (to) Jnjs impf a. — J^.
Glossary A.
86^"
devoted to (to be) viJL^ dog vIJL^; hunting-dog
\
VIII with ^.
devotee part. act. of Jux:
V.
die (to) ;:yLo med. ..
6
difficult wuj^fr'
disagree (to) v-aJLa. F7//.
disease s|3.
disgraceful
^^•
dish j»ljLb.
dislike (to) }iSimpf. a.
disobedient part. act. of early see morning.
domestic 5^e animal.
6
door [^\S.
drachma X^jt^.
draw forth (to) vo /r.
dread (to) .^Ai*. eVwp/". «.
dress ,j*^wJLoi?/. JJLjii (23).
drink (to) o^ ^'/w/?/. a.
drunk, drunken ^! JCu^.
dwelling J 5 (fern.).
dissolve (to)
(16 7we<?.
East
easy
u o --
out-
distance XiLwguO.
distinguish (to)
impf. u.
{ja-^
do (to) Jl^ impf a; Jiii
eat (to) j^j impf u; imp.
§ 38 &. — to give to
eat of i^jiis IV with ace.
pers. and ^^.
impf a (no. 139). — to education v^ 5 1.— to show
do according to Jl»x one's education ^o4>l V.
with
elder ^ri pL JxUI (23).
86*
Glossary A.
elect (to) ^A^ VIII. escape (to) L^ impf. u.
elegance JL^^. escape iX?.
enamoured of (to be) estate xilo pi. JLii (9).
eulogize (to) " Joo impf,
a.; id. VIII (no. 134).
rLcwii^ m^/. «, w^^7y^ «cc.
enchanter C^L^.
encounter
(to) ^
III.
endurance ^yo.
enemy ^"j^^.
evening (late) ^l^^.
every J.5^ /i'^Y/^ indeterm.
noun. § 119&.
enjoy oneself (to) y^ F. evidence »iIS.
entail ^b}xL>^yIV, evil (to be) ^LL we^. ^.
— to do evil id. IV. —
evil-doer part act. of
id. IV.
evil
enter (to) jLLt> impf. u.
see § 107 note.
entertain (to) ^^3 impf. i
inf. %\Ji.
entrance jJ^i\jo.
G
entrust (to) anyone with excellent J^li e/«^ § 63 b.
gD^ Z with two accus. except I^H (= "^ ^^^i) § l^^-
example slxc-
envious ^«r^. «ct o/ Juwl^s,..
equal g|^.
ere, cow/. ^^1 ju5 § 100.
err (to) JaX.c. inf. iaJLc.
G / ^
error J^Lo.
— except that au! !^^l
§ 147 c.
excepting ^^s. Lo with ace.
excuse (to) sfXs. impf i.
excuse stN.^.
GrLOSSABY A.
87*
exhort (to) iii^ impf, i, five ,jL^ §§ 91, 92 a.
exist (to) ^\Smed. ..
flare up (to) _^| F.
exit ^.
exterior Xju^Lt.
extract (to) -^ ws»» X
eye J^ /m. § 72.
face ^t:^•.
fast (to) ILi r/2^^. ..
father it § 90 a.
flight ^^■
flourishing (to make) l^i
fly (to) from ^i ^mp/l /,
with ^j^.
folk ^^'i?/. § 88, 17; pj
coll. (no. 120).
follow (to) L^ f/W/?/*. tf.
fault 44i ;>/. o^ (10). fo^'l ^"'•^ "'^^ "/■ "J^
r ?■-". , ?' /o^ for pr«p. J § 95A; conj.
favour 2tt»j p?. Jiju (3). , -
^Li§96rf.
fear (to) oL^ med. , m;,/. ^^^^^r^ ^^^^ ^ ^^.^^ ^^ ^^y_
«, § 42^. ^^^
one -.v^ impf, i, with
feed (to) ^ /F. ^ r/^ ^' ^
^ ^ r ^wo accus.
fight (to) with one another « /^ x « rri-ri- o oc
* ^ ^ force (to) wo F///. § 25
^^^ note,
find (to) J^; ^W. t, § 40a. ^^^^j^^^ «^^,^, ^^_ J^,p
(24).
fire tU.
first J.I
fit J^ ^/«^. ^^^|.
<o^
forgive (to) lit mj?/". e.
forgiving J^.
Glossary A.
forgiveness (to beg) Jls. X.
form i.yo pi J^*i (4).
four Ljjf §§ 91, 92«.
fourth IjC.
G "
friend y^^^Lo {see p. 85*).
— of God = Abraham
— intimate ^jtX^ pi.
i3UiT (18).
G "
friendly LjLdai.
from jpr^jt?. w/>.
fruit slii*.
future life see life.
gain (to make) y^^j^^S V.
G o ^
game 4Xa*o.
Go- ®
garment i^^i* pi JLxi (9).
gate lIjU.
G 05^
gate-keeper ^I^j.
gather up (to) JaJLl F///.
get to (to) ^i r/// ;f ?7^
^\. — to get through
iki* impf, a.
gift C^y^ Pl (ixL£o'(23).
5^e ^/50 prophecy.
G^ - /^
girl xjjLc^. -^
give (to) Ulc IV with two /
ace. — to give way inf.
'J 9 9
glad see tidings.
Q ^ y G ^o"^ .
glance yc^^^ pl. JLiil (17).
glorify (to) ^a^ //.
glorious y^\j elat. § 63 &.
glory oli.
go round (to) "^li med. ..
— to go away v^icj
mj!?/. «. — to go on
^^ /m/?/. /. — to go
out " li impf, u. —
to let go J^^. IV.
goblet " ji.
godxJI; Godklj(,byGod /
gold-piece ^LL^> p/. § 90/:.
Go^ /
good noun and adj. oc&- /
Glossary A.
89*
elat. id. — to be good
^^..ww^^ impf. u. — to
make good ujLb med.
IV.
\
government
governor
a
or
r
grandee dLU pi. § 88, 10.
grant (to) Jai IV with
two accus,
grateful (to be) ICco impf. u,
great 1ul5. — to be, be-
come great ySimpf, u.
green (fresh) Zj^y
greeting j^^Lww.
guard (to) ^L.o med. ^;
inf. ^yO.
Go "
guest <wft-yo.
hand J^ § 90 r.
al-Harit ^dj.lij.
Harun ar-Rashid
u^;
Li
hate ij6JU'
have (to), 25 expressed by
the subject in the dative
{with J) followed by the
object in the nom. (as
G
JLo aJ he has money);
occasionally a form of
^.IjTto be stands before
the subject (as ^ ^S
6
JLo he had money). —
not to have either as in
the last example^ but
with ylJj (§ 50) instead
of ^LT ( jl; iJ ^0
or y with following ob-
ject (§ 111) and dative
of subject (aJ JLo ^).
he yD § 12 a. — he who
^% 14&.
G^^
head (j^ty
hear (to) i.»_w wz/?/. «^ m/.
G " ^ ^ 5 J
heart ,,^' ;?/. J^jii (10).
90^
Glossary A.
^1
I ^
heaven eU^ pL
§76&.
heir part. act. of o^. pi
^j
V
(6).
hell-fire jllll
help (to) loi impf, u. —
to demand help of ^Lt
med. . X with to-
Heraclius J^'jiJ-
high ^i.
holy s^^ war.
hope for (to) Li^C mp/. t^,
with ace.
horse iblt^.
horsemen co//. JuL&..
house v::^.
how k-il^T
however ^"^^ with follg.
verb.
humhle (to be) «^. VI.
hungry pat^t. act. of cL^
med. ,.
hundred ZLq §§ 91, 92 c.
hunt (to) 3Lo med. ^. —
to go forth to hunt id. V.
hunt, chase S^J^. ^
hurry (to) J^^3^ //.
o
al-Husain ^JL^ij.
hypocrisy (religious) ^L*.
hypocrite part. act. of
I LSI.
///.
Ignorance jLg^.
ignorant^ «r^. «c^. o/'J^:^..
idea ^axi ;?/. JutLAx>(23).
if ^1^ § 159; in hypothe-
tical clauses jj with the
perf. — if anyone ^
§ 159.
6
illustrious Jl-x-X-.:^^ elat.
§ 63 &.
imperfection inf. of v:ijU
m^</. . VI.
in ;?r^;?. J,.
incumbent on (to be) C^^
impf i, with J^ § 4:0 a.
Glossary A.
91-
indicate (to) J3 impf. u, Islam |»Xaa/^I.
Israel Juollll
Tvith Ji.
s
indication JlJ5.
9 - ^
indigestion |V*wo.
inform (to) wxi*. /F.
inhabit (to) j>XIw impf, u.
inhabitants Jkfl>|.
inquire concerning (to)
^Ci ^ Tvith ^^.
intelligent part. act. of Joseph
Jalal ad-din ^ JJI J!^^.
Jerusalem jj^JuLlj.
Jews (the) coll. ^y^\.
join (to) ^^^X impf. «, with
Jonah
G
interior soww-
interrupted (to be) JiaS
VII.
intimate see friend.
into prep, ^^.
9 9 9
justice Jj^.
keep from (to) iLc e^^j^/*.
«, w;27^ «cc. «/iJ jjjo.
keep intact (to) ^b /F.
invest (to) anyone with kill (to) JH impf u.
lU impf a, with JS kindle^ (to) ji^ impf i.
of pers. and ace. of thing, king viiXo.
G . ® " -r o^
inviolability xiLL. kingdom xX-U^o.
invite to (to) Lij em;?/*, kiss (to) Jwo //.
w, w/^A J I. knock (to) at the door of
92*
Glossary A.
^^5 impf. u, with J^s.
of per s, and ace. of door.
know (to) IJL& impf a;
oli imp, i (no. 132),
(^rS impf. i (no. 73).
knowing ^«r^. act. o/,JLft;
elat. § 63 b.
Koran ^jLiiJI.
lack ^Jl£.
lamp ^tlw.
laugh (to) dl^ x/wjt?/. «. —
to laugh at id. with ^^
— to make laugh id.
IV with ^j of means.
law-code ibLwCi.
lawful (to be) Jl^ impf. i,
lead (to) 5Li med. ..
leader see prayer,
learn (to) JL& K
learned *jJLi pi- i^^
(20).
learning IjL^.
leave, leave off (to) d^i
impf. u.
let (to) c Sm impf a ^ 4:0 a.
liar (to declare anyone to
be a) \^dS 11.
liberal ^^ .
lie, tell a lie (to) o ji^
impf. i; inf l-jJo.
life (the future, next world)
G ^^
life-time sll^.
light (to) ^ IV. — to
give light to :&Lo /we<?.
/F, w?7^ J.
like (like Sis)prep. \J ; conj.
^^(w^Y^?;^.^^^^.),^^! U5'
(wo;??, sent.).
G^^
likeness Jouo.
little JoJi.
live (to) yi»li we^. ^.
living ^.
G
long Ju^.
Glossary A
long for (to) (jLc med. .
f OP THE
( O-NIVERSi:
VIII, with j^.
look at (to) 3h^ impf. w,
with J|. — to look down
jV*Jo IV, — to look into
Jjo VIII, with ^ § 25,
note.
lord
^)
love, fall in love with (to)
C^K^ IV, with ace,
* s ,
love v^^w:^.
loving inf. ^tx^-
lower (to) ija^ impf. u.
lust XlcT. — lusts cjtl^^-/.
antith. to woman (nos.
2, 43, 102), § 90 e.
manifest j9«r?. act. ^U
mankind coll. ^J»\1}\.
manner a^..
marry (to) ^K wee?. ^ F.
Mary j^p.
meat li.
Mecca JUCxi.
medicine vl^^.
meet (to) ^aJ ?>wp/. a,
mention (to) Sb impf u,
mien usjuo. "•
^ 6 —
make, make to be (to) Joti- niighty jva^ e/«t § 63&. .
impfaJwithtwoaccus.). .„ s^ ? , <:
^^ mill Rjya^Lb.
-to make (poetry) Jli ^.^^^^^ ^^ ^^ ^^ ^
y
G, ^^
med.
malady iLsIL
al-Ma'mun
jii^o--
G G
man ^. pi. JLii (9); gli
impf. u, with ace.
G^ o ,
miracle s-l^oo.
misfortune iUx.^
j^Lii (25).
;?/.
94*
Glossary A.
modesty sLCi- Muzahim *^lwo.
moment (this) &^LwJt. naked ^jLjv^ /"<?»«• x
G ^ Go
money JU. — piece of name ^^l
money *j6vt> ^/. JuUi narrow (^jyo (= (3aa-o)
(23).^
month w^-co.
morning (early) hIXj.
-^ * G ^
morrow, to-morrow Jlc.
Moses ^yjo.
G o ^
mosque Jk:^i\^.
most ^to^. o/* much.
mountain JJ^.
much .u>^ dat, § 63&. —
to be much, abundant
yj:S^impf. u. — to make
much J:S^ IV.
al-Mugira s^Ai^JI.
Muhammed tX^.^.
G ^ ^
music cUa«.
Muslim (to become a) JLw
/r. — Muslim id. part
act.
elat.
G o-r
nature «AJb pi
^8, 9.
near (to place) ^Jj //.
needle 5^ I.
neighbour vLi.
G
niggardly Jusi. — to de-
clare anyone to be n.
J^ //.
niggiardliness JisJ.
G ^
night J.lf.
noble Lw^ — nobles coll.
not see § 150.
now conj. o.
nutriment \:^Ji.
0! Li § 85; «/50 L^J.
obedient to (to be)
impf. u, with J.
Glossary A.
95^
observe (to) yxs, VIII,
occasion (as a conse-
quence) (to) v^*^ IV,
with two accus.
Omar S^,.
on acount oi prep. J.
one as pronoun or adj,
jLfe.!. fern, H ; with
pron. suffix d<^\»
only \^\.
onslaught lyXi.
open (to) ^iSl impf. a;
inf. ^j3.
opinion (to be of) ^cl>
impf. a, § 49 &.
or ^|.
other lil.
overtake (to) d.t> IV.
owner v«^^Lo pi. JLiil
(17).
9 ^ *
page boy j.^.
Paradise xii|.
pardon (to) Lit impf. u^
with JLc.
9 ^^
part (= some) (jdjtj
(§ 133).
pass on (to let) vU.. med.
, IV.-
pearls coll. J J.
pebble x l ^ ^ -
people Joel.
perhaps Jmj § U7 a.
perish (to) viiLe «;wj9/*. i;
— to cause to p. id. IV,
9 "^ o
person (man) ^Lwol.
Pharao ^^^^^i.
9 -^
physician v^aaaIs.
pick up (to) ia£f 2W/?/. M.
piece, see § 73 c.
piety xSl^.
place (occasion) ^j-bLo pi.
j^Ui (23).
place (to) «^r /^wp/. «.
§ 40 «.^
i
96'
Glossary A.
plants coll viLo {masc). (§ 83). direction of
please (to) ._*jS.£ IV. — prayer jUUs. — leader of
to be well" pleased with ^^^^^^ o^j '
^; impf.^ a. rvith ^. ^^^^^j^ ^^ (to)'^iii *»,p/.
pleasure » jj pi § 76. „^ ;„,7^ ace.
pliancy ^!^. precede (to) ^J3 V.
poem, poetry^ p/. JUit prepare (to) ^^ /F.
(17).
poet v^Lii.
s
poison Luw-
^
polite scholar ^-ft^Jo i?^.
i^Cii (20).
poor ^jOii?^. :^^Ui (20).
possessor .j, fern, ^^^fj
§ 90/.
poverty Jii.
power »y>.
praise (to) tX^.^ 2m;?/. «.
praise (God) ^3.
pray (to) ^Lo //.
prayer sl^Lo (= S^Xo
§ 43 note) pL c^l JLo
presence Hw^a^s^.
present (gift) aULo (iw/l o/
preserve (to) ib^L impf, a,
prince ^| J9/. i^^Lxi (20).
prison jj.^Ua/.
G o^
promise Jcc«.
prophecy (gift of) S^. —
to pretend to prophecy
Li F.
prophet ^xi i?/.. i^^^il-
(18).
prostrate oneself (to) tX-S^
impf. u.
Glossary A.
97*
protect (to) (jj-Ca. impf. u, i,
provide for (to) ^Cr impf.
u, with two accus.
punishment ibjJic.
purify (to) . (^ U //. — to
oneself id V.
purse 'iyc.
pursue (to) «<o VIII.
^ y ^
put (to) Jl*^ impf. a. —
to put off till ^T //.
with J.
qualify (to) inf, Uu^y
raise, raise up (to) iiT
impf, a\ inf. iif.
Ramadan ^LdJoC.
ar-Rashid Joui J|.
reach (to) J.o IV.
read (to) |^- impf. a.
recede from (to) JoJ impf.
recite (to) I J> emp/. a.
reed-pen jJLj.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.*
reflection inf. of Jo V.
refuse (to) ^| impf. a. —
to r. to do, id. with ^ \
and subj.
regard, with r. to ^.
Q ^ ^
regret ^.Jo.
relate (to) ^J^ impf. i,
related to v^^j^j with ^jo.
reliance inf. VIII^ see rely.
religion ^^t>.
rely on (to) J^ F7//, w^Y^
j^ §40^.
repel (to) Ss impf. u.
repent (to) CjLS med. ..
repentance ixif Ju.
report wxi^.
reproach (to) I^f /»«<?. ..
restore (to) I* /w^^. . /F.
restrain from (to) ^JS'impf.
M, w;?Y^ ace. and ^s,. —
to r. one's self from id.
with ,.
^.
98*
Glossary A,
resurrection X/>Lajj.
return to (to) i^T impf, i,
with J, I.
right (due) (ii.
G
right, right hand jjj^^j-
rise in value(to) ^£ mjo/. w.
root oiajww.
routed (to be) j»yc F//.
rule (to) (j^l-w w^^. ..
run races (to) ^aaw F///.
saddle (of an ass) s^Oyj-
G -^
— saddle-girth |»lya..
safe (to be) IX^ impf. a.
as-Saffah ^LaaaJI.
salt ^J^.
save (to) jvJLw //.
say (to) JU w^^. .. — to
say of anyone, id. with
^Ji.. — to s. to anyone,
id. with J.
scatter (to) yJij imp/', u, i.
sea
7^-
second ^\J.
secret^ pi. JL*i! (17).
G ''
security j^U^.
see (to) f^Kimpf. a, § 49 ^^.
seedy part. pass, of ^^ia..
seek (to) JJlL «>w^/. w. —
to seek for one's self,id. V.
seemly (to be) ^u VII.
seize (to) j^j impf. u.
self
LT-^
12^.
send (to) JLws /F; for
uA-Lb.-; with v^.
serpent j^Loti'.
G ^
servant (i. e. of God) JcLe
i?/. jlii (9).
serve wine to (to) ^A^
impf. 2, with two ace.
set about (to) *Lo ^^^. ^,
with impf § 99 note a.
seventy ^yxl^.
shadow JlIo.
Glossary A.
99^
shift (to) \S Jc impf. i.
u- -: .-
ship iLUJ^Mj'
s -
shirt (j>£LA4J'.
shoulder ^^aXf.
sign abl pL § 76.
9 o ^
silent (to be) inf. o^^^.
s
sin iL^jda^.
singing (art of) eLIc.
sit with (to) ;j-J^ ///,
with ace.
Size ^ucb.
slave J^JUx ;?/. Ja^Uxi
(27).— slave-girl IlLi
i?/. J^l^^ (24).
sleep, go to sleep (to) llj
med.^, impf, a; part. act.
pi § 88, 9.
small ^x*^. — to become
s.
smoke ^^LL^^
snow Jo.
so conj. o-
2^^/*. «.
sober part. act. of L^.
Socrates Jc|Ju«.
solicitude a^jD.
G o
son ^\ § 90 & (pluralis
sanus with names of
tribes).
songkxA.ft|j9/.^Ul(jLtLi!).
So?
sorrow ,^y^.
spare (to) "^ X^ § 49 c.
speech Jy>.
spend (to) (o/ time) inf.
spirit ^^y
staff L^.
stand (to) Ili m^^. . ; jo^/r/.
act. pi. § 88, 9. — to
stand still v^I impf. i.
Gor
star 1^.
start off (to) a^y V. w. JL
stay (to) *Li» fw^^. ^ J^-
steal (to) iVv.! //w;?/*. /.
G^
stratagem idU^.
100*
Glossary A.
stream JlLw.
strength J..^.
'^0 9
Su'ba iU*^.
w
submissive (to be) J<> F.
subsistence ^\*.
sufficiency xjIa5T
supplication g.Lcj.
surely J (after J^p.
tail v^j(]>.
r ^ *
take (to) tXis'l /m;?/. w. —
(of a city) ^J3 ^Vw/?/". a,
to t. away ,.^^6 impf. a,
with ^^. — to t. hold of
talk to (to) ^)6 II, with
ace. — to t. to one an-
other, id. V,
talk !^^
tattle JaXf.
teach (to) JLc //, w?7^ /wo
accus.
ten ^xi^ §§ 91, 92 «.
than J^ § 63 Z?.
that pron. dljo § 13 c.
that (in order that) J with
subj, § 100.
that CO/?/. J. I (before a
verb) § 148&- I (before
a noun) § 147 a.
that which L;c.
then o.
thereupon ^.
thief Jj pL j^ (10).
thing g^ p/. JLiil (17)
but without the nuna-
tion illcil.
think (to) Jyh impf u^ with
two accus.; inf. j^io.
third XJL5 § 93 a.
thirty ^^j^'^i §§ 91, 92&.
tliis Ij^ § 13&.
I.
Thora (the) sKyJ
those who ^ § 14 b.
thou cioj.
thought Jo.
Glossary A. 101*
transitory j9ar^. act of ^i.
travel (to) TLl med. ^.
treasure iUjyii^.
tree sl^Ai.
tribe IjLJi?/. JoLii (25).
trick xJUa*..
three ^^i §§ 91, 92«.
through (by means of)
prep. c->.
throw away (to) ^J m;?/*. ^rust IbUl
2. — to throw down ^ij
/F.
tidings, to give glad tid-
ings to anyone of a
thing yj^ 11^ with ace.
truth (VJco.
of per s. and ^^.
time^Uo\. — (proper) time
y
title-page ^!y^.
to {direction) prep. Jl^;
(52^w o/* i?/?e dative) J.
turn (to) JUo /w^^. ^. —
to turn from ^yS, Vl-,
with Jvi. — to t. away
{act.) t>v impf u. — to
t. away from {neut.) J^
//, with ^j^.
twinkling kla
'Ubaid Juycfc.
9 ^ G
Ugly ^.o A»2. &— .
tongue ^LlJi?/.xi*i!(l^)- unbeliever j3«H.<zc^. o/^S"
towards prep. Jl^, i??. § 76.
transgression Z^b pi. uncover (to) UiJiSirnpf. i.
J^Ai (10). understanding J^iir.
102*
Glossary A.
unmindful of (to be) ^Lww. waste loti fern, k-I-. — to
F, with ^j^. render waste lj^m^
until conj. ^J^^ generally water %}uo § 90^.
with subj. (cf. § 152 c). ^^qH ^ '
upon prep. iV-i.
used to ^JS med. . with West
follg. impf. § 99 c; sw&y.
gen. betw, ,X^ and impf.
value k^'.
vehemence HcX^.
vehement sju^\j^.
verily ^^ §§ 147, 96 d.
9 -- " 9-^ -^ ^
viand ^ilsuipl.'il^QLAi^'^),
9 ^
violent JotXw.
wade through (to) ^L^
med, y with ace.
want (to) ok /wc<?. * -^F.
want ali.Li.
//.
well-pleased see please.
9 o^
whale (cyj^*..
what rel. inter r. Uo.
when rel. interr. Joo ; (?owy.
iSt § 158.
where?
^.
j. — from
where, whence ^^o I ,j^.
. *-
which rc/a^. |^ jJI.
g :f^
whichever ^| § 14 c.
while (a) aLtLL.
whilst cf. § 157.
who re/. i^jJI; interr. ^.
war (holy) m/. JLii o/" whoever,whoso J^§§14&,
J^ III. ' 159-
Waraka xjj
whole
V
C^'
wash (to) JJ^ mjE?/*. e. why? IJ; why then? |j UJ.
wick &JLj j.
wickedness wCu.
will (to) ^L*o med.
wind ^» /(?/». § 72
wme w4.i*.
wisdom aUX^.
Glossary A.
word ^ii5T
103*
work Jl^x /?/. JLiil (17).
world (the, this) UjjJI.
2 ^
worst wco § 63 note.
write to (to) .^^^impf. u,
with j|.
wise jCxXi j3/. i^Jti (20). wrong (to, to do) Ijjb'
wish (to) oL med. % IV- impf. i\ inf, jJUb.
with mja (in company w.) ;
(^ (in union w., by
means of),
without jj^ {fvith gen),
woe to! ^J Jo..
wolf uaj6.
Yazid
5id Juwj.
O >0^ -'
ye (wGI.
9> --
year SUm* pi' § 90 /».
woman 51^^!^, slw^o.
l?/wr. gllj § 90 A
yes jUj.
young wuLi ^^^^- § 63^'
pL Ji^LiT (23).
young man ^ci p/. ,j-A*^
(21).
9 > 9 -T '
wood 4>^. — piece of youth *^L^.
o ^ 9 o^
Zaid jL>\.
wood i
iL/uUKS*"
104"
Glossary B.
GLOSSAEY B.
I part, interr, often before
the first half of an
alternative question.
4>l St. c.^\{% 90 «) father.
" ^^
Jot impf. e to stay, remain.
** ^-^
Ijkjl adv. always, for
ever; with neg. never.
^^1 impf. i to run away.
^•| impf. i; c. ace. come,
come to. c.acc. p. eti^
r. to bring, to give
somethg. to some one.
JiS impf. w to make an im-
pression.
wi'l pi. xlil trace, sign,
mark.
tX^I/em. ;^J^|^ one, some
one.
P (§90c)i?/i^prother,
neighbour.
tXii.| mj»/. u to take, to
sieze, catch hold of.
VIII io make; w. 2 Ace.
to adopt, regard (as).
^ia.1 //to put off, postpone.
^1 the last, second,
end.
J . -».o^
ijbJ^ I the next world.
^ oi
^i^l A»?. ^^^
f other.
7^
^j wages, hire, reward.
lOl V to conduct one's
self with propriety.
^o\ good breeding,
politeness, education,
polite reproof.
Glossary B.
105^
sTft^l vessel for holding ^JojCw^II (theArabs haye
treated the first two
letters of the name as
water, made of skins.
j^4>| // to pay (tribute).
31 lo! see! when lo!
Ijl conj, when, if; adv.
lo! see!
the article) Alexander.
ibstNJjCw!^!! Alexandria.
'^^bMmpf. «; c. Jpers. et ^f ^he root, the chief
^ ret to allow, permit.
X to ask permission.
^61 pi. ^13! ear.
thing.
(3i!jt?/. ^Ul region, di-
strict.
^!,'jhV- /permission, ^l P^- i^J*^' (xXTfxa)
^6f /rto injure, molest. ^^S^^^' ^^^^^^^
.0.511 Jordan, the Jor-
dan district.
jmjjJUoUiavnI Aristotle.
(^ J /<?/w. earth, land, coun-
try, ground.
G ^^
^Ll! foundation.
"I mj9/*. 2 to tie , bind,
take captive.
yXAW
I a captive.
J^l Fto gather strength,
become confirmed.
Ji^f impf. u to eat; to get
to eat.
/// to eat with some
one.
G o :^
J^ I inf. I eating.
^ ' ^^
J^Li various kinds
of food.
y I j9firrf. composed of ^\
and 5^.
106^
Glossary B.
^1 (== ^ ,.3!) except *| part, inter r, or.
(§151).
^4Jl7m.^7(§14«) he
that ; whoso, who^which.
oiJ! mpf. a to become
familiar with . . .
VIII io be on intimate
terms , familiarly ac-
quainted (with).
v^li?/. ol^l! or o^JI
thousand.
o J |intimate,familiar .
IJI ?mp/*. « to feel, suffer
pain.
s *
^jJI painful.
icM j^/. x^l a god.
'isjSs ex jf ^^ J| (the
true) God, Allah. Ju..ft
2jJ| name of a man.
^4ijfO God!
^\ prep, (§ 96 &) towards,
in the direction of, to,
till, ns far as.
ll impf. u, to direct one's
course by something.
*l i?/. cjL^I mother.
Gai
xx>| the people of a
(particular) religion,
nation, people.
yiS impf. w, c. ace. p. et o
r. to order, command.
Go^
yoS command, power;
affair, matter. v^^Li
1^1 commander.
it commander,
prince.
jj.jax)^l v^i the prince
of the (true) believers,
commander of the faith-
ful = the Caliph.
^joi impf. a^ c. ace. to be
safe from . . .
IV io believe.
'ka\ pi. fUl female slave.
iujo|Umayya(man's name).
Glossary B. 107*
^t (§ 100, 148&) that. J^lA/w. J^l ^rst (determ.
"tm 147, U8a) that. «^^^ beginning.)
^^ (§§ 159, 160) if. y^lgen.andacc. J^jr.^O.
^1 (§147) lo! truly, verily ^f^«^^. where? whither?
(often untranslatable). ^ o^ - o
-^ • ..nt lii whither? ,.*jo
bl pron, (§ 12) I. ^V "^^ ^
^o-^ o^ ,j-?i (from) whence?
^\pron.; /'em.^\,iho\i. where?
juoi //WJ3/*. « to have fami- s^^
^ " abl sign, revelation,
liar intercourse with. '\,^
S|-*', „ s,- Lflj I (§ 85) particle of ex-
,.,llol CO//. iK.b man. '■^- ^^ ;' ^
^ J^ ^ ^ clamation.
"^ ^^^®- ^^i?ra;?. in, on, at; with, by
l^l part, (composed of means of; for (of price),
Jt and li) only (refers ^y (ij, ^^ths). v^ ^ l5l
in this sense usually to , • ,, ^
- , ^ lo! there was . . .
last word of sentence), ,
but. J^L/ Babylon, Babylonia.
a-f-
^i>^
^Svart whence? how? ^^ i^^pf, ^ to be brave,
.^A^l V c. ^ rei to equip courageous.
one's self, to be prepar- J,t courage.strength,
ed (for any thing).
Jjcl coll. one's kinsfolk,
family, people (cf.§ 133),
power.
y^^^ sea, great river.
inhabitants. Ijo impf. a to begin.
108*
Glossary B.
J Jo //c ace, to exchange,
alter, change.
X c. ace. et i^ to take
something in exchange
for (something else).
" o impf. a to go away,
cease.
w.^1 //. c ace. pers. et \^
r. to tell some one
something as a piece of
good news.
IAj or yj^ to glance,
perceive; to understand
something thoroughly.
..«^u
^ 0^
pl >l-oj( glance,
intelligence.
^UT to come too late.
IV to delay.
X to find that sthg.
comes too late.
^^jaj belly; bottom (of a
valley).
iUkj repletion.
^^\.i pL ^j^\y^ the
lowest part; the heart
or secret thoughts of
a person.
\^xl impf. a to arouse,
awaken; to send.
tX*j impf. u or J^*j impf.
« to be distant, far off.
VI to be far distant
from each other.
(\iu prep, after, after
the departure, death
of . . . tX«j ^A after
the death of.
(jfljL? one (§ 133), part,
portion; some (of).
(jd*j impf. a io hate.
(jcju hatred.
G ^ o
iLo.xj «^-, state of
being hated,
il-oju hatred,
-ib mjt?/*. 2 to seek, strive.
Glossary B.
109^
VII to be necessary, ^b impf. i to build.
^iL inf.
meet, beboove.
J^lJb Hippocrates.
^^ impf, a to remain, re-
main over, continue in
life.
126) pi sUll son.
kJb!, ciL (§ 90 daugbter.
il«jL.2^ p/. (wL^ animal, a
gUj m/. /'^^ brute beast.
Jo .j! Abii Bekr, name ^->Ui>/. (o^l gate, door,
of the first Caliph. OLOi?/.oLAj!,v:iUj house,
^^ /m;?/: I to weep. family. ^Q| vL^lS
JJLj i?/. 4>^ country, vil- treasury.
lage(plur.co//.country). £Lj ^'wpA «* <^o sell, buy.
kJLj impf. w, c. <?cc. to reach,
attain to; to come to
one's ears.
(j^g^AAJL Bilkis, queen of
Sheba.
^ /mj?/. w to try, afflict.
^j j9«r^ certainly; nay,
on the contrary.
*.j (^vT Lij) wherewith? by
what means?
Itj^ inf. I selling, sale.
^Lj med. ^
IV to be evi-
dent.
^ (§ 114) prep.
" ^ - - "-
between. . • • ^ lXj ,j^
prop. bet. the hands of=
before, in presence of.
Qaj cowy. with a nom.
sentence: while, whilst.
iLui evidence, proof.
■\ 3 r; A ' -"^
no*
Glossary B.
cy«jLj> masc, coffin.
vj^' ^to be well arranged,
be in good order.
i-o impf. a, c. ace, to follow.
IV c. 2 ace. to make
sthg. follow, to attach
sthg. to, some one.
VIII to follow, en-
deavour to aquire.
.ii^* prep, under. J^
ci^' id.
ioli> earth, morsel of
earth.
<djS impf. u to aban-
don, leave, give up,
omit.
^"y-^S (of. ^S^) fern. (or.
^ Jii* mse.) piety.
dUb /m. (§ 13 c) that
(woman).
iX-^ij i?/. 5 jy5^' pupil,
disciple.
Ij* impf. i to be finished.
*Uj> perfect.
HwiJj wow?. i/w?Y. a date.
xj^^xJI (§ 2 ^ note.) the
Torah (five books of
Moses).
TLj X to ask help in se-
curing (blood) revenge.
v:!^' impf u to be or stand
firm, to be fixed.
IV to fix, establish.
c:olJ ^/«^. o^Ajil con-
stant, fixed, firm.
J^' impf. «, to lose a child
{ace.) by death (said of
a mother).
S ^ - G^ ^ ^
^d>^S* /<?m. xj^' three.
SwwLc o^* thirteen.
j^* flfffy. thereupon, then.
^o /wijo/". 2 to bend.
X to make an ex-
ception of.
Glossary B.
Ill
^^^• garment.
jiL^strength of character,
s
JotX^ new.
G * -
^tXa- kid.
;J,J^ VIII to draw to
oneself.
Z^ impf. u to drag, pull.
^l:i /mp/'. 2 to run, flow.
h^\l.plf^ (§89)
female slave, young girl.
island ; 5^j;»i I Meso-
potamia.
^Ci. impf. i to reward,
requite.
///to pray God to re-
quite some one for sthg.
i\Zj^ the body.
Jui^ to place ; make, pre-
pare; c. 2 ace. to make
to be sthg.; to begin
(§ 99 note a).
oii impf. i to become dry.
LI^ impf. u to be rude.
^Lfti- inf. tyranny.
j^ impf. i to be great,
powerful, exalted.
G
JuJLs^ great, illustrious,
sound (in judgment).
sjy^ might, majesty.
jjlJLi impf. i to sit down ;
c. J to give an audience.
/// c. ace. to sit down
by some one, sit with.
^yX^ inf. sitting.
(j,*A.^ P^' iLwwi.:^
companion one sits
with.
G „ .
a live coal.
'r^
c^
impf. a to bring to-
gether, gather, collect.
with 2
c^V^
to bring
about a meeting of two
parties, to have them
both come into one's
presence.
112'
Glossary B.
(also without ».^U cind
with ^1) to decide upon,
resolve to do sthg.
VIII to come together,
to assemble.
4tx^:^ the whole, all
(\Ju^ as ace. of con-
dition: all together).
xiUi a number,
party (of people).
J^ to be beautiful.
G
JcA^^ beautiful,hand-
some, elegant, kind.
\^ impf. u to cover over,
conceal.
G 55^ "
&a:5. p/. ^Ul^ garden
of trees, Paradise.
.Lv^ interior, heart,
soul, character.
O^
coll. demons, Jinn.
-L^ belonging to the
demons, a demon.
SS^ VIII to avoid.
v^s.^ Side, v^aa:^ ^
in comparison with.
'i\\jss. pi. -y^^J^ corpse,
funeral bier.
(y^^sb^impf. a io take trouble
about sthg., exert one's
self.
/// to fight, do battle,
esp. w. unbelievers i. e.
non-Moslems.
Jl^ impf. « to be igno-
rant. xJL^ inf.
G G a ,
J^Ls^ pl. J^:5. igno-
rant.
klJLioLi. the state of
ignorance, i. e. (pre-
islamic) heathenism.
(i^^ hell.
LjLi. rned. . IV c ace.
Glossary B.
113^
pers. et J[ r. to give or
grant an answer, an
audience to some one,
listen to, promise, con-
cede sthg.to one, comply
with his request.
JTto hear, in the sense
of answer (a petition).
5Li med. . to be generous.
vLi med. . c. ace. to pass
by.
Ill c. ace. to pass
beyond, exceed, trans-
gress.
cLi med. . to be hungry.
Jti.^ {nom. unit. §
73 c) hunger.
^L^ med. 1^, c ace. to come,
c. o to bring.
l^ inf.
(jioy^ army.
J^ IV to love.
J^'*^ love.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.*
{elat. v^il e.
jl j9ro ^«//2;. pers.) pi,
ilA^I dear to some
one, beloved, friend.
aU^ love, friendship.
^-c^ii Abyssinian.
LLi. zm/?/. w c. ace. pers. et
<^ re« to present some
one with sthg.
^a^ until; so that; for
the purpose of; {some-
times = finally).
^^ impf. u to make the
pilgrimage to Mecca.
aLsx^ pL ^^3L^ the
pilgrimage to M.
x^^ J9/. ^^ good
reason or excuse.
,JXs3^ «>wjt?/. « to prevent,
exclude.
(^L^3o&. curtain, veil.
H
114*
Glossary B.
G -
s^s^L^ porter, gate-
keeper, chamberlain.
c^cXi. mpf. u to be new.
II c. ace, pers. to in-
form, relate.
Zto newly adopt, get
sthg. new.
ootX^ a story, nar-
rative (applied esp. to
the traditions respect-
ing Muhammed).
rjk.^ impf. a, c. ace. vel ^jq
to be on one's guard
against . . .
s " ^
s jcs. inf.
i^d<^ inipf. a to be clever,
skilled.
" ^ (^^ly^)mp/'. atoheiree.
/// to make war
Y:^pi-y iZ^i free,noble.
upon, fight with some
one.
VI to carry on war
with each other.
51i impf. i to strive eager-
ly after.
O^^ eagerness, zeal,
anger.
,j^^ // c. ^s, r. to
incite (to), stir up (to).
^•"i IV to burn, singe.
^ij"^ // to move, to stir
up, agitate.
I'i impf. u, c. Js£. to be
forbidden to one, to be
legally prohibited one.
// to pronounce un-
lawful, declare to be for-
bidden, to prohibit.
'\-y^ to be troubled, sad.
IV to trouble, make
sad.
,^2,^^^ impf. u to reckon.
*.1jLLs^ reckoning.
jol^ impf u to envy.
JwwLi impf u to be beauti-
ful, good.
IVio do good.
Glossary B.
115*
X to find to be good.
^j.A*-,-s- beauty, good-
ness.
elat.
beautiful, good.
G -- --
jvCi,^ eo//. suite, servants,
escort.
^.^di. mj9/. w, c. ace. pers.
vel J<£. to be present
with or at.
IV to bring forward,
esp. to bring before a
sovereign or ruler.
VIII c. ace. to come
upon one (said of death).
Pass, to be near to
death.
jia. impf. u to surround.
l£i impf. i to dig.
VIII to dig for one's
self.
fe.o^ imp/", a to take care
of, to guard, to be atten-
tive.
VIII c. s^ r. to take
care, give heed.
^^^ impf. e to be right.
j£i truth, certainty;
right, claim.
Jl^ impf, u to be despised.
X to despise.
wAA^ despised.
IXla. /W2J9/'. w to decide, give
judgement.
iiLfjCs*. wisdom.
jvaX^ J^^- ^UX^ wise,
learned.
^U. i?/. j.LX^ go-
vernor, ruler, judge.
^1^ impf. i to relate.
J^i /m/?/. w to loosen,
untie; impf, i to be al-
lowed.
IV or X to pronounce
sthg. allowed, declare
lawful, to allow.
Ji^:^ Fto adorn one's self.
116^
Glossary B.
A^ (1. pers. ciM-t^) irnpf. a.
to be hot.
^♦^ fern, fever.
R;oLi.ji pigeon.
Jc^i impf. i to praise.
Q j5 ^ J
cX.^-^ Muliaramed (the
praised one).
ij^t^ impf. u to be foolish.
(^j^^l foolish, stupid.
Jl^.^ impf. iio load, carry ;
bring ; transport, c. J^^
VTII c. jl^ to require,
be in need of.
iL^L^ c. ^^ need, want ;
c. Jl^ request.
(J^ i?r^j3. round, round
about.
JL:^. state, condition,
situation.
(^Isk 2m/?/*. 2, to gather
together, take posses-
sion (of everything).
to attack; c. ace. pers. "^ impf. § 49 c. to live.
et J^£. r. to make s. o.
sit upon sthg.; to in-
cite to some action.
to commit sin.
r to purify one's self
from sin.
iaj^ II to embalm.
oiA^^I| al-Ahnaf, (a man's
name).
^L^m^rf.^/r^p.t(§44
note &) c. Jt to compel.
-5. tribe, clan.
s«jy=i. life.
impf. u to be bad,
wicked.
vL^^i bad , vile,
vicious, profligate.
1^ // c. 2 ace: to relate,
tell some one sthg.
VIII to test, try,
prove.
Glossary B.
117*
1^^ pi ^14^' infor-
mation, news, affair.
7^
well informed,
forward, to produce, to
expel.
X bring out, draw out.
^ tribute.
CIS. impf. i to make bread, ^^ impf. a to be dumb,
to bake.
wise.
bread.
a cake of bread,
IxL. impf. i to seal up, put
one's seal to.
k^jcXi Hadiga (Muham-
med's first wife).
Ij^ impf. u to serve.
, kw^ impf i to make a
hole in, to pierce.
VII to have a hole put
through, be pierced.
VIII to break through,
flow through.
^^Li impf. u to store up.
si lLi^/?/.J^ lli treas-
ure , treasure-house.
&x)J^ inf.
^cXi coll. (the staiBf ^s^ ^^Pf- «' ^- «^^- ^•
to fear sthg.
( jq^ fwp/. w to be some
one's special property.
of) servants.
*i>La. a servant.
li^ /;7ip/. ? to prostrate
one's self, to fall down.
_li impf. u to go out,
come out, go out from,
depart from.
IV to bring forth or
(jcLi,., coll. iuflL^ an
intimate friend; persons
of distinction.
^^^J^lL. impf. i to dye (esp.
the hair).
118*
Glossaey B.
Jt>A«CL
dyed.
w^^iii. IX to be or become
green.
^J^ impf. a to sin.
loLkS.! al-Hattab (a man's
name).
^-fti^ m;?/. e to be light
(opp. of heavy).
i^OAAis- ^/. ^.jlil light.
tXli^ /m/?/. w to be ever-
lasting, to remain.
U^-^ ^-^^/ to appropriate
to oneself secretly.
U^-^^ II c. ace. pe?-s. et
\j.jo to rescue, to free.
escape.
iaXi. Vlllprop. to become
commingled; to come
on (said of the darkness
in which objects can
no longer be disting-
uished).
^la. impf. u to be behind,
to succeed.
// to leave behind.
2^4^ pl- AaXs^ Ca-
liph.
(J-U. impf. u to create,
form.
Go .
(3-L^ 1) one's out-
ward form; 2) coll.
people.
(J^^i?^. ^-^is^f one's
(natural) disposition,
character, mental and
moral traits.
iX^ impf. u to go out (of
fire and light).
(jaX^ escape, way of 7^ ^ ^
to ferment.
.^
fem. fermented
drink, wine.
vjLL med. ^ (§42^; 44)
impf. a to fear.
// to put in fear.
\J>yL. fear.
nLL med. ^ to be good.
Glossary B.
119^
VIII to choose, select *t> coll.^ nom. unit. S^J,
pearl.
^i)»t> IV to attain, reach,
comprehend.
(Ci)4> j9/. *-5!;3 a dirhem,
a silver coin.
j^.5 impf. i to know.
/F cans.
Lc4> /mj!?/'. w to call, to call
upon, invoke, c. (^ to
pray to God for some-
thing, to call to one's
aid, to name ; c. ace. ei
Jl to induce s. o. to do
sthg., invite, summon.
VI to call to one an-
other, c. lo to bring a
complaint against . . .
s^x-J prayer.
«i5 impf. a to push; hand
over, deliver up.
for one's self.
jk}^ (also as elat^ good
(adj. and noun), pro-
sperity.
JLL med. (^ //to imagine
something.
03 Darius.
v^4> impf. i to walk slowly.
ablt> jo/. ^I.t> beast of
burden and for riding.
1S(S IV to turn one's back,
go away.
JlLcJ c. ace. to enter, to
come; c. JS to come to
see one, to consummate
marriage with (coire) ;
C'^^y^ to interfere.
IV to bring into, in-
troduce.
J^is.i> inf. I.
Jl2s»Ii> entering,future, LS5 /»2J3/'. w, <?• ,j.x to come
next. near.
120* Glossary B.
^ o*
jO elat, jj| low, ^J4> debt,
humble, trivial, near; ^_j^ pi ^G^f re-
i?/. jjlt^l the nearest ligion.
parts. \^,^ denar, a gold coin.
L;3^ /m. world. 1^ ^^^^^ (g 13^) ^j^i^^
^15 me^. ^ // to subdue. , r l; (g 15) ^^at (then)?
J3»je^.. C.J to surround. Aj j wolf.
9 >
Ji> Jt?^. wt> dwelling- w^3 2;wj9/'. fl^, c. «cc. to
place, house, abode, frighten.
court. <'^y, impf. w, c. ace. to think
^iS mc^. , to remain, con- of, mention, name,
tinue, be durable. speak of. Inf. 32>.
^j^i^ prep, on this side of, J^ impf. i to be insignifi-
below, beneath; other cant, feeble.
than, exclusively of, be- ^^ miserable, %
sides, before. ^^^ ^^id. feeble.
^^C> impf. a to be indis- dLJ6/<?m. dULj'j^row. (§ 13c)
posed. that.
IV to treat medically, ^^^impfaio go,go away.
%\1S medicine. IV to cause to disap-
^ItS med. ^ to be in sub- pear.
jection. C^ic> gold.
Glossary B.
121=
. j the (man) of, possessor *j. pi. cbx house, pi real
ofcf. §§90/, 133. estate.'
cl<3 tned. ^ to become
known, spread abroad.
IV to make public,
publish.
\j*^U P^' (j*'^;^ head, the
chief thing.
,j**joj jt?/. iLw5j leader,
general.
Jj /»2jt?/; ^^, (§ 49 b)
to see, be of opinion,
think, believe, consider
advisable, c. 2 ace. to
regard or esteem a per-
son or thing as, hold
to be.
/r^''Jc.2«cc.toshow.
^K insight, counsel,
advice.
^;
lord, God.
aaJIJI ar-Ilabr, (a
man's name).
«j. I /*(?/w. xjuvl four,
/w/?/*. 2 to turn back.
return
m/*.
Go S , o^
J^. /<?w. pL J^. I foot,
leg.
G G
Jci-^ p/. JLi. a man.
Ii.» /m/?/". w to stone.
*.Ai*'^ stoned, accursed.
L^'^ impf. u, c. ace. to hope
for sthg.
. to be wide, broad.
// e. i^ to bid anyone
welcome (Lxi^Jo).
iaj^ m;?/. w to tie, fasten. " - if^pf, a, e. ace. pers.
to have pity on, com-
Ja-o^ elat. Ja:>| se-
curely fastened, firm.
passion for, some one.
122"*^
Glossary B.
VI to take compassion
on each other.
i^As loving kindness
(esp. of God) , deed of
kindness.
^v fern. milL
l^T vel "^5 to he flaccid,
soft.
3s impf. u to bring hack,
give hack.
VIII to turn hack.
Sr inf. I giving hack.
^•^v impf. w, c. 2 ace. to
present, grant, furnish,
hless with, give food.
jtw food (esp. as given
hy Allah), sustenence.
^XJo Marziik, (man's
name).
Jc^x IV io send.
V- ^ "
J^^N J3/. CS.WN mes-
senger;, apostle (esp. of
God).
«.on // to set (of jewels),
inlay.
i^. impf. a to suck (at
the hreast).
IV to give suck.
1a3n impf. «, c. «cc. to he
content with, acquiesce
in, take' pleasure in.
xxc 2^iJi ^. God he
gracious unto him!
IV to satisfy, render
content.
^^x 2W- -^ pleasure,
delight (in sthg.).
j^T VIII to shake, tremhle.
^" mjo/". « to watch, tend.
ct)i>^. 'i^£-\ herdsman,
shepherd.
iUc. ;?/. LL&N subjects
(also si?ig. coll.).
sLcoo J9/. c|lx> pasture-
ground. ^
Glossary B.
123'
y^^£.s impf. a to have a
strong craving for; c.
^^ to give up the
Graying for sthg., to
shun, relinquish.
\^Lx£.\pl.'^sJi£.s\ (flat) cake.
iiT impf. a to raise, lift
up (the voice); c. jl to
bring sthg. before the
judge.
•Ai'J high, noble.
/JjT IV c. \^ to be kind,
gentle with . . .
)Ss inf. stepping
into, aboard (a ship).
^[J^jOy name of a month.
^r impf. i, c. ^ r. to
throw, pelt with.
Z^sfs impf «, c. ace. rei
to be afraid of sthg.
vj^ir monk.
l^C IV med. ^^ c. ace. et
U-i
to rid ... of.
fi? ^^^"^ C^]^ ^^^''
pi. rrX^s wind.
^ji^;?/.^jilp^ elbow. ^\f smell, scent.
j^\ mj9/'. 2 to be or become
thin, abject, mean.
(Jiv bondage, slavery.
o
impf. a to mend, patch.
RjLSs patch.
mount on horse-, camel-
back &c., to ride.
o\s med.^ IV e. ace. to will,
wish, intend, endeavour
to.
IC med. . to seek, desire,
attack.
^y. impf. i to relate.
impf a io advance
slowly.
c*\ impf a to sow.
124* Glossary B
c Ns coll. seed, green
corn, green crop, differ-
ent sorts of grain.
c-lc\ to shake violently.
// (reflexive).
(viv impf. u to assert, re-
late.
On impf. u to conduct a
bride to her husband's
house.
1^1 ult. . to increase, to
be good, pure.
^'^ elaU ^^ I pure, ^;;
delicate, dainty.
JJv to shake (trans.). //
to shake (int.), tremble.
l\impf,u to fasten securely.
*Lov bridle (nose-rein).
^Uov time, space of time.
\sb\ impf. u to shoot up, to
flourish, prosper.
So. .
!\ 7ned. ^ II c. 2 ace.
vel c. ace. et ^^ vel J
to marry some one to,
join in wedlock ; c. ace.
to take in marriage.
V c. ace. reflex.
riv med. . impf. u to visit.
Jjv we^. . impf. a to cease.
Jl.v/w/". cessation. Noon
or afternoon.
impf i to remove, clear
away.
%Spl. LSI^; corner.
j>|C med. ^ impf. i, e. 2 ace.
to give more, to add to.
Joyo iwA; increase,
addition.
Z^part. § 95^; 99flf.
iLl i/wi?/. « to be or remain
over.
Glossary B.
125=
IsLaw remaining, the ^ yL pi. i^^y^ saddle.
rest, all.
jLu impf. «, c. 2 ace. to
ask one for sthg. c. ace.
pers. et ^^ to enquire
for, ask respecting.
JoLw beggar.
xJLwwuo the asking, a
question.
Juucw ?w«5c. or fern, way,
right way, road.
S Go _
JiuA/ /<?»«. \ji^ six.
mjo/. w or i to hide,
c*^ /^ to be in haste, c,
^ to make haste with . . .
7^.
quick, swift, speedy.
Hill-w Suraka, (a man's
name).
eiaA*/ impf. a to spread out.
vjja-w the flat roof of
eastern houses.
Jcj^La*; jo/. JldI^ the fore-
arm.
shield (e. g. from the ^ ^-^^^^ ^-^ ^^ ^ ^^^ ^
gossip of the people). . , i ^ /.
pers. to lodge iniorma-
d^*^ impf. w, c. J, to
prostrate one's self
irpoaxoveiv.
4>^-^u« inf.
G o ^
cX^u^uo mosque.
Iww /F <?. Jl^ per5. to tell
s. 0. sthg. as a secret. S^ impf. a to be or be
S G ^ o* ^ "
vAA/ p/. sSy^S secret.
tion against, denounce.
G "^ ■' G ^ " ^
wtt-ww jo/. ^U.w! journey.
9." .^ 1-
jOjulw snip.
oJCw /^jo/. w to become
or be silent.
come drunk.
126*
Glossary B.
drunk.
(O".^ impf' u to dwell, in-
habit,rest, be quiescent.
jj jCv rest, quiescence.
^j.fLw pi. ^Ka^ in-
habitant.
Jl-wwJLw to put in chains.
Ja-Lw impf. w to be or be-
come powerful.
//to make, install as
ruler.
|vi^ ladder.
G ^ ^
J%*^ immunity from
ills, prosperity, wel-
fare. p^Lv,j| &JLi
peace be with him!
(parenthetically placed
after the names of high
religious personalities).
ioo^Lww peace and pro-
sperity.
G / o
j*^^^!^ (m/. /F) Islam.
rj ^ o 3
jjLiaJLww c. J<^ autho- ^ impf. u to put poison
rity over, ruk; ruler, into anything, to poison.
«^^*^^- ^:. poison.
Ill; impf. a to be whole, - - . ^ ^ ,
r- ^ *.4^ 2wp/. « to hear.
iiitact. X. 0. o* ^
// to bestow health ^-^ /^^- ^^^' ^s^-
and prosperity; c. J^ L*.^ u c. 2 «cc. ?;^/ c. ace.
et ^^ to call by name,
to give a name to.
to greet, salute.
IV c. jJU to declare
one's self resigned to
to God; to become a
Moslem.
*..wl (§ 56 a) name.
gU-ww heaven.
Glossary B.
127*
^aL impf. w 1) to sharpen,
2) ordain, institute.
1^ tooth, age.
9 C5 > 6-3
\kjM pi. ^jj^ regula-
tion, institution, tradi-
tion (of the Moslems).
SJJL IV to support.
G — ^ — 3
gjuu^pl nom. ^yu*. (§ 76 &;
90 m) year.
I.^ /m/?/. « to keep awake.
:&Lw^^^.. to be bad, wicked.
/F to spoil, corrupt,
to do ill.
^LIw med. . to sink into
the ground.
(5L1 med, , c. «cc. to be-
come lord, ruler, over...
0^1 fern. i!j^ i?/.
OyjM black.
Juuv i?/. hSLww lord,
ruler, chief.
iLcLL hour, short space
of time, moment.
^yJ^ part. § 95 t?; 99 «.
^Ll we^. • to drive.
ket, bazaar, lane.
mar-
(i-Iw Vlllto be equal, alike,
simultaneous with.
e1^ c. J^ (quite)
the same, indifferent to.
nL-1 med. ^ impf. i to jour-
ney, go along, go. ^i ^.
to follow one's track.
led.
distance travel-
sword, sabre.
Li VI to find a bad omen
9 ^ 3
rr"
a bad omen.
ix^ fw/?/. a to be satiated.
/F to satiate, satisfy.
gjui, II to compare.
128''
Glossary B.
I^^ impf. u to be intri-
cate, intertwined.
^:sui nom. unit, s^^v.^
tree, shrub.
jL^ m/?/. w to bind, tie.
// c. J^ to press hard
on one.
r//7 to become strong,
powerful, heavy.
powerful; vehement.
r
i (1. pers.
";r
^ to become bad.
li (g/«t 2<7.) pi. ;^r^^
bad, wicked. Mischief,
woe, war.
jw<i» impf. a to drink.
drink.
wine, strong
•7
i,pi.
noble,
\^IJ^ impf. u to be high.
IV to be high, lofty,
height, fame.
nobility
aristocratic, respected.
^y^ '^rnpf. u to rise (of
the sun).
(VvXifuo place of the
sun's rising == the East.
^Jwui impf. a c. ace. to be
one's companion.
JwCi net.
viLw^Cw companion,ally.
VJII to buy, negotiate.
be deeply struck with.
&i.w pi. sLLw lip.
^jji.^ IV c. Js£^ to be ten-
derly solicitous for . . .
yil^ impf. u to thank, be
thankful.
IX.i impf u, to complain.
VIII to complain.
CO //c. ace, to say "God
Glossary B.
129*
bless you" to a person
{e. g, sneezing).
fern. sun.
JU-^ left (hand or side).
Jl^ impf. a c. ace. to be
present at sthg., to wit-
ness, to give evidence.
/// c. ace, to see, be
an eye-witness.
J^Li ph Oyj^ wit-
ness.
Q" ^ -
sjl.^ testimony,
guarantee, security, a
bearing testimony.
y^ pl. wg-wl month.
Lg^ F/// to desire, wish.
slg-»i sensual desire,
appetite.
?^Lw CO//, nom. unit, sLi
small cattle, sheep and
goats ; nom, unit, a single
head of these.
TLw med. . /F c. J I to
point to.
Socin, Arabic Grammar,*
(^•^ impf, i to roast.
■AjiiTned. ^ impf. a to will,
wish.
%^ a matter, thing,
something.
^oLci we^. ^ to become
gray-haired.
v^^^jui gray hairs.
^Lw w^^. ^ to become
an old man.
^.^uo old man.
^Uajui p/. ^j^A^Lui devil,
Satan.
cL^ med. ^ to spread a-
broad, become public.
II to accompany, to
follow.
s^jJo impf, u to pour, pour
out.
IfjJc impf. w to be attrac-
tive, good-looking.
IVio enter the time of
130*
Glossary B.
early morning, c. ace. be-
come sthg. early, soon.
x^La^ beauty, love-
liness.
L^1
associate; friend, com-
panion ; owner, inhabi-
tant of (cf. § 133).
Jyc impf. i, c. JS to have ksu^ pi kJ^ leaf.
y . . . . , e i"
Juo impf, u to turn away
0^
^ " ■^
patience with, to put
up with, endure.
•ju>o impf. u or a to dye.
Ulo impf w to be foolish;
youthful.
^^A^ pi. ^JLlop little
boy.
^ja impf 2 to be in good
^health, sound.
isAi^ pi. J-L^ ^/«^.
^^.^1 right, correct.
^^^^ impf a, c. ace. to
keep company with,
have to do with.
Ill to take for com-
panion.
from, alienate.
jVJco impf u to speak
the truth, be truthful,
sincere.
// to consider sthg. to
be true, right, to believe
one.
V e. J^ pars, ei t^ rei
to give one sthg. as
alms.
(^3-JtX-o pi. iLi'jJisI
friend.
olo impf. i to turn from.
VII to turn, go, away,
return (home).
XiitLo thunderbolt.
X to take with one oLo xm/?/. w, to be small,
as an associate. little.
Glossaby B.
Ijua inf. littleness.
oLo impf. u to place in a
row, draw up.
VIII to arrange (them-
selves),to stand in a row.
yAjo IX to be yellow.
yiuoS pL Juo yellow.
iu^ VIII to choose.
u ^ jfl man s name.
^JLo /wp/". « to be good,
be in order.
IV to put in order,
set right.
ii^jJLfl apious action,
good deed.
^Lo // to pray, perform
divine service, to wor-
ship. xliLfc iJLII ^^JLo
IjLm,, contracted to
S^Lo, s^JLi divine
service,worship,prayer.
131*
^:i>5K«-o silence.
i£o mjo/. « to make,
prepare, to do.
w.g-0 j9/. )L^-ol relation
(by marriage).
CjLo med. . /r to befall,
fall to one's share.
aUjufljo misfortune.
6 o ^
^:i>«-o voice.
'i^y^pl. ^ya figure, shape,
form.
'ijLiQya cell.
" Lo »i^^. (^ to cry out.
VI to shout at each
other.
5Lo w^fi?. ^ to hunt.
9 o ^
Juufi /«/. hunting, what
is caught, game.
TLi med, ^^, c. «cc. to be-
come or be sthg. ; to
repair to.
7/to cause to become;
ofc^/o impf. u to be quiet. to appoint, to place.
132^
Glossary B.
ii^u^ VIII to lie on one's
side.
^^Lo forenoon.
Cjv^ impf. i to strike, beat.
VIII refl. to beat
against each other.
OwO inf. I striking,
beating.
Xj^^ a single blow,
a beating.
*^3uo //w/?/. 2^ to be weak.
v^A*^ weak.
Jlo mjt?/. 2 to err.
RJ^Lo erring, error.
55 ^
iv^ 2mj9/'. w to put close
to, press against, to
gather.
^L2 med, . to be clear,
bright, shining.
%^ light, brightness.
^Uu^ brightness.
uftA^ pl. oLcol guest.
^^Li) ^^^. ;^ /rto press
hard, hem in.
fft^^ straits, distress.
LbLb to sink (trans,.).
vj^ /^Ti/?/. u or i to treat
medically.
.^^ouJs physician, doc-
tor.
/j^ /r to cover with a
iid.
F// to be covered up.
^sx]d impf. a to grind.
J^AisUc flour.
t>w^ impf u to chase away,
drive away, pursue.
i^Jo IVto cast down one's
eyes.
l^jiio ifnpf a to eat.
IV to feed (trans.).
^\jth inf. I eating,
taste, a meal, food, a
(particular) dish.
Glossary B.
133*
v^jLb impf.u to seek, search
after; wish for.
,^.JLb inf. I seeking,
a search.
v^JLL JT Abu Talib
(Muhammed's uncle).
*JLb mjo/*. w to stand up,
get up, rise (of the sun).
VIII c. JS to look
at, see.
/jJLb // c. ace. to set free,
give divorce to.
IV io set free.
VII to go away,
depart.
•^Jo impf. a to strive to
obtain, to covet, sthg.
»ib inf. covetousness,
greed.
y^ impf w to be clean,
pure.
// to cleanse, purify.
cli> med. . to obey, be
compliant.
/Fid.
k^Lb m/"., obedience,
subjection.
oLb /w^^. . to go round.
^Li«-b flood.
JLb m^^. . /Fto lengthen,
protract; to be long
over sthg.
Jl>^ long, lasting
long.
j^lb impf. i to fold, fold
up or together.
oLb med. ^ to be good,
pleasant, excellent.
^j>jLb Elat. v_;udol good,
excellent, nice to the
taste, sweet (scent).
iUxio something good,
a dainty.
TLb ^^^. ^ to fly.
134^
Glossary B.
6^
^\Ja med. ^ // to plaster S^L^ adoration, wor-
withclayormud(J^A^). ship,
jvib ?//?;?/: e'to treat unfair- ^ jjnpf. u to cross, to
ly, injure, do wrong to. pass along (a certain
IV to grow dark.
ii^JLb darkness.
A^Us darkness, dusk.
^Uo one that acts in-
juriously, oppressor
y^ impf. a to appear, to
come in sight.
IV to bring to sight.
road).
hCa£. an example (from
which to take warning).
(jj^xD impf. i to look stern,
black-browed.j
,j*.UiJ| al-' Abbas,
(man's name).
5*Ijld mantle, cloak.
w^io the back, upper \\^ impf. i to be or be-
part, surface. come free.
^\Jb elat. -J (? io) pro-
minent, striking.
jjlc m/?/". u to worship.
Jkxc CO//. cXju.^ slave,
servant; j:?/. t>Lx& man
(as the servant of God).
IV to free, liberate.
Go
j^A.c nobility, high
rank,
j^j^ free, noble, old.
^U^ Utman, (mans
name).
aJUl Ju^ 'Abdallah (a vS^ V c. ^j^ to wonder
man's name). at sthg.
^o 9 o ^
Glossary B.
IBS'*
XAJ^ Pl. v-AjLfLft
a wonder, miracle.
Jlsxt //to expedite.
Jet eVw/?/*. w, c. 2 ace, to
count, reckon as . . .
iuIJl^ lentils.
JtXx emp/. ? to be just.
J;>Lft just, impartial.
I^Xi /wp/. dr, c. ace. to be
without sthg.
I Jkt F c. «cc.to cross over,
go beyond.
/// c. ace. to treat
as an enemy, attack.
^4\ii?/. bTJcd? enemy.
s.IJcc enmity.
C^dS. //to torture, punish.
(^!4>i torture,punish-
ment.
TiXa ^^^^ to excuse one's
self.
s(\£. excuse (in the
sense of a refusal).
o^ coll. the Arabs.
^Iwftl a Bedouin.
,jil^ imp/. 2 to interfere
with, thwart, offer.
Fto come in one's way.
I jr ^ //w/?/. e to perceive,
know, recognize.
kjow knowledge.
o.-*Jo a favour, kind
deed.
^i•|y*J! name of the count-
ry known to the an-
cients as Babylonia.
yfr impf. e to be strong,
powerful (often paren-
thetically after aJUl :
he is powerful).
yjyt elat. ytj strong,
powerful.
Jut imp/. 2 to depose.
VIII to take one's
leave, be deposed.
136*
Glossary B,
kxk^ pi LLki gift.
^yc c. acc. et ^^^ rei II
to console, comfort. present.
jS..^ pi. ^L^ a body ^^ ^-^^^ ^ to be or be-
come great, large ; c. J^
^L^
of troops, army.
jL^ II to build a nest
2 J _i
Ico^ /// to associate with,
wwwfc.fr /em HwaLc ten
tribe, tribesmen.
wCijuo assembly , the
whole; those present.
^J^ impf. i, c. acc. to
resist, not obey some
one.
iiU^jLo p/. ^J^lJt;o re-
sistance, revolt, sin.
•^oi member.
yjJLc impf. i or u to
sneeze.
\Ja£. IV c. acc.pers. et rei
to give sthg. to some
one.
to appear to be great,
insolent.
Ajbji^ inf. greatness,
j^ja^ elat. Jjhs- 1 great,
of great account, august.
\y^
pi.
oo>Lr£
9'
wicked, clever demon.
Lii //wj^/. W; c. ^j^ to
pardon (a person), be
gracious to.
L->wiL& /?/. Uij^uLfc scor-
pion, a bitter enemy.
JJLc e/wp/*. i. or JJi^. ^wp/. flf
to be intelligent.
JJld intellectual abi-
lity, intelligence; pru-
dence.
^ VIII to fall ill.
Glossary B.
137=^
Oc
SJLc. illness, sickness.
^JLi /// to treat.
l_JLi impf. a perceive,
know, learn (that), c. \^
to know something.
IV c.^accAo acquaint,
inform one of sthg.
Go 6 J ?
jJLc pl. j»^JL& know-
ledge, science.
\» ^ -.- -»
jLo^ mark, sign.
iJLi ^/«^. ,v-Ltl j3/.
^LJLft possessing know-
ledge, a learned man,
*^Ld very knowing,
jvijuo teacher.
^L& 2/wp/. w to be high.
F/ to be highly exal-
ted, esp. parenthetically
after^//«^: He is exalted
(§ 23).
J^ prep, (§ 96 V) over,
on the ground of, on,
upon, at; with verbs of
entering : chez ; against,
in the direction of, to-
wards.^^^ J^ yo to be
in a state of, to be ac-
customed to sthg.
Jvfc elat. J^l high;
also man's name 'Ali.
JLi elat. J^l high,
prominent, excellent.
^ zmjf?/*. w to be or become
common; to increase.
riuncle(on the father's
side); ^\ J^j cousin.
JULi the common
people (plebs), large
crowd.
J^ II to furnish, provide
handsomely.
1^^ life; in the oath
(5^1ij by my life.
^Sk 'Omar (man's
name).
138^
Glossary B.
•l4^(§ 90 n pronounce
^Amrun) 'Amr (a man's
name).
Jl*.^ impf. a to do, make,
construct.
X to employ one for
for some purpose, to
apoint governor.
J^4-^ V'^' JU^I work,
act, deeds of piety,
province.
J^Lc jo/. JUx a func-
tionary, vicegerent,
prefect.
l.«.i ?mp/. « to be or be-
come blind.
IV to disfigure, make
unrecognisable.
^ « ^ Go?
^^! i?/. ^ blind.
^^yi-prep. away from, from
(hinderance) ; about,
concerning ; according
to, on the authority of.
pi. «4>Ll&I vine,
grape.
JO^ prep, by the side of,
near, with, by (one).
_^La med. . IX to be bent,
crooked.
5Lc »^e^. • to return, c.
ace. to visit.
5L& med. . c. Lj to take
refuge in . . .
X to ask for protec-
tion;tosay: xJUb J.^!
(Surah 114) "I take
refuge in God", c. ^jjo
from.
J.Ld »2^^. • IV c. ace.
to help, support.
X to help one's self,
to help on, succour.
xjjIjuj Mu'awiya, the first
Omayyad Caliph (661
—679).
^JL^ Jesus.
Glossary B.
I aNIVERS3
jiL& med. ^ to live.
JLw^jt life, way of liv-
ing, (§ 64 c).
ItXi ult. , to come early.
F to breakfast, to
refresh oneself early.
Gift ^wj?/. u to set (of
the sun).
G o -
v^wjuj place where the
sun sets, the West.
^^y£. IV to make to sink,
drown.
iiS'yh gazelle.
Ju»A^ impf, i to wash.
" Ai i/wp/. « to cover.
iLcwHjo/.yillftsaddle-
cover, horse-cloth.
impf. i c, ace. rei et
^^ p. to take sthg.
from one unlawfully.
^ impf. a to get angry,
be angry with.
wAc impf. i c. J^ pers. to
pardon, forgive.
'iisJuQ pardon, forgive-
ness.
^ ^ y
JkAft impf. u to neglect.
SJLfti inattention, neg-
ligence.
v^^JLft 2/wjt?/*. /to be all-
powerful, victorious.
l^jJLi II et IV to bolt, bar,
shut.
G - > G ^o
l^^wi pi. ^ULc a young
man, lad, slave.
^IjLc /tw;?/. «, e. ^^ft to be
rich.
^^ pi. iLa^! rich.
^^Lft //to sing.
»L^ med. . to penetrate
far into, go down.
^Lft a cave.
^L^ »«^rf. • to dive.
140*
Glossary B.
Is. med. ^ to be absent,
o -
c. jj^ to disappear.
pL
secret.
'^JuS absence,
among strangers.
stay
V.AAXX) inf. sunset.
JLc med. ^ II to alter,
change.
60^
yj^ (§ 133 with gen.)
another,somethg.differ-
ent from, no (with neg.),
except; before substs.,
adjs. and parts, it ren-
ders the converse, like
our prefix un- or in-; Ax>
yxL without.
JcoA?;'.(§§95^; 152;161)
and so, then, and.
impf. a to open.
VII to open (intr.).
VIII to conquer, ac-
quire for one's self.
-jSJCi inf, I.
.\SajopL >sajLAx) key.
c
^^^ VIII c. ^ to be
struck with emotion,
bewitched, by.
.Ji3 a young man.
sbli a young woman,
girl.
y^ imp/, u to transgress,
act viciously.
G ^ G c5 ^
ys^\j pl. .Ls! evil-
doer.
wi impf. a to boast of,
glory in.
/// to give oneself
airs towards some one.
Go^
y^ inf. I
^ /w/?/. 2 to nee.
jjjj^JI the Persians.
U^.U Persia.
jj«^ a horse, esp. of a
good breed.
yibji impf. u to spread out.
Glossary B.
141=
(ji,lvj pL ji^yi carpet, J^^ bounty, kind-
cushion, bed. ness, favour.
jr^ impf. i, c. J^ pers. ^I^M '"^P^- ^ *^ ^® ^^®^®^-
to impose sthg. on one 2^ intelligence.
as a duty.
dJi mp. w, c. ^^ to be
empty, disengaged,
finished with sthg.
^li /mp/. w, to separate,
part.
7/7 to leave.
r777 to become sepa-
rated, to disperse.
c yi imp/", a to get a fright,
be afraid.
jcU impf. u to become
bad, wicked.
4>Lg^ m/. the doing
of mischief, evil, wrong.
LLs 7rto divulge, publish,
betray.
jLiii impf. u to be or
remain over, to be ex-
cellent.
jJii impf. a to do.
Go G ^o*
Juti ;?/. JLjtil deed,
act, mode of action.
Juji r to miss, enquire
for, some one.
oLfti j^/. ilJLs poor.
dU F77 to free oneself,
to become disattached.
Jo r to reflect.
X g <U j?/. 2^5 1^^ fruit.
>^ 7Fto become happy,
^successful, to prosper.
Go > G > >
yiUi, viJULi a (large) ship.
/j^ so and so, Mr. Such-
and- Such.
'i"^ pl. ^\J^ desert.
2i mouth (§ 90 o).
uL)Li w^</. • c. ace. to pass
142*
Glossary B.
by, to expire (of the
time for some one to
do sthg.).
(kli med. , to excel, be
excellent.
^S prep. above,
higher than.
8«i (§ 90 p/. sly I) mouth.
^ prep, in, into, at, on,
among, accompanied
by, by; with (before a
quality), in relation to,
with regard to.
o^*ww-Lo pl. 'iJuJ^i phi-
losopher.
^^* X to find detestable.
wo p^. v^* grave.
{jijS impf. i to take hold
of, take into one's hand.
Jui> mjt?/. a to accept.
IV to approach, come
nearer; be susceptible
to.
rto receive.
X to be opposite.
before.
Jlo jt?r6:j9. before.
Jcxi' j»r^^. in the
presence of, in the
sphere of . . . xXii* ^j^o
on his side, of his party.
G >^
Jj-Ai* inf. I acceptance.
XJLyo tribe, family (in
wide sense).
G^- ^j
RjbUuj comparison, re-
lation.
Jai> 2wip/. w to kill, make
away with.
/// c. acc.^ to fight
with, fight.
G o-
JjCi* m/. / killing, exe-
cution.
G ^ .-o -
Jou3- ;?/. J.Ai killed.
y 9 9^
XiLsvJJ 5-?! Abii Kuhafa,
the father of Abu Bekr.
Glossary B.
143*
ji (§ 98 e, 99 d) particle,
J Jo impf, i to be able to,
can, could (also with
folg. impf.). c. Jlc to
have power over.
IV c. JLd to make one
more powerful than . . .
. Jo worth, value, due,
power. .JJb in rela-
tion to, in proportion
to . . .
*Jo impf. a^ to advance,
approach.
// to place before,
set sthg. before s. o.
/F'to approach.
V to go before, pre-
cede.
jvJtXiJ pi iLoJo an-
cient,old, of a past time.
^ impf. i to stay, persevere.
IV io render stable, c.
(^ rei to confess to sthg.
X to stand fast, hold
good.
JyS continuance, rest.
I Jj impf. a to read.
^07
.1^* Kur'an or a
1^' 2mj9/.
passage therefrom.
vljli 2mp/'. u to be near at
hand.
// to place near, to
take as intimate friend,
to offer, set before one.
F/to be close together.
v^^' pi. ib J>l ; ^/«^.
jt?/. <o.Li*l(subst.).c.^
near, close(to) ; related.
G ^>
ipljs the tribe of the
Kuraish, the Kurai-
shites.
l^Ijj nom. rel.a. Ku-
raishite.
Go-' O ^ Oy'O-SS J
^j; horn; jj^jdl ^6 the
two horned (Alexander
bicornis).
144*
6^ o^
Glossarjt B.
;# J *> ^ ^
^^* i^^- ^'f place, village. «kr em/?/, a to cut
Llr t^/^. . to be hard.
off.
*.-wsJ) /F to swear.
<Xoi* 2/??/?/. I, to make for,
repair to, some one.
Juaiu) the end of a
journey,
wO«9
? to be short.
VI to shorten one's
self, to shrink.
6 o ^
9 i 9
w»flti> pi. \y^ castle,
fortress.
udi' F// to let one's self
down, dart down (of a
bird).
^.^dS 2/WJ9/*. I to decide judi-
cially; to accomplish,
finish; to discharge a
claim.
VII to be finished,
brought to an end.
|Loi> inf. I payment.
VII c. jj^ to become
parted from ; to o€ase.
tXjtiJ impf. u to seat one's
self, sit down.
Go? S ^of-
cUi* ;?/. JUiJl lock, pad-
lock.
05^
(}sjiimpf. i to be small, few.
/Fto make small, take
little of.
Xto deem small, think
little of, despise.
s
JuXs small, few, scant.
v^^JU impf. i to turn round,
to change.
r//to alter (intr.), to
change one's mind.
K^^j3 pL (oJU heart.
•Xs VIII to tear away,
take away.
{jaJ3impf. i to hunt, catch.
iai* adv. ever, with negat. ui> VIII to procure, pur-
never. chase.
Glossary B.
145*
<5Li med. . to lead, guide.
VII to let one's self
be guided.
JU* med. . to say, tell;
often = ask. c. J to
name.
JjJ pi J!y! speech,
utterance, apothegm.
JliLo speech.
j»U' med, . to stand up,
proceed (to).
/rtofix, setup, estab-
lish; halt, stop, stay.
X to be upright, faith-
ful.
i»jj' CO//, people, one s
dependants , nation,
subjects.
SjoLliJ resurrection.
lijU' ;?/. (wtp foot.
*Lft>o place, occasion.
^Js impf. a to be strong.
Hjij strength, force;
Socin, Arabic Grammar.
c. ^ the means to do
sthg.
^^ (c, J^) strong,
powerful.
J(§§95/; 145 & prop, subj.)
as, like as.
.iy(it is) as if . . .
^impf.uio be great, large.
F to vaunt oneself,
be proud.
l^inf. /to be advanc-
ed in years.
yuS' elat. yjS\ great,
old.
y^^^impf. u to write.
/// c. ace. to corre-
spond with.
v«jb:5^p/. v-^A5"a writ-
ing, scripture (= writ-
ten revelation), letter,
book.
f^impf. u to conceal.
K
146*
Glossary B.
^A^xfinf. concealing,
keeping close.
^JO to be much or many.
IV to make many,
take much of.
X to consider ^ much
or many.
yf^P elat. wa5 I much,
many (often rather as
a subst. in apposition).
{^()Simpf. i to lie, tell lies.
77 c. ace. pers. vel ^^
rei to charge one with
falsehood, discredit.
^dSinf. I, lying, a
lie, falsehood.
^S impf, w, to cause one
trouble, pain.
i^S grief, distress,
anxiety.
^^i^S pl (j^j4>|w5^ divi-
sion (of cavalry), squad-
ron.
^S impf. u to be noble,
generous.
^S pi. ^[joS noble,
high-souled, highly
esteemed.
'iLoSjopl. *^LjCoanoble
quality, generous ac-
tion.
'6Simpf. a to dislike.
v.^;ow.5^ F777 to acquire, to
attain to sthg.
<JujSimpf. i to eclipse.
v,Ja.< impf. i, c. ^ to
uncover.
F77 to be uncovered,
be carried off.
G c --
^;jt5^ ankle-bone, a die
(pi. dice).
UiS^III c. ace. pers. et J^
rei to requite, recom-
pense one for sthg.
^ ^ -^
.Ji5 impf. w to be unthank-
ful, to deny.
Glossabt B.
147*
wsb' vl. *Lft5^unbeliev- \^%j^impf. a to hide one's
ing. self.
^JjC^impf. u to wrap in a 'yS'pl ^^-i5" treasure.
{jS impf. u to give one a
surname contg. ^^t-
^^ med. . to be, exist.
(Sometimes the perf. of
this verb is to be trans-
lated by our present).
c, ace, (§§ 110, 149) to
be something, c. J to
be translated by "to
have".
^bwo pi XjLCoI place.
shroud.
Ji^impf. ^, c. ace. pers. et
r. to do sthg. in some
one's place; to protect
s. 0. from sthg.
Jr (§ 119 &) totality; be-
fore determ. subst., all;
before indeterm., every.
UJi^as often as . . .
-Jiy // c. ace. pers. to
speakwith, address one.
V to speak, talk, make »-ix5^how ?
speeches, c. ^ to pro- j(§§95<7;147&)acorrobo-
nounce, utter. rative particle.
I^Tword. J prep. (§§ 95 ^i; 117;
130; 131; 132) for; is
*^^speech, talk, con-
versation.
j^(§ 15) how much?
U^(d -H U) as.
G
JuL«i^ perfect.
sign /)f the dative ; on
account of, for . . . sake
(giving purpose, mo-
tive); at (the time of).
J conj. c. subj. (§ 100)
K*
148*
Glossaey B.
Jo jj elai. tXJI tasty,
delicious, sweet.
Id impf. a, c. ace, to
in order that; c. mod.
because.
y (§§ 101 &; 111; 150c)
not, no. S^ prep. c. gen.
without. By means of
3 a preceding negation
is very frequently re- yjjk) impf. u to be fine,
remain in
s . ^
^LuJ jt?/. ^jJ>J\ tongue.
(^j^»flj F7// to cling to.
sumed.
J/y, ^ (often ^;)
nevertheless, but.
d^ (also dJLx.)i?/. k)G^
angel.
vtt^ /m;?/. <3f to tarry,
delay.
jj^ impf, a to put on.
IV c. 2 «cc. to clothe.
(j*hxJ^i?/.(j*o!^ cloth-
ing, dress.
i\^impfa c. (^ or c.acc. to
overtake.
jj, 1. J9er5. 06 jJ, 2>W/?/*. «
to be tasty, sweet.
slender, kind.
Go J
^ o\n\ c. o kindness,
graciousnesSjtowar ds. . .
v^ftjjy kind,
v,.^ /m/?/. <3J to play, sport.
JdiJ(§ 147) may be, perhaps,
^jul impf. a to curse.
JUjJ a curse.
v..^ // c. ace. pers. et to
to surname, give a nick-
name to.
jvaJ impf a to swallow,
gulp down.
G ^ o>
aL^jiJ a morsel.
Glossary B.
149'
^J impf, a to meet, meet
with.
IV c. ace. to throw.
X to throw one's self,
to lie.
p (§ 101 c) not.
UJ conj. after, when.
p j9«r^. if, introduces a
condition, which is not
likely to be fulfilled.
J•^l w^J. . to blame.
Ur^ ^^- ^lyi colour, sort,
kind.
U not (of. § 150).
L^vLo Ma'rib, a town in
South Arabia.
6 o
JUt5 resemblance , like-
ness ; the like, same ; one
(pers. or thing) like, cf.
§ 145 &.
Jlajo resemblance, na-
ture, quality(of athing).
jTj^ impf. a to put to the
test.
^ (§§50; 110; 144) not
to be, to be non-exis-
tent.
J^, xiU pi JLJ (§ 90i?) ^ ^wip/. uc.^io pass by.
town. aUj4XJt = &AjJuo
^^aJI Medina.
night.
Lo, 16 Uo;?ron.(§15)what?
(§ 14) that which, what,
somethg. that.
Lo conj. (§ 158 b) so
long as.
Hwo "time". 5
HyX
"r
once.
often.
pl \^\yo
sJyo bitterness.
•jjol (§ 90^) man.
G:&-.o
5 tool woman, wife.
150*
Glossary B.
'-if
tus, manly virtue.
jjU\yo pi. au\!^ mar-
grave, prefect.
yjbJ^ impf. a to be or be-
come sick.
(jdjyjo sick.
oyjQ Fto roll (in the dust).
^yjQ Miriam, Mary.
j^^Mjjo impf. a c^^to wipe,
wipe off, away.
^.ju^l Christ, the
Messiah.
vii-wux) / to take hold of,
si0ze.
r to hold on by sthg.
Lwlio IV to enter on the
eventide; to do some-
thing late.
^couo impf. i to go, walk;
^^ inf
^J^jo impf. i to go, betake
one's self to.
^(§71^)^^/.
G^ ^^ ^ c^
yhjo pi. xLk/)| rain, shower
of rain.
>' ^ y
Jiix) impf u to defer (a
payment).
G o ^
JJoxj inf.
•JO prep, with; besides;
alongside of.
HJoejo stomach.
V-A.AX) impf u to hate.
vi:JLo hatred.
iUCo Mecca.
oXo «wp/. w to tarry, stay.
^.-^
to fill sthg. with . . .
VIII to become filled.
vijijo impf i, c. ace. to
rule, govern, possess.
// to appoint as king.
G >
vJiXo dominion, sover-
eignty, reign, riches.
Go
dUU possessions,
riches.
Glossary B.
i5r
AXjq pi ^yjLo king.
^J^Lo ceremony of
marriage.
XXJL^x) p/. dLJU^ king-
dom, sovereignty.
9 ^ ^ 9^0 ^
4250Lo for d^ «^. under
^Zc '= J^ + J^ (§5
note &).
^jjo who? (§ 15); he who,
they that; one that,
whoso, whoever (§§ 14,
154, 159).
jjjo prep, of (== some of,
in partitive sense §114),
belonging to; with the
negation it has a streng-
thening effect, § 141 ;
consisting of; away
from, from (separation.
jjjo {/'rom ^6 jj^) since.
•Xjo impf. «, c. 2 ace. to
debar one from sthg., re-
fuse, prevent one doing
sthg.; c. ace. et ^ to
defend one from or
against sthg.
VIII to protect one's
self.
Igjo imp/". «, c. ^ to be
skilled, clever, expert,
wellversed.
y^ wedding-present,
price of the bride (paid
to her father).
(:i>Lo med. . to die.
// to put to death.
SO-'
icy^o ^^/' death.
C5^y
oJ;J dead.
Moses.
point of departure); JL/> p/. Jlj^! goods and
hence in comparison = chattels, property,
than;through(passage). flocks.
152*
GrLOSSABY B.
gli (§ 90 q) pi. 1\1a
water.
sjolx) pi. Jol*jo table,
tray.
/ CU med. ^ II c. ^joj to
\S distinguish.
Lo II c. ace. pers. et l->
rei to give one informa-
tion regarding.
Fto give one's self out
for a prophet.
xiS VIII to awake up.
j i?/. iLuol vel
U^
prophet.
sLo the office, rank,
of prophet.
tX^ em/?/, w to be brave,
courageous.
G^ (if
id^ courage, magna-
nimity.
[V^* i?/- (••^ constellation.
Lai impf. u to become free,
to save one's self.
IV causative.
9 Of
^j.^ pron. we.
\jk Fto turn aside, to draw
back, retire.
Go^ 0^0^
J^ coll., nom. unit. 'iSjk
palm.
Ijo m;?/. fl!, ^. j^^ to re-
pent of sthg., feel sorry,
*Jo III to be one's boon
companion.
|VJ Jo J»/. iUotXj boon
companion, mess-mate.
IJii /// call out, c. ace.
to call to some one.
X JO IV to warn.
c'yS impf. i to remove.
F7// to strip off, dis-
place.
Jyi impf. i to descend,
alight, stop, lodge,
encamp, e. J^t to alight
at, lodge, stay with. . .
IV to send down (in
Glossary B.
153*
particular , a revela-
tion).
G o^
J'yXjo pi. JvLuo dwell-
ing-place, abode, halt-
ing-place.
^^ impf. a to copy.
'iJS^ pl' ^i-'vwo a copy.
^^^ impf, a to forget.
^jUuIo tw/*. forgetting.
eLIo (§ 90/) women.
dJ^ III c. 2 ace. to ad-
jure by God.
ia^o e>w/?/. « to be lively,
in good spirits.
^Lw^j m/.
i impf. u to set up.
y^juoS share, portion.
i impf. « to be a true
friend.
woi impf. u, c. ace. to
help, succour.
V (denom.) to become
a Christian, to live as
a Christian.
pl.
^)
Laj
a Christian.
9 9 ^o^
syaj<^\ al-Mansur,
the second Abbaside
Caliph 754—775.
L^ VIII to draw (the
sword).
^,hs emp/*. « to butt with
the horns.
j^jjaj 2mp/'. i to talk.
/r to make, compel
to talk.
JLj impf. u to see, look
at, examine, reflect.
IxS impf. a to be soft, well
off, affluent.
jv*3 coll. a herd of
camels.
aUjtjaffluence,welfare.
liS part, yes, yes in-
deed.
154*
Glossaey B;
pi impf. u vel i c. ^j^ to
flee from, avoid.
(jjJu II to cheer, relieve.
1^ fern., pi. ju*a3|,
(jwfcij soul (anima ap-
petens), self (§ \2e)\
lite. wAXj ^j^ Juci>
^jA*Ai the taking of a
life not for a life^ i. e.
without a murder hav-
ing been committed.
iii mjt?/. a to be of use.
VIII c. o make use
of, profit by . . .
auLftjuo j9/. *iUjo use,
useful qualities,benefit.
(^^S ///to play the hypo-
crite.
lii ^'mp/. e, c. ^ pers.
to reproach one with
sthg.
VIII to avenge one's
self.
e
x^ an act of revenge.
v^^^Xi 2';^/?/*. u to afflict,
hurt, injure.
XaXo affliction, trouble.
Jo mp/. i to marry.
/// ?^.
Xid.^ to wish to marry.
ooUil «-Ki marriage
with one's stepmother.
tXXi V to be hard, strait,
troublesome.
yX^ IV to deny. c. ace. r.
et Js£^ to find strange,
to take offence at sthg.
Jl^ impf. u to be fat, large.
tX^ large, aspiring,
generous.
5-§S J9/. >L^ f stream.
^^ impf. a to forbid.
Vlllto arrive at, come
to an end.
z^'
i Noah.
Glossary B.
155*
J05J a man s name.
^b Am. j?/.^|^ fire, hell- |j^, ^m. ^(\sQ (§ 13 &),
fire. this, here.
»jj light. Vr^ impf. u to flee.
cli pi pip i kind, species, ICi impf. i to put to flight,
different (sort of). ^// to turn and flee.
(^Li Hasim, man's name ;
A-wLi jjb Muhammed's
clan.
J^ part, interrog.
(vJC, ^ pron.o.pers.plur.
msc. they (§12 «).
1^ impf. u to intend to do
sthg.
iL*^ energy.
JOL^I India,, the Hindus.
lift j9ro/i. he.
"Xsb med. , F// to collapse.
(^4\5ft impf. i to lead hy ^^ ^ ^
.1.1, , .1 .^LS med. , to be easy,
the right way, to guide u ^ ^
SLsU i?/. ^•.i female camel.
ILS /w^^. ., impf. a to lie
down, sleep.
1^ impf. u to part from
some one.
moval of Muhammed
from Mecca to Medina.
9.^0 ^"^
0>\s^d<^\ Hadhad, name
of a king.
aright.
j^iX^I al-Mahdi,
name of the third Abba-
side Caliph, 775 — 785.
X c. \^ io despise.
^.|li insignificance.
^^ impf. «, c. ace. to
fall in love with*
15G*
Glossary B.
EJIS air, sky.
^ pron. Ill fern. she.
y conj. and, also, even.
Asseverative particle
w. the genit.: xJUK by
God (be it sworn), c,
ace. with (§ 112).
v^si.. «mjt?/. 2 to be neces-
sary; to be legally in-
cumbent on one.
IV io necessitate.
vel Kj^,
Cb^yc vei ^J^yo
(part. act. IV) pi.
v^jA^s^l^jo that which
brings about sthg.,occa-
sion, cause.
J^* impf. i to find.
jt:^. V to take the direc-
tion of . . ., set out.
21^^ pl. s^^ lace,
countenance.
s
Jl^L one, single.
^^ /F c. Jj^ pers. to
reveal to one, inspire.
4>« ^mj?/. « to love.
VI to love mutually.
'ii^Jo love, inclination.
oi^^tmpf.^iXj to set, place,
leave, let.
// to deposit.
/?er5. to intrust sthg.
to some one.
2bufc>^ jE?/. ^1^^ pro-
perty given in trust, a
deposit (of money or
its equivalent).
vi?."^ imp/'. [^J^ to inherit.
VI to receive as one's
portion.
<hX^ heir.
5JJ imp/, i to go down,
arrive.
JiiCr Waraka, man's name.
Glossary B.
157=
G ^
nister.
vizier, mi-
^f^^ impf. a to be dirty.
i^I mj9/*. *^ to be pos-
sible, be open (to one).
IV to bring one into
a comfortable position;
to get riches for s. o.
JwA^r impf, a to be sleepy.
»_?. v^r eVwjo/. i to describe.
k^o description.
Juo. 2^^/. 2 to connect,
arrive at.
VI to be mutually
attached to each other.
^r IV to bequeath by
will.
s
/l.^r executor (of a
will).
i.o^ em/?/". «^ to lay.
VI c. J to be humble.
to appear humbly be-
fore . . .
VIII to be humbled,
powerless.
*A^^ low, ignoble,
mean.
*^«^ ^/. /*^'vo place,
position, dwelling-
place.
ixk\ impf. i to make an
agreement, promise.
VIII to accept a pro-
mise, to promise one
another.
jULu; rendezvous,
appointed time.
Jax. e>wjo/. 2 to warn, ex-
hort.
VIII to suffer oneself
to be corrected.
^L^. p/. &A£ • I vessel,recep-
tacle.
tXiT xm/;/. / to go forth
158*
Glossary B.
to a prince, c. J^ to
come to.
(^^ III c. ace. to agree
with, correspond to.
^^ impf. i to be complete.
/// c. ace, to come to,
arrive at.
^i^y^i, id.S\ sUyj God
has taken him (the Mos-
lem) to himself, has
brought him to a bless-
ed end. Pass, to die a
blessed death.
sLi. dying; a blessed
end.
6 Op-
timo.
«iSr impf. «iS to fall, fall
upon, light upon ; c.J^
to find some one.
IV to excite.
i^IsT impf. i to stop, stand;
c. J^ to go up to one.
^•r V c. ace. to beware,
be afraid, of sthg.
VIII to be afraid.
Jl5^. II to appoint as over-
seer. Fto trust (in).
s
Jji5^^ representative,
vice-gerent, agent.
Jj. impf. i to bring forth.
IV c. ace. to beget.
X e. ace. to beget (a
son) by a woman.
JJ^ pL 0"^^^ child,
son, lad. (In the sing,
also colled.).
aLijJj feast, marriage feast.
^I impf 2, c. «cc. to be
near.
// to turn one's back,
to turn round; c. ^i
to turn away from.
^l^ pl. :^U!^I near;
esp. 'near to God' =
saint, helper.
Jyo pl. (Jlyo client,
slave.
Glossary B.
159*
v,^' impf, v,^^ c. 2 ace,
to present some one
with sthg.).
U part, of exclam. (§ 85)
0!
jjrflo impf. «, c. \jo to
despair of . . .
ajOj i?/. *Uo! orphan.
Jaib ^/wp/". « to be awake.
IV io wake.
X to have one's self
waked, to awake.
^jy^i on the right, the
right side, right hand.
<>y^\ coll. the Jews.
■_4^v«,^ Joseph.
, w^ Go" 6 s::^
^ jL> Yatrib, name of Me- ^^j pi. j»LI (§ 90 s) day,
dina before Islam. pi- length of reign. I^
on the day that... (§129).
Li-j one day; with suff.
e. g. viLo^ thy day
(§ 125). f;pi(§ii8«)
to-day. j^^ (= ^^.
61) in that day, then.
Jo fern., pi, JjI (§ 90 r)
hand,power,possession.
IJlj mjo/". i to play (either
with arrows, by wh. lots
were cast, or with dice).
Iwjyc play, game,game
of chance.
^lio a Greek.
CORRiaENDA.
pp. 56, 67 for headings as printed read: § 65 Nomina Kelativa;
§ 66 Nomina Deminutiva.
p. 68 heading read: § 78 Nom. Diptota.
p. 93 1. 4, for 'you' read 'them'.
^ , .'»■'
p. 40^ 4, read Qi)J>^^.
s
^:
p. 42*, 15 read Z/ya.
p. 42*, 7 read ^U.
> ^ ^ o ,.c
p. 54% 2 read j**JU9U£U^I.
p. 55*^, 7 read ^^I.
PBINTED BY W. DRITGUIilN, LEIPZIG.
OF THB
/ TTTaTtnr'-DOT'T'-V^
REUTHER & REICHARD, PUBLISHERS, BERLIN.
CHRESTOMATHY
OF
ARABIC PROSE-PIECES
BY
DR. R. BRUNNOW.
Crown 80, Cloth pp. 334, price 8 s. 6 d.
DELECTUS VETERUM
CARMINUM ARABICORUM
Carmina selegit et edidit
THEOD. NOELDEKE.
Glossarium confecit
AUG. MUELLER.
Crown 80. Cloth pp. 256, price 7 s. 6 d.
AN
ARABIC BIBLE-CHRESTOMATH.Y
WITH A GLOSSARY
Edited by
DR. GEORGE JACOB.
Crown 80. Cloth pp. 64, price 2 s. 6 d.
LONDON: WILLIAMS & NORGALE, 14, Henrietta Street.
NEW YORK: B. WESTERMANN & Co., 812, Broadway.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA Lt-'RARY
HOME USE
CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT
MAIN LIBRARY
This book is due on the last date stamped below.
1 -month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405.
6-month loans may be recharged by bringing books
to Circulation Desk.
Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior
to due date.
ALL BOOKS ARE SUBJECT TO RECALL 7 DAYS
AFTER DATE CHECKED OUT.
JUL 2 H 1974 2 5
left gi>ie cttfT JUL 1 74
1^
LD21— A-40m-5,'74
(R8191L)
General Library
University of California
Berkeley
^v ^.:m.
Cj^^
IS ^ .
UNIVERSITY OF CAIylFORNIA IvIBRARY
%-,;:?.
i:\k-
^m^A^f
